IRortbwestern "Glnírersíts Xibrarç
4
1 Evanston, Dlínoís
THE GIFT OF
'A.
St'i.x'i
$
¡
THE ELEMENTS
OF
GEEEK GEAMMAE.
*
$
»
«
*
»
THE ELEMENTS
OF
GEBEK
an A MM A E,
INCLTTDING
ACCIDEÍTCE, lEEEGULAR VEEBS, AND PEINCIPLES
OF DEEIVATION AND COMPOSITION;
ADAPTED TO THE SYSTEM OF CRUDE FORMS,
BY
J. Gr. GKEENWOOD,
^ J ^ ^ J ^ »
•
■"j a » •
FELLOW OP tTNTVERBITT COLLEGE, LONDOK ;
PRINCIPAL OF OWENS COLLEGE, MANCHESTER.
• • •
• n •
9 99 4
9^9
• 9 9 9 0
9 0 9 i
9 9 0 9 9
9 9 90 9 9,
:
: i'\
9 9 9
9 9
a
9 9 9 9 9 ^ J
Í 9 9
I 9 9 9 9
9 9 9
0 9 9 9
9 9
9 999
99 9 9 »
9 9 00 99
0 9 9 ^09 999 09
FOURTH* ßl>n*ION.' •• *
9
9
9 9 9 9 99
9 99^*
•• » » * •
■t a J » a ®
9 9 9 9 •*
t a**
9 J 9 9
9 9 9
• 9 ^
• • 9^9^
^ 9 9 • 9^
9 9 9 9
9 9 J
9 9 ê
9 t »
9 9
9 J 9 J J J J
^ a J
99 *
I
ITonbon :
MACMILLAN AND CO.
1873.
LONDON :
R. CLAV, 80N3, AND TAYLOR, PRINTERS,
BRRAD STRRRT HILL.
^ x'ion.
t
PREFACE.
That method of teaching the Accidence of the Classical Lan¬
guages which, under the name .of the " Crude-Form System,"
discards the fiction under which the nominative case of a
noun, or the 1st person of the present tense of a verb, is
treated as, in some peculiar sense, the word^ from which the
■other cases or tenses are deduced, has so far made good its
%
ground as no longer to stand in need of defence or apology.
That the nominative case is as much a formed word as the
accusative or genitive, that is, made like the other cases by
«
addition of a suffix, or by some equivalent process, from a
stem or declinable form called in this Grammar the Crude
jFojtw,* and that the present tense of a verb is also very gene¬
rally made in like manner from a verbal stem ; that the
various cases and tenses are easily made from the stem or
crude form, but only by most artificial and sometimes gro¬
tesque devices* from the nominative case and present tense
respectively ; that the otherwise perplexing diversities of
declension and conjugation are thus simply explained, regard
being paid to the, different terminations of the crude form ;
that analogies, real and not arbitrary, are readily seized and
pursued to their legitimate consequences, even by young stu*
dents, so that an effort of memory is converted into a reason¬
ing process ; and that the science of tracing the derivation of
* Crude forms are indicated in this Grammar by a hyphen affixed :
thus, îwTToç being the nom. sing, of the Greek word signifying horse,
iwíTov, the accus, sing., etc., the crude-form state of the word is written
IffTTO-.
vi 1 PREFACE.
one word from another, either in the same or a kindred lan¬
guage, (which, when the nominative case or the present tense
is taken for the starting-point, often seems to the beginner
little else than a succession of lucky guesses, in which he
chiefly admires the ingenuity, perhaps the audacity, of his
tutor,) is brought under obvious and easily stated rules, scarcely
less rigorous than those which govern mathematical opera^
tions;—all this will scarcely be questioned as matter of
theory;* and it is believed that the experience of those who
hav^e made fair trial of the system would shew that it has
succeeded well in practice. Yet while the admirable Latin
Grammar of Professor Key has been in use for more than ten
years, and though Exercise Books, both Greek and Latin,
have been published on this system,'}' no corresponding Greek
Grammar, so far as the writer knows, has yet appeared,
although the system is perhaps still better adapted to the
Greek than to the Latin language. To supply this deficiency
the present Grammar is oiFered. It has been in a great
measure compiled, but with many changes and considerable
additions, from the Elementary Grammars of Professor G.
Curtius J and Dr. H L. Ahrens,§ which, like many other ap¬
proved Greek Grammars in Germany, are founded on the
system of Crude Forms.
The writer's especial thanks are due to his friends and
former Tutors, Professors Key and Maiden, of University
* On the Crude-form System see the Preface to Professor Key's
(larger) Latin Grammar, and articles by the same author in Bell's
English Journal of Education^ Nos. 48 and 49 ; also an article by
Mr. John Robson, B. A., in the Classical Museum^ vol. iv., p. 388.
f Constructive Greek Exercises, and Constructive Latin Exercises, by
John Robson, B.A, published by Walton and Maberly.
Î Griechische &chulgrammatiky von Lr. G. Curtius. Prag.
§ Griechische Formenlehre des Homerischen und Attischen Dialektes^
von Dr. H. L. Ähren«. Göttingen.
PREFACE., Viî
»
College, London. In common with all who have made the
Greek and Latin languages their special study, he is, under
great obligations to Professor Key for his critical researches in
classical philology, and for the many important and original
additions he has made to it as a science. It was, moreover,
at Mr. Key's suggestion that the compilation of this book was
at first undertaken; much valuable assistance and advice have
been received from him during its progress;* and, in many
points of form and arrangement, free use has been made of
his Latin Grammar: but the references contained in the notes
to the Grammar, and the other philological writings of Pro-
«
fessor Key, furnish no adequate measure of the extent to
which this book is indebted to him.
Had the excellent but brief fragment of a Greek Grammar
for Schools, printed many years ago by Professor Maiden, been
completed, this attempt would never have been made. While
the sheets were passing through the press, the writer was
favoured with the perusal, in MS., of the earlier portion (on
Letter-changes and on the Substantives) of a much more
extended Grammar by the same distinguished scholar.f From
this source, as well as from sundry criticisms kindly com¬
municated from time to time,| some valuable improvements
were derived ; and very frequently, when the writer found
the methods he had adopted corroborated by Mr. Maiden's
MS., he was reminded how much of what was most accurate
* Particularly in the §§ on Letter-changes, and on the laws of Verbal
formations. Many of the illustrations given in the foot-notes are fimnded
on suggestions from Prof. Key.
t "Ex pede Herculem."—It is impossible not to express a hope that
this Grammar may be in due time completed : it would leave little
to be desired in this department of Greek learning.
It Particularly on some portions of the detailed conjugation of ypä<p-,
§§ 353, etc. The rules in §§ 115—120 are principally taken, with the
author's leave, from the fragment mentioned in tlic text.
vih
PREPACB
^in his knowledge of the Greek language was due, directly/
or indirectly, to the Professor of Greek in University College,
It is intended shortly to publish a brief Syntax, with
chapters on the Dialectical Varieties, and on Accents.*
Owens College, Manchester,
May 15, 1857.
The marks of accent are not printed in the body of this Granimar,
except in a very few instances to distingnish between identical tbrms.
Until the laws which govern them are understood they are of little use
to the learner, and by their omission space is gained for marking the
quantity of all doubtful vowels, — a matter, it is believed, of much
greater importance to a beginner.
GREEK GRAMMAR
INTRODUCTION.
1. The Greek language was spoken by the ancient Hellenes
ÇE\\rjP€s), the inhabitants of Greece, its islands, and colonies.
It is akin to the Sanscrit, Persian, and Latin languages, and to
those of the Slavonic, the Lithuanian, the German, and the Celtic
nations, etc. All these are sister tongues, and together form the
Indo-Germanic family of languages.
2. The Greek people was divided at an early period into tribes,
each of which spoke a distinct dialect. The principal dialects of
the Greek language are the .^olic, the Doric, and the Ionic.
3. The Ionic dialect was spoken by the Ionian Greeks in
Attica, in many islands, and in the Ionian colonies in Asia
Minor. Of all the dialects it was the first which was cultivated
in poetry. It gave rise to three distinct but closely related dia¬
lects, viz. :—
а. The old Ionic, or Epic, dialect, which is preserved in the
poems of Homer, Hesiod, and their successors.
б. The new Ionic dialect, known to us principally from the
History of Herodotus.
c. The Attic dialect, in which were written the numerous works
in poetry and prose which Athens produced in her prime. The
principal writers of the Attic dialect are the tragic poets '
iEschylus, Sophocles, and Euripides ; the comic poet Aristopha¬
nes ; the historians Thucydides and Xenophon ; the philoso¬
pher Plato ; and the great orators Lysias, Demosthenes, and
.^Ischines.
Through the pre-eminence of Athens in Greece, and the excel¬
lence of the Athenian literature, the Attic became the principal
dialect : it has since been made the acknowledged standard of
2
ACCIDENCE.
the language ; and when Greek simply is spoken of, Attic Greek
is commonly meant.
4. Varieties of the ^olic dialect were spoken by the .Allans
in Asia Minor, Bœotia, and Thessaly. The poet Alcœus, and the
poetess Sappho, in the island of Lesbos, wrote in the .^lic
dialect.
5. The Boric dialect was spoken by the Dorians in North
Greece, Peloponnesus, and Crete, and in the numerous Dorian
colonies, especially in Sicily and Lower Italy. Doric is the dia¬
lect of the lyric poet Pindar and of the bucolic poet Theocritus.
The choral odes of the Attic tragedians also contain individual
Doric forms.
6. When Athens had ceased to be the leading city of Greece,
the Attic dialect stÜl continued to be the speech of all cultivated
Greeks. It soon began, however, to fall away from its ancient
purity ; and from the third century before Christ, the common
dialect koivo àiaXeicros) was distinguished from the older Attic.
7.- Mid-way between the older Attic and the common dialect
stands the great philosopher Aristotle. Among the later authors
the most important are the historians Polybius, Plutarch, Arrian,
and Dio Cassius ; the geographer Strabo ; and the rhetoricians
Dionysius of Halicamassus, and Lucian.
ACCIDENCE.
8. The letters of the Greek alphabet are as follows
Large letters. Small letters. Name. Frouunciatíon.
A
a
Alpha
a (short or longy
B
߀
Beta
b.
r
yr
Gamma
g (as in ^wn).
A
d
Delta
d.
E
e
E psïlon
e (short).
F
f
Vau
w.
z
Ci
Zeta
(z).
H
V
Eta
e (long).
e
ôâ
Thêta
th (as in tkin).
I
1
Iota
i (short or long).
K
K
Kappa
k.
A
X
Lambda
L
ACCIDENCE
3
ge letters.
SmaU letters.
Name,
Proimnciation.
M
H-
Mu
m.
N
V
Nu
n.
S
ê
Xi
X.
O
o
0 micron
0 (short).
n
TT VT
Pi
P-
0
1
Koppa
k (before o).
p
P
Eho
r.
2
<r s
Sigma
s (as in sun).
T
r 1
Tau
t.
Y
V
U psïlon
u (short or long).
<P
Phi
ph or f.
X
X
Chi
ch (as in German).
■«P
Psi
ps.
a
Cû
0 mëga
0 (long).
9. The characters of the Greek alphabet do not differ mate¬
rially from those of the Latin, or of modem languages. All are
derived from the Phœnician alphabet.
10. r y before the gutturals y, ic, x> êt pronounced as n in
/ony ; hence in Latin words derived from the Greek n is substi¬
tuted for it. Ttyycd was pronounced tengo; Anchises;
ff>opfj.ty^,phormins,
11. The letter vau, F F (called also, from its shape, digamma),
was entirely rejected in Ionic and Attic, It has even disappeared
from the manuscripts of the Homeric poems ; though it is plain,
from metrical considerations, that when those poems were com¬
posed, the letter had not yet become obsolete, at least in pro¬
nunciation. Its existence is, besides, sufficiently attested by
ancient inscriptions. For these reasons, and from its use in
explaining the inflections of words, and the connection of the
Greek with kindred languages,* vau has been restored to its
place in the alphabet.
12. The most ancient Greek seems to have possessed a conso¬
nantal t, equivalent to the English y (consonant). Though this
letter has disappeared from the classical Greek, traces of it are
♦ Compare, for instance, the Greek words oevoç, ïiftv, ioov (i. e. foi-
t'oç, fidítv^ (àfov), with the Latin rtnww, vîdërëj ovum; and epyop
{F(pyov) with the English work, and German Werk,
4
ACCIDENCE.
found in the changes arising out of its combination with the
several consonants.*
13. The precise sound of f has been lost. It is veiy commonly
pronounced as ds or d%; yet in many forms it is more accurately
represented by sd, or perhaps by the sounds heard in both parts
of ^ud^e. Hence it occupies the same place in the alphabet as
our g, which before i and e often has this sound,
14. 9 was used only before o : as, ^opivôoç, SvpaCoo-tot, on
coins, for Viopivôos^ ^vpäKoaioi, Hence its name koppa, as op¬
posed to kappa, which was once used only before a,t'as was the
case always with the Latin k—kalumnia, Karthago, kalmdœ ;
while the Latin q was used only before u, which in the old Latin
alphabet represented the Greek o. Observe, also, that the Latin
q (Q) occupies the same place in the Latin alphabet as 9 in the
Greek.
15. The character a is used at the beginning and in the middle
of words, Ç at the end : thus, crvv, o-ttw, rjaav ; but irovoç, K€pas.
In compound words s is sometimes used at the end of the first
element of the compound : as, 7Tpos-€p)(^opai, 8vç-ßäToç^
16. Y V was probably pronounced nearly as the French u or
German ü : tvtvtîù as tüpto, approaching typtö,
17. In addition to the letters already given, the Greek lan¬
guage possesses the character ' {spiritus asper, the aspirate or
rough breathing), which is pronoiinced like the English h, and is
written over the vowel to whioh it belongs: thus, is pro¬
nounced hex ; 'Ektû>p, Hector, The aspirate is usually written
over the second vowel of a diphthong : as, ovros, houtos. Every
initial p takes the aspirate ; and when double p occurs in the
middle of a word, * is sometimes placed over the second : thus,
payjrados, rhapsOdus ; Tlvppos, Pgrr/iîis, With this exception, ' is
only found at the beginning of words.
18. The sign, ' {spiritus lems, the smooth breathing), is usually
placed over all initial vowels and diphthongs which do not take
* It is plain, however, that the so-called consonantid t, y, and w (f),
are merely the vowels i (as in French) and u {od) uttered with great
rapidity.
t An ancient inscription contains the word f-VG^ODORKAS, c.
Av9oèopKaç, thus exhibiting kappa and koppa in one and the same
word before a and o respectively (Rose, Inscr. Gr. Tab. viii.).
OP SOUNDS AND lElTER-CHANGES.
5
* ; but as this sign only denotes the absence of the rough breath¬
ing, it has not been thought necessary to use it in this grammar.
19. The sign at the end of a word, signifies that a vowel or
diphthong has been thrown away : thus, nap' cKcivíp, for napa
€K€iv(û, hy the side of yonder man ; tn aparrepay for €nX aptcmpa,
on the left hand. The sign when so used, is called the apos¬
trophe.
20. The same sign is employed to signify that a crasis (#cpá<r¿s>
mixing), or contraction, has taken place of two words into one :
thus, Tovvopa, for TO ovopa ; /cayabo?, for Kat aya6os. In this case,
the letters are written close together.
21. The mark " over a vowel denotes that that vowel is long ;
that it is short ; that it is common, i. e. variably long or
short. But, as the length of the vowels e and o is already de¬
noted by the character (e or r¡, o or <*>), the signs of quantity are
only used with a, t, and v,
22. For the division of sentences and periods, the comma and
full stop are employed in Greek. If the point is placed above the
line, it is equivalent to our colon or semicolon : as. kançpà r}v^
TOT€ rjkOçv ayyiKoç, it was evening ; then came a messenger. The
sign of interrogation was ; : as, rX etnas ; what did yotc say ?
OF SOUNDS AND LETTER-CHANGES.
23. The natural order of the vowels has been ascertained to be
t, e, a, o, V, pronounced as on the continent. The three interme¬
diate vowels, 6, a, o, which are nearly akin, are sometimes called
the strong, and the extreme vowels, i, v, as partaking in some
degree of the nature of consonants (§ 12, n.), the weak vowels.
24. The consonants are divided, accordingly as they are or are
not audible without the aid of a vowel, into mutes and semi¬
vowels.
25. The mutes are classified, according to the part of the
mouth by which they are produced, into throat-sounds (guttu¬
rals), teeth-sounds (dentals), and lip-sounds (labials). They are
again distinguished, according to the strength with which they
are uttered, as hard (tenues), soft (medige), and aspirated (aspi-
ratso).
6
OF SOUNDS AND LETTER-CHANGES
Hard Soft Aspirated
(tenues), (mediœ). (aspiratse).
Throat-sounds (gutturals) « y X k-sounds.
Teeth-sounds (dentals) t d Ú t-sounds.
Lip-sounds (labials) w ß (f> p-sounds.
26. The semivowels are p, X, y (nasal), v, fx, o-, and f. The
three nasal sounds, y (nasal), v, p, correspond to the three classes
of mutes, guttural, dental, and labial* : o- and f are dental and
labial spirants^ and the consonanb-i (y) would have been the cor¬
responding guttural ; p, X, p, v, are sometimes called liquids, and
o- the sibilant.
27. From the union of o- with certain of the mutes, arise the
double consonants, yj/- is only a shorter symbol for tto- or
(¡>0-, I for K0 or xo'f C h)r the union of 6 with a spirant (tr or con-
sonant-i).t But ¿ is not written for ko- in compounds of the
preposition ck : as, c/co-wfci), I rescue; not €¿6)¿'a).
28. Vowels,—The strong (intermediate) vowels followed by either
of the weak (extreme) vowels form diphthongs : thus, e-ií becomes
€v, well ; 7ra-tÔ- becomes Traib-, boy ; yçvç-ï becomes yev«, to the
race. The diphthongs are as follows : €¿, r¡, ai, ä, oi, ®, ev, tjv, av, ov.
In diphthongs compounded of rj, à, or w, and i, the i was not at
aU, or but slightly, audible, and hence in our editions of Greek
authors it is usually written underneath the long vowels {r¡, a,
(Ù ; iota subscript).
29. The Greek diphthongs were probably formed by the rapid
succession of the several sounds. In England they are generally
pronounced as the same combinations of letters would be pro¬
nounced in English.
30. If two vowels which usually form a diphthong are to be
pronounced separately, the sign of diœresis ( ", hiaipeais, separar
tion) is placed over the latter : thus, ndià-, hoy, is pronounced
porid; avnvo-, sleepless, OrUpno-. _
31. The (so-called) diphthong vi arises from the union of v
with the consonant-t ; hence it is found only before vowels, and
0
* Hence the combinations yK, yy, etc., vr, vi, etc., and pr, etc., are
very frequent : a/xTreXog, afi<pt, ayKvpa, ayyeXoç, avrX, avipoc ; ampelos,
ampAi, awÄüra, anpelos, and, andros.
f Compare Jupiter for Diu-piter, diurnal and Jouma?, etc.
OF SOUNDS AND LETTER-CHANGES. 7
should be pronounced : as, pvia (moo-ya), a fly ; vioç, (hoo-
yos), a son. Compare musca (French, mouché)^ and fllius (Spanish,
hijo.)
32. The (weak) vowels, c, v, before e, rj, a, o, oj, generally remain
unchanged, each vowel retaining its separate sound : as, ao(f)L-a-,
wisdom; Xv-©, 1 loosen ; u-ei, it rains.
33. Vowels identical with, or akin to, each other, are rarely
allowed to stand together. To prevent their juxtaposition, con¬
traction is resorted to. The following rules are observed :—
I. In the contraction of like vowels,
aa becomes ä :
thus yepaä
becomes yepâ.
€€
€l
airee
airei.
V
airerfre
ainjre.
€€l
et.
aireei
airei.
U
r
Xiïos
Xior.
OO
ov
ttXooí
ffXovf.
0©
©
¿Í7X0©
¿"i;X©.
001
0(
¿rjXoois
ÇrjXois,
GOV
ou
ttXoou
TTXou
[n the contraction of unlike vowels,
prevails over a or e.
«0 becomes
© :
thus Ttpaopev
becomes rlpicopev.
a©
©
TÏfÀQCù
rt/x©.
aoi
©
4
aoiàrj
<ú8r¡.
aov
6)
TÏpaov
rip©.
oa
©*
aiboü
aiB<û.
€0
ov
yeveog
yevovs.
€(ù
©
<f>LXe<ù
<f>iXci).
€0Í
0(
Xpvaeni
Xpoaoi.
fOU
ou
(jíiXeov
<f>ïXov.
0€
ou
(riXoe
¡ijXov.
orj
©
CrjXorjre
¿rjXíúTe.
oa
Ol
¿T)Xoets
¡TjXois.
OTJ
Ol
¿vXoffff
(rjXois.
* But in crasis, oa becomes à: thus,
ó àvrjp becomes 'ävrjp.
avTO' *ädrjg avBâ^rjç,
In Ionic Greek, however, © appears: as, ¿>vr¡p, iTTTruvaS, from itttto-
© V
8
OF SOUNDS AND LETTER-CHANGES
6. When a comes into contact with c (tj), the vowel which pre¬
cedes preponderates.
0€
becomes 5 :
thus a€K(ùv
becomes aKcov,
ar)
à
TiparjTe
Tipäre,
act
a
•
a€iô(û
aàcû.
«
a
4
TÏfxarjs
ripas.
€a
rj*
Keap
KTJp.
eai
V
\veat
\vri.
Tjai
V
\vT]at
Xur/.
In the contraction of eai, however, tt is sometimes found for
jj ; thus, Xveai is contracted into \vci as well as Xv^. Similarly,
atiajç is written as the contracted form of aeiKrjs, unsee7idi/y not
aKrjs.
34. The short vowel of a root is often lengthened, either in the
inflection and derivation of words, or in compensation for the
loss of a dropped consonant.
I. In the inflection and derivation of words,
â generally
becomes rj :
thus ripa-, honour, fut. tense rlpr]<T-,
sometimes
at
(}>äv-, shew, pres. impf. <f>atv-.
€ generally
V
aiT€-, ask, fut. airT]a-,
sometimes
€L
oTTcp-, SOW, pres. impf, owctp-.
o always
CO
^T/Xo-, envy, fut. (rjÁcaa-,
Ï either
I
KpXv-, judge, pres. impf. Kplv-,
or
€t
XtTT-, leave, pres. impf. Kein-,
ij either
V
Xu-, loosen, fut. Xúc-.
or
ev
<Pvy-,flee, pres. impf.
But after e, t, or p, a is lengthened into 5, instead of i; : as,
€a-, fut. €5(7-; ta-, heal, larpo^, physician ¡ opa-, see, opâ-
pâr-, spectacle. Generally, the Attic dialect avoids the combina¬
tions €Tj, 17], pt] ; employing, instead, eâ, tâ, and pä,
II. When the short vowel is lengthened in compensation foi
the loss of a consonant, a is for the most part changed into 5.
even when not preceded by c, t, or p : thus, from ttoj/t-, aU, is
made N. S. irás for Travrs ; e frequently becomes ct, not t] : as.
♦ But in the plurals of neuters of the second declension, cd becomes
ä: ocrrcdso^rd, xpvo'ed=xP^^d. Also, if c or t precedes, ea regularly
becomes a, not rj: as, icXcfdrricXcd, ^vyua:=*vyi3; but *vyir) is also found,
t See, however, § 45 d, on the consonant-*.
OP SOUNDS AND LETTER-CHANGES
0
iifti, 1 am, for ca-fii ; o frequently becomes ov : as, oSovs for
oSovrs, N". S. from oSoi/t-, tooth ; Ï and ii always become ï and u.
35. The three short strong vowels, e, a, o, are often inter¬
changed in one and the same root. In this case, « must usually
be regarded as the original vowel ; thus, rptv-, turn^ crpaTrov, I
tumedj Tpono-f a turning ; yei/etr-, a race^ N. S. yevos (compare, in
Latin, gener-is with the N. S. genus) ; <^Xey-, hurn^ <^Xoy-, aßame^
Sometimes tj becomes <o : as, aprjy-j assist^ ap<úyo-, helper,
36. Consonants,— Consonants are subject, on their concur¬
rence, to yet greater restrictions and changes than vowels.
A guttural or labial mute cannot precede a dental mute, ex¬
cept it be of the same order. Thus the allowable combinations
are /cr, ttt, yb, ßb, <t>^ y and if, through inflection or deriva¬
tion, a mute of a diflerent order is brought before the dental,
the former must be assimilated to the latter. Thus, from the
roots
ttXck-, twist, kKctt-, steal, ypo(j)-, scratch, write,
with the adverbial suffix -brjv, are formed the adverbs
ir\€ybrjp, KXeßbrjp, ypaßbrjp,
for 7r\€Kbr)p, etc. ; from
Xfy-, sag, bLQ>K-, pursue, ßhaß-, hurt,
with the suffix -ôrjpat, of the intin. pas. 1 aor., are formed
XcX^^^^h biùix^^vai, 8\a(l)âr)vai,
for Xeyôrjpai, etc. ; and from
bex-, receive, rpiß-, rub, ypa^-, write,
with the suffix -to, are formed the verbal adjectives
bcKTO-, rpiTTTO-, ypaTTTO-,
Compare, in Latin, the participles scripta-, tracto-, acto-, from
scrih-, trah-, ag-.
But the preposition €k, out, from, remains unchanged in all
combinations Í a putting forth; €Kboro-, betrayed; not
exBeai-, eyboro-.
37. Dental mutes before dental mutes pass into the semivowel
a : thus,
from apvT-, accomplish, is derived äpvoro-, for apvTTo, accom¬
plished.
from a6-, sing,
from 7T€i6-, persuade.
acrreo-, for aÔrço-, canendo-,
neiaÔrjpat, for 7r€i66r)vai, to
be persuaded.
10 OF SOUNDS AND LETTER-CHANGES
Similarly, the dental liquid, v, sometimes passes into <r before a
dental : as, fiiaarop-, one who pdlutes, from piav, polltUe (see §
42).
38. Before ft, any guttural becomes y, any dental (or v) bo-
comes 0-, any labial becomes /x : thus.
From ôio)«-, pursue is derived Ôtojyfto-, pursuit,
ßpfX'j wet, ßeßpeypat, 1 am wetted,
lô-, know, lo-pfv, we know,
TTfíd-, persuade, TreTreia-peuo-, persuaded,
(f)ap-, shew, <l>a(TpaT-, an apparition,
KOTT-, cut, heat, Koppo-, a heating,
ßXuß-, hurt, ß^ßXappai, J am hurt.
ypa<p-, write, ypappär-, a letter.
Sometimes, however, gutturals and dentals remain unchanged
before ft : as, aKpa-, point, edge ; apiâpo-, number; and in the
older language thpev, we know ; a<l>pcthpov-, senseless ; opxrj6po^
dancing, occur against lepev, a(}>pa(rpov'', opxtjcrpo-.
The preposition ck is not changed before p : as, eKpaô-, ham
thoroughly.
39. Gutturals and labials followed by o- :—
#ccr ) TTO- )
ycr > all become ^ ßo- > all become yjr :
X<r)
thus, o- being the future tense suffix.
From ay-, lead, is formed a¿-, for ayer-, will lead,
hex-, he^-, for dexa-, will receive.
Tptß-, ruh, Tpiyjr-, for rpißtr-, will ruh.
ypä<j)-, write, ypayjr-, for ypa(¡>a-, will write.
Compare the Latin resai and scripsi, from reg- and sanh-.
40. Before o-, the dental mutes are dropped without compen¬
sation.* The dental liquid v, before <7, is dropped with compensa-
* But ill the older Greek a dental before a was often not dropped,
but assimilated to it, producing aa : hence such forms, so frequent in
Homer, as the 1 aorists e^paeeuTO, eKopieee (in later Greek, e^pàeàro,
íKopiee), from the 0. F. ^paí-, tell, and Kopid-, carry\ and troeüi (i.e.
iroi-ffi, in later Greek iro&t), dat. plur. from woí-, foot. Similarly, in
such forms as opse-aX, Epic dat. plur. of opea-, mountain, a of the C. F*
OF SOUNDS AND LETTER-CHANGES.
11
tion in a final syllable, without compensation in the middle of a
word, unless <r has been substituted for t. In hke manner, p is
lost before Thus,
From ayvT-f accomplisAj is formed awo-i-, for ayvrtri-f accom-
plishmenU
€(j>pacra, for €<f>pa8o'à, I told.
KopvoXy for KopvôoXy dat. plur.
fiçXâçy for pfXavÇf nom. sing.
daipoŒij for èaipovaïy dat. plur.
XvoviTt, for Xvoi/íTt (from Xv-
opTi)y they loosen.
cvfvyo-, for (Tvv(pyo-y yoked
together.
The preposition €v in compoimds remains unchanged before tr.
So V of 'jtavy ally and ttoX«/, hacky before o-, either remains un¬
changed, or is assimilated to the following letter : as, 7rav<ro<l)o-,
all-mise; TraXto-o^ro-, hackward. The v of o-vi/,mVA, which
is dropped before f or before o- followed by a consonant, is assi¬
milated before simple a : thus, (rv-fííyo-, yoked together ; o-v-crrpa-
Ti<ùTa-y feUow-soldier ; but (rv<r-(ñro~y messmate.
41. In like manner, i/r, yS, v6y are dropped before <r ; but the
preceding vowel is always lengthened in compensation ; thu^
yïyavT-, giant, dat. plur. yïyâaïy for y tyayriri.
rWepT-y placing. nom. sing. TtÖ€ts, for Tideyrr.
yepoyr-, old man, dat. plur. yepoucrt, for yepovrcri.
<rn^vh-,pour libation, fut. indie, anua-, for crîréyÔo--.
TTcvÖ-, suffer, fut. indie, n-eto--, for irfvßo--.
42. N remains (generally) unchanged before dental mutes, be¬
comes y (nasal) before gutturals, and p before labials. Before
liquid consonants, v is assimilated to the liqmd. Thus,
<rvv$€cri', a placing together,
(nryxaXe-, caU together, for (ruy/caXe-.
epTTçipo-, experienced, for einreipo-.
is retained, whereas in later Greek (ope-at), it disappears, as a dental
(spirant), before a of the case-ending. Compare, also, rfXeer-cro) and
£r£X€<r-<ra, fut. and 1 aor. of riKtü-, fulfil, with the later riXc-aw and
erfiXfi-(TO.
<f)paè~, tell,
Kopvô-, helmet,
peKaVy black,
baipov-y deity, destiny,
Xv-, loosen,
<rvv, together, and
¿*i;yo-, yoke,
12
OF SOUNDS AND LETTßU-CHANGES.
(AXÏTrecr-, defective^
(ryppacj)-^ stitch together^
eppevy abide in.
for €v\Ï7rc(X'.
for avvpa(p',
for cvpev-.
But the preposition ex* remains unchanged before p : as, evpvB^
po-j in measure, not cppvÔpo-,
For euphony—that is, facility of pronunciation—B is inserted
between v and p in the declension of ap€p-, man ; G. S. avBpoi,
for av pos* Similarly, ß is inserted between p and p in peai^p'
8pia', for p€(TTip pía-, midday, from p€0'o-, mid, and rjpepa-, day^
43. A hard mute at the end of a word, if the word following
begin with the rough breathing, is changed into the coirespond-
ing aspirate ; if two hard mutes come together, both are changed :
thus,
01^;^ op(ù, for ovK opoD, I do not see,
a<^' ianàç, for qtt {arro) écmâs, from the hearth,
Ka&* T¡p€páv, for Kar^ {Kara) ^pepäu, day by day,
6\t)v, for vvkt^ {wkta) oXtjv, the whole night long.
The same change takes place in compound words : thus,
From Sexfa, ten, and rjpcpa-, day, is derived Bcx^ip-^po-, lasting ten
From avTi, in 'place of, and *v7ràTo-, consul, is derived avOiiTraro-,
proconsul.
It will be observed that in these cases the words are intimately
connected.
44. If two consecutive syllables of the same word both pro¬
perly begin with an aspirate, the first aspirate is, in certain cases,
changed into the corresponding tenuis or hard consonant. If the
second aspirate disappears in any of the forms, the first is
restored. This change takes place,
a. If both aspirates originally belong to the root : thus,
BpXx'y hair of the head, G. S. rpXxos, for OpXx^s ; but N. S. ôpi^,
ôp€(p-, nourish, rpeifxù, I nourish; but Ûpeyjrct), I will nourish,
hold, have, I have (without the aspirate) ; but €^a>, ^
1 shall have.
♦ Compare the French cendre, tendre, chambre, nombre, etc., with the
Latin cinis, tener, camera, numerus; and combler, humble, dissembler
wich cumulare, humilis, and dissimulare.
4
OF SOUNDS AND LETTER-CHANGKS.
13
h. In the reduplicated forms of verbs : thus,
X^P^'i perfect tense kcx^p^"} for x^X^P^''
tpv-y grorOy perf. for (¡xfjiv-.
c. In the 1 aor. indie, pass, of Oe-yplace, and ôv-y sacrifice,—erfOt-
and €TvB€-y for eêeSe- and eôijôe- ; so, a/xTrc;^-, for afx(j)€X'j p^t
round, from afi(f>ï, round, and «X" 2 p. sing, of the
1 aor. imper. pass., the second aspirate is changed : aa
<T<ù6r)TXy for (TtiiSr^ôX, save thyselfi
Otherwise, when the second aspirate does not belong to the
same root as the first, but is due to inflection or composition,
both are suflered to remain : thus, from Biky-, soothe, and -Be, the
suf&x of the 1 aor. pas., is formed soothed, not
; from KopivBo-, Corinth, and the adverbial ending -BX,
is formed KopivBoBX, at Corinth ; and from ap<f>X, round, and
pour, ap<f)Xx€'y pour round,
45. Consonant'i.—It has been said (§ 12), that, though this
letter has disappeared from the classical Greek, having passed
into the vowel t, traces of it remain in certain forms arising out
of its combination with the several consonants. The most im¬
portant of the changes which seem to admit of explanation from
this principle, are as follows :—
a. From any guttural followed by t cons., arises o-o- (late Attic
tt) : thus,
From päK-, long, is formed paa-a-ov-, for päKiov-, longer,
ray-, arrange, racco), for raytco, I arrange,
^XaX'f little, ú^aaerov-, for èkax'^ov-, less,
o-o- arises, less frequently, from dentals with i cons. : thus,
From root of Kpar-ea-, strength, is formed Kpeitrfrov-, stronger,
Xtr-, pray, is formed kia-aopai, I pray.
b. From à with i cons, arises ¿' : thus.
From (¡>pàb-, tell, is formed (¡>paC<o, for <¡)pabi<»), I tell.
AXf- or Aicf-, Jupiter, is formed Zevî, for Aíevy, N. S.
( arises, less frequently, from y with i cons. : thus,
From pey-, great, is formed pe^ov- (Ion.), for peyiov, greater,
Kpay-, cry, #cpa¿<i>, for Kpayiui, 1 cry,
c. From X with t cons, arises XX : thus.
From päX-, much, is formed paWov, for pakiov, more;
'a\-, leap, âXXopat, for aXiopat, Í leap.
14
OF SOÜNOS AND LËITEB-CHANGS3.
d. 1Î vor p precedes the i cons., the liquid is transposed, and
a diphthong or long vowel results : thus,
From <j)äP'f sheWy is formed <f>aiva>, for <f>aviG>, I shew,
apeivov-) for àpeviop-, better,
[x€p-^ X^^pov-y for x^ptov-, worse,*
46. The liquids, especially p and X, are often transposed : t
thus,
From C. F. öop-, leap, are derived ^ôopop, 1 leaped, and Qpma-
K<û, I leap,
ßa\-, throw, €ßä\op, I threw, and ßeß\rj-
Ka, I have thrown,
6UP-, die, €6apop, I died, and T€$pr¡Ku,
I am dead,
rtp-, cut, Tep-p<ú, I cut, and rprjaï-,
the act of cutting.
Hence also are to be explained the double forms, KpaT^or- and
Kaprea-, strength ; Kapbca- and Kpadia^, heart, etc.
47. Certain consonants are sometimes softened. Thus,
a, T before i, especially when another vowel follows, is very
frequently softened into o- : hence, from apaiaÔr)To-, unfeeling, is
derived ávaiaérjcna', want of feeling, for apaiaÙi\ria- ; <¡)rj<rX, he sags,
is used for <j>rjTÏ ; and (ftäai, they say, rpfirovdi, they turn, (L e.
(papaX, Tp€iropeX, § 40), for ipaprX, rpeiroprï,
h. Initial er is softened to the rough breathing : as, v-, hog, as
well as o-u- ; tora-, place, for enera-. Compare the Latin su-,
sist-, and such forms as sex, septem, serp-, with cttto, ipn-,
48. 2 standing between two consonants is always struck out :
thus, the suffix of the perf. infin. pass, being -cröai, from tutt-,
strike, is derived T€Tv<pôai, for rtrvTreôai, In like manner, a be-
* Compare such forms as paecov-, päKiaro', and 6aí<rov-, räxarro'
(from räx-V', swiyî), with ijítov-, h^icTO', from ijí-v, sweet; and words
like juaXXov, àXKopai, aXXo-, other, ^uXXo-, leaf, with the Latin melius,
salio, alio-, folio-; xtipov- is in Epic Greek.
t Such, under the name of metathesis, is the explanation usually
given. It has, however, been rendered" probable that many of the forms
in question are the result of compression, rather than of transposai of
the liquid; that T£0wjKd, for instance, is a contraction from rc^ai^rà
(compare Bavaro', death) ; that Bapaeo' and Bpàaea-, daring, are both
due to a fuller form, Qapaaso', etc. See T. H. Key, Transactions of the
Philological Society, vol, vil. p. 211,
OP SOÜNDS AND LETTEK-CHANOES.
15
tween two vowels is very frequently rejected, especially if the
former vowel is short ; thus,
From Xey-, aay, 2 sing. pres. indie, pass, is Xcy«at (Att. Xf-y?;), for
Xey€<rai.
y€*»íor-, race, gen. sing, is yeveos (Att, yevovs), for yiveiroç,
<r before v is sometimes assimilated to it : thus, from <^a€<r-, light,
with the adj. termination -vo, is made <l>a€vv&-, for <()a€(r-vo-,skim7ig.
49. A short vowel is sometimes rejected from between two
consonants (sgncope), especially in the second of several short
syllables: thus,
From is formed eirrofnjv, for eneTOfirjv, Iflew.
yev^f become, yiyvofiai, for yXycvo/xat, 1 become,
Ô0. The liquid p is doubled in some derivatives, principally
from verbs : thus,
From pX<i>-, throxo, is formed eppiyj^a, for epiyjra,* I threw,
pr\y-, break, apprjKTo-, for aprjKTo^, unbreakable,
podo-, rose, TToXvppobo-, abounding in roses,
51. If a word which ends with a vowel is followed by another
beginning with a vowel, hiatus is produced. Hiatus is often
endured in Greek prose : it is, however, frequently avoided,
especially when the first word is short and unemphatic ; and
this is effected in three ways—either by elision, or crasis, or
synizesis,
52. Elision, or the rejection of a final vowel, takes place in the
case of any short vowel except u ; it is most frequent, however,
with the final vowel of prepositions, conjunctions, and adverbs
of two syllables : ctt* avrtp, for ctti avrœ, on him ; ovd* çbvvàro, for
ovôf €Ôuï'aro, nor was he able ; ahX rjkôçv, for aXKa r^KÓ^v, but he
came.
But the prepositions irepX, about ; a^pi and fi^xPh ; and
the conjunction 6tX, because, do not suffer elision in the ordinary
writers.
Elision is also used in compound words, but the sign of eli¬
sion (' ) is not then written : encpxcpai, for €7rt-€pxopai, I come
towards; but irepiepxopai, I go round,
* Rather, for efpi^pa, afprjicro'. See § 286, n. So, in such com¬
pounds as TToXvppoSo-, TToXvppt^o-, the existence of an initial consonant
may be traced in the ^olic forms ßpoäc, /Spi^a-, and in the English
wort, or German JVurzeL
16
of sounds and letter-changiab
53. Crasis (Kpàaïçy a mixing\ or the blending of the two
vowels into one, is for the most part regulated by the rules
already given (§ 33) for the contraction of vowels. It is chiefly
resorted to after the forms of the article and relative pronoun,
the preposition Trpo, and the conjunction Kat, The resulting syl¬
lable is necessarily long. The sign of crasis is the coronu (') :
rayaôay for ra aya^a, blessûigs; rovvopâ, for ro ovofiä, the name;
ravTOy for to avro, the sanie; *avr¡py for 6 ävrjpy the man; ôolpuriovy
for TO 'Ipariov, the garment.
The resulting syllable takes an i subs, only when an t belongs
to the latter of the two syllables : «¿Va, for Kat. «ra, and then;
but from Kai €tX, and likewise, arises «a ri.
54. Sometimes the two vowels are, in pronunciation, drawn
together into one long vowel, while no change is made in the
writing. This is called synizesis ((rvvtCrjetsy a sinking into one) ;
it is most frequent after the pronoun eyw, 1, and the conjunc¬
tions enci, when; v, or; num? and prj, not: thus, ey^v,
cTrcT^Vy The cases of ©eo-, God, and genitives like
TToXcú)?, of a citg, were often pronounced with synizesis.
55. No Greek word ends in any other consonant than one of
the semivowels p, p, s (including ¿ and yfr). The only exceptions
to this rule are the negative ouk (before consonants ov, before
aspirated vowels ovx), and the preposition ex (before vowels el),
which are closely joined in pronunciation to the words which
follow them.
If any other consonant than v, p, or s, would appear at the end
of a word, it is usually rejected : thus, and <raypa are found
in the N. S. for peXïr and crw/zar ; nai and Aiäv in the voc. for natd
and Aiavr, But mute dentals are sometimes changed into the
kindred semivowel s : thus we find
nposy for TTpoT, from irporX, to.
àoç, for My from doôï, imperative of So-, give.
Tfpasy for repar, N. S. from repav, 'portent.
Sometimes r final is changed into v, as in the 3rd singular of
verbs, ervirvép, he was striking, for crvirrer (compare crun-TCTo) ;
or into py as Tjnap, for rjuar, N. S., from C. F. n. liver. Simi¬
larly, p becomes p : as, ervTrropf I was striking, for ervirrop (com¬
pare eTUTTToprjp).
OF 8017KDB AlfO ijETTER-CHÂNOlB.
60. Certain words and forms end in a moveable p. This p is
retained before words beginning witb a vowel^ to avoid biatna,
and before the longer stops. In poetry it is found before conso¬
nants abo.* The words and forms which exhibit this moveable
p are,
a. The dative plural in {r((i') : wäo-ip e^aKa, I gave to M; but
irä&t 8oK€i ovTiùç €ivai, it seems to aU to be so,
b. The words é{Koo-((i/), twentg, and 7rfpvaX{p\ last gear,
e. The 3rd person singular in e(i/) ; taaaep avrovs, he resetted
them; but f<r<¡i>a€ rovr Aêrjvaiovç, he rescued the Athenians,
d. The 3rd person, both singular and plural, in 0-1(1') : Xcyovoiv
ev, they say well; bttKiniaXv exeioe, he points in that direction^
In the same manner, ovt&ç, thus, €| (i. e. ckç), out, retain their
fîiml consonant before a vowel only.
Of the Quantity of Syllables,
57. A syllable b said to be long by nature, when it contains a
long vowel or a diphthong : 'vpñs, ye; pplvû, I decide ; a$<k), 1
sing. Contracted syllables are obviously long : ökoit-, for cckoit-,
unwilling; *ipa-, for Upo-, sacred,
58. A syllable is said to be long by position, when the vowel b
followed by two or more consonants, or by a double consonant :
X^PI^hr-, joy ; condition ; Käorop-, Castor; ip tovtw, wean-
whUe; t5 KTrfpara the possessions,
69. If a vowel short by nature stand before a mute consonant
followed by p, X, v, or p, as the mute and liquid admit of being
sounded either separately or together, the syllable may be either
long or short : thus, irarpos, of a father, may be pronounced
either as irär-pos, or as ird-rpor ; similarly, kpo-, child ; rv" <^Xo-,
blind; tV bpäs; what doest thou? Such syUables are said to be
common.:|:
* In the more ancient MSS. of the New Testament this v is also found
before consonants, invariably in the 3rd persons of verbs, singular and
plural, in -cv and -aív, and very frequently in the dat. plural (see
Tischendorf, Proleg. ad Nov, Test, Gr, p. xxiii.).
t This removeable v was formerly treated as a suffix foreign to the
word, and arbitrarily added to prevent hiatus. Hence the name by
which it is generally known in grammars — v t^újcvariKov, or iràpà-
yar/ÍKOv,
I Syllables consisting of a short vowel followed by a mute and liquid
are almost mvariably long m Homer, and (with the exceptions men-
0
18
60. The Éfyllable however, necessarily lon^
a. If the mute and liquid belong to two different words, or to
the different elements of a compound word ; as, cie vrifùVyfnm the
^ips ¡ €K-Acyû), I pick out.
h. Before the combination of the soft mutes ()3, y, Ô) with X, Vy
or /i : as, ßIßKo-y book; raypar-y ordinance ; viper; but
cTypo-, land.*
SUBSTANTIVEa
61. In the declension of nouns, substantive or adjective, the
Greeks distinguished,
a. Three numbers : the singular for one, the ducd for two, and
the plural for more than two.
h. Five cases ;
The nomincUive, denoting the source of an action, the
Í case of the subject.
The vccativcyj: which is used in addressing persons.
The accusative, denoting the place whither, the case of the
object.
The genitive, denoting the place whence.
The dative, denoting the place where.
These cases are formed by the addition of certain terminar
tions, called suffixes, to the stem, or crude form,X of the substan¬
tive.
tioned in § 60) short in the coniic poet Aristophanes: in the tragedians
such syllables are used as common, yet more frequently short than long.
* Of the Greek vowels £, 17, 0, oi, the quantity is already expressed
in the character: over these, therefore, and over diphthongs, no mark
of quantity is placed. One vowel before another, and not forming a
diphthong with it, is to be understood as short, unless the contrary is
signified.
t The vocative is not, strictly speaking, a case ; i. e. it expresses no
modification of the simple notion conveyed by the word. Hence it has
no special suf&x. See §71.
X Care must be taken not to confound the crude form with the nomi¬
native singular. The crude form is the invariable, as the suffix is the
variable, part of a noun or verb; the former signifying the bare notion
conveyed by the word, the latter appended to it for the expression ol
4iie various relations of number, place, time, or person. The nomina-
SUBSTANTIVES. 19
e. Two genders, mmcuUne and feminine : nouns of neither
gender are called neuter*
62. The gender of nóuns is distinguished partly by their mean¬
ing, partly by the termination of their crude form.
Names of male persons, of rivers, winds, and months, are
masculine.
Names of female persons, of trees, coimtries, and islands, and
of most towns, also of most abstract substantives, are femi¬
nine.
Many names of fruits, most diminutives, and all nouns or
other parts of speech contemplated as words merely, are neuter.
On the determination of gender by the termination, see
§§515—518.
63. Neuter nouns are broadly distinguished from masculines
and feminines in their declension : they do not admit r as the
case-ending of the nom. singular ; they have no form for the
nom. or voc. distinct from that of the accus. ; and they have no
other suffix for the nom., voc,, or accus, plural, than a.
64. The dual number has but two forms—one for the nomi¬
native and accusative, and one for the genitive and dative,
65. Greek nouns are usually divided into three declensions : the
first consisting of nouns with crude forms ending in a; the
second, of nouns with crude forms ending in o ; and the third, of
nouns with crude forms ending in t. v, or any consonant. They
may, however, be arranged under two principal declensions—
the separable (or strong) declension, and the inseparable (or
weak) declension. In words of the separable declension, (which
corresponds to the third according to the ordinary arrangement),
the case-endings are distinctly marked, and easily sepaiubJe from
the crude form ; in the inseparable declension, (which includes
the first and second of the ordinary arrangement), the case-
endings are not so distinctly marked, and do not so well admit
of separation, as they merge into one syllable with the final
vowel of the crude form.
tive is itself a case made by inflexion, and generally quite distinct from
the crude form: thus, iroifirfv is the N. S. of the crude form rroifiép-^
shepherd; Xoyoç, the N. S. of Xoyo-, word. See the Preface to Profess or
Key's (larger) Latin Grammar.
î» BüBSTA^•TlVESi '
SEPARABLE (THIRD) DECLENSION.
66. This declension consists of nouns whose crude forms end
in some consonant (including the semivowel f), or in either of
the weak vowels i or v.
67. The following is a tabular view of the suffixes of the seve¬
ral cases in this declension ;—
Masculines and Feminines.
Neuters.
Singular.
Nominative
Vocative
Accusative
Genitive
Dative
s, or long vowel in compensation
no ending
a, or V
or
(
no ending
no ending
no ending
Off
I
Dual.
Nom. Voc. Acc.
Gen. Dot.
f
OIV
€
OiP
Plural.
Nominative
Vocative
Accusative .
Genitive
Dative
te
re
or, or i»r, i. e. "r
b)i>
<ri{v)
â
ä
â
6>p
aî(v)
Jtemarks on the Suffices.
68. Nominative Singvlar.—The suffix for the N. S. of masculine
and feminine nouns is r. In adding this suffix to crude forma
ending in a consonant, attention must be paid to the changes
required by the laws of euphony (§§ 23—55).
69. In many words ending in a consonant^ from reasons of
euphony, s is not added ; in that case, the final vowel of the
crude form, if short, is lengthened.
SEPARABLE (THIRD) DECLENSION.
70. Thus, the masc. and fern, nouns ending in a consonant £al]
into two classes :
a. Nouns which take the suffîx s in the nom. sing. : as,
Crude Form. Norn. Sing.
*aX-, dXs.
vein^ for (fAeßs.
KopaK-f crow y f^opa^, for KopoKs.
Xofiirâd-, Ictmpf XapiraSf for Xapnabs.
yXyairr-j gtanty for yiyavTç.
^€X<^^l^-, dolphin^ deXtjnç, for Be\<l>ivs.
ßop-f oaf, ßovs, for ßofs.
b. Nouns which reject the r in the nom, sing.; but, in compen¬
sation, have the final vowel of the crude form lengthened, if it is
short (§ 34) : as,
a F. N. s.
shepherd, woiprir.
XcoKT-, lion, \€<ov.
pi)Top-, orator, pr^rap.
aiboo', shame, atdúif.
In the following, the vowel is already long ; the crude form,
therefore, becomes the nom. case ;
C. F. N. S.
ôrjp-, wild beast, Srjp.
^tipMu-, winter, x^iptûv.
f¡p<ú<T', hero. r¡p<ús.
This rejection of r in the N. S. takes place in all nouns ending
in p and a, except paprvp-, witness, N. S. pjaprvs, and in most words
in v, including all nouns in ovr, except o$oi/t-, a tooth, N. S. odovf.
71. Vocative Singular.—^The vocative has no suffix. The crude
form, therefore, subject to the rules which regulate the termina¬
tion of Greek words (§ 55), constitutes the vocative in the singu¬
lar. , The nominative is, however, very generally used for the
vocative. The true vocative is found,
a. In words (substantives and adjectives) whose crude forms
end in v, vr, p, and eo- : as,
C. F. N. S. T". S.
batpov-, deity, baipav, batpou.
yepovT', old man, y€po}p, yepop.
22 SOBSTANTIVE»,
i
There are, however, many exceptions : as, iroifxev-f shepherd^ voc.
iroifif)v, as in the nom. On the other hand, ^AiroWa»-^ ÂpoUo ;
^otr€l^6)l^-, Poseidon ; and amrrjp-, saviour, are found with a short
vowel in the voc.—•"AttoXXo»', noo-ciÔor, oaTtp. Participles make
the voc. the same as the nom.
6. Nouns in i and v, including those in f ; as,
papTi', seer, N. S. paprXç, V. S. pavrt
In other cases usually, and always in the plural, the nom. is
employed as a voc. But from yvvaiK-, woman, and Trat^, hoy,
(with a few other words ending in tÔ), we have the regular voca¬
tives, yvvat and Trat ; avaicT-, king, has both ava¿ and (in early
Greek) apa,
72. Accusative Singular,—The accus, sing, takes the sufi&x p
in words whose crude forms end in £, v, or f (with the exception
of words in ) : as,
a F, A, s.
TToXi-, city, iroXXv,
vaf', ship, vavp.
If the C. F. end in any consonant (except f), or in ef, the
sufi&x a is preferred : as,
a F, A, s,
vein, <f)Xfßä.
ßäaXXff-, king, ßäaXXeä»
But some words ending in a t-sound, preceded by t or v, take p
in prose, the t-sound being dropped : as,
0. F, A, S.
cptô-, strife, €píp,
oprtd-, bird, oppip.
The form in a is, however, sometimes found in prose, and that
in p in verse. Monosyllables, and other words in which the
accent falls on the last syllable, as in such words the t-sound was
not so readily dropped, have only the form in a. Thus, «-od-, m,
foot, A* S, TToda ; but rpXiroB-, three-footed, A. S. rpXnoÔà and rpX"
TTovp ; (XnX'è-, f. hope, A. S. cXTri^Ôa (not eXirXp, like epXv for epXBa) ;
but the compound eveXirXd-, hopeful, makes €V€kirXp as well as
t
SEPARABLE (THIRD) DECLENSIOK.
tvikiiiha : «cXnd-, key (originally rXf/Td-); makes icXfii^ more fra
quently than Kk^iha,
73. Dative Plural,—In adding the suf&x o-t(i') of the dat. plur.
to the crude form, the same rules must be observed as in the
formation of the nom. sing, in
ÊXaMPLES.
74. A. Nouns whose crude forms end in a consonant,
I. Masc. and fem. nouns in which r is added in the nom. sing.'^
If the C. F. end in a labial or guttural mute, s will combine
with the mute to form yjr or
If the C. F. end in a dental mute, the dental will disappear
before ç,
74*.
Greek C. F.
'aX-
XatXaTT-
(l>X(ß-
KaTrjXXcf)-
KrjpVK-
Gender.
masc.
fem.
fem.
fem.
masc.
English.
salt.
hurricane.
vein.
upper Story.
herald.
Singular.
Norn,
*aXff
XaiXayjr
(pXcyjr
KaTrjXfsjt
KJ)pvi
Voc,
'aXff
XaîXayjr
(pXe^
KanjXiylr
Kripv$^
Acc,
C vv M
oka
XaiXärä
^X€ßä
KaTi]XX(pà
KTJpVKa
Gen.
*aXos
XaiXàTTOÇ
<f>XۧoS
KanjXX^oc
KTJpVKOÇ
Dot,
aXt
XaiXam
^Xۧt
KaTTjXX<j)X
ktjpvkX
Dual
N. r. A.
*a\€
XaiXaire
(jiXeße
KaTrjXX(f>€
Kr)pVK€
G. D. !
\ *akoiv
XaiXàiroiv
(f>Xۧoiu
Karrfk X^oiv
KTJpVKOlV
Plural.
1
t
Nom.
'aXeff
XaiXanes
(pXeßes
KaTr]XX<f>ۂ
Kr)pVK€S
Voc.
'aXes
XatXaTTfÇ
(pXeßes
KaTr]XX(j>€s
Kr)pVK€S
Acc.
f w\ w
aXas
XaiXanäs
^X^ßas
KaT7]XX((>àç
KTJpVKaÇ
Gen.
^àXùtv
XaiXàircùU
(l>X€ß<üv
KaT7]Xï(pù>v
KTJpVKùùV
Dot, 1
1 'aXo't(i')
XatXaT/^t(i')
(fiXeyj^X^p)
KaT7]Xiyp^X{v)
-*
Kr,pv^X{i>)
♦ Fer nouns in see § 81.
;
24 SUBSTANTIVES.
Greek 0. F.
Geuder.
English.
oprvf-
masc.
quail.
hl<ùpV^
fem.
canal.
XapÏT-
fem.
favour.
iraih"
masc.&fem.
child.
KOpvê"
fem.
helmet.
Singular.
Nom*
Foc.
Aec*
Qem
Bat,
opTvf
oprv|
oprvya
oprvyof
opTvyX
hi<ùpv^
buùpvi^
huûpv)(a
hifùpvxot
bt.»pV)(l
XapXç
XàpXs
V V V
Xapira or
Xàpïp
XàpXros
V w
XapiTi
irmi
irai
Traída
vaiSos
iraiBX
KOpVS
tcopvs
KopvÚa or
KOpVP
KOpvâoS
KOpV^t
Dual.
N V, A,
Q.B.
oprvye
oprvyotv
ài<opvx€
àtiopvxoiv
XàpXre
XàpXrotv
wcuBe
vaidoip
Kopvâe
KOpvêoiP
PluraL
Nom.
Foc.
Ácc.
Om.
Bat.
oprvy^s
oprvyes
oprvyar
oprvytùv
opn;¿i(y)
dtoipvx^s
ài<ùpVX^S '
Buûpvxàs
d(a>pv;^a>v
àuùpv^Hy)
XàpXT€S
XàpXT€$
V W M
Xapivas
XàptTfov
W V w/ \
Xapt<ri{v)
TTOldig
7raiÔ€g
Traídas
TTOldùiV
7raicrX(p)
Kopvêes
KOpvêtS
Kopvôas
KOpvOiÙV
KOpV&X(v)
GreekC.F.
Gender.
English.
1
avaKT'
masc.
king.
odoPT-
masa
tooth.
yiyapT^
maso.
giant.
DIP-
fem.
nose.
ekpip^
fem.
worm.
Singular.
Nom.
Foc.
Acc.
Gm.
Bat.
ava^
àva^ or apa
àpoicrà
àvaKTOs
apoKxX
odovs
odovs
odopra
odopTos
odoprX
yXyâs
yXyap
yXyavra
yXyapTOS
yXyoprX
pis
pis
V
pipa
pipos
» — %f
pipi
iXpiPs
ÍKpiPs
eXpipââ
eXptpêos
eXpipâi
Dual.
N. F. A.
G.B.
âpaKT€
àpOKTOlP
odoPT€
odoPTOlP
yXyavr€
yiyoproip
plp€
pIpOÍP
iKpipêe
eXpipOoip
Plural.
Nom.
Voc.
Acc.
Gen,
Bat,
apoKTes
àpOKTCS
avaicTas
avatcToiv
âpaiï(p)
0d0PTۂ
odoPT€S
odopràs
odoVTKùP
odova'ï{p)
yXyavres
yïyavres
yXyavràs
yXyaPTiùP
yXyäaX{p)
pipes
pipes
pipas
plpfùP
pIa-X{p)
iXpivêes
e\pipâes
iXp pôas
eKpipôiap
e\pIoX{p) j
8EPARABLB (THIRD) DBGLENSION, 25
75. So are declined yvir-, m. vidture; "'Apaß-, m. an Arab;
^v\aK~f m. sentifid; aXonreic-, f. fox (N. oXwjn;^) ; <^Xoy-, f. flame;
Xapvyy-y m. throat ; ovv-)(^, xa, naU, claw ; i, cough ; opÖonjT-,
£ etraightnese ; -yeXwr-, m. laughter ; Xapiraè-, f. lamp ; KpjjntS-f f.
basement ; opvîê-f m. and f. bird (A. opvïÔa and oppip) ; wkt~, f.
night; nXaKoevr- and írXaicovi/r-, m. a flat calce (N. tikaKoue and
frXaKovr) ; Kfpaaoevr- and Kepao-ovi^, f. the town Cerasus; TÎpf)€VT''
and Ttpfjw, adj. prized (N. Tlpr¡tis and rlprfSy not rïprjç), Maprvp^^
m. witnesSy has N. paprvs, A. paprvpa and paprvvy D,pl,paprvaïp*
The monosyllable jtoô-, m. foot, has the vowel lengthened in the
N. S., íTovf. KTfl^-, m. comb, and €l^-, m. adj. owe, which, unlike most
words in Vy take r in the nom., also have the vowel lengthened
(§ 40), jcrar, eU,
II. Mase, and fem. nouns which reject ç in the nom. sing., and
lengthen the final vowel of the crude form if it be short.*
70*.
Greek C.F.
Gender.
English.
<f>p(p^
fern.
hearty
breast.
àatpop'
mase.
deitg, fate.
XeopT"
masc.
lion.
prjTop'
masc.
orator.
prjTfp-
fem.
mother.
Singular.
Nom.
Voc.
ÂCC.
Gen.
Dot.
<f>pfjv
<I>PV^^
<f>p€va
<f>p(voç
<f>p€PX
Baip<ûp
àaipov
batpopa
èaipopos
baipopï
Xecüt'
Xeoi'
XeoiTa
XfOi^Off
Xeoi^i
pT)T6íp
prjTop^
pr)ropâ
pT)TOpOS
prjTopï
prjTTjp
pr)T€p ^
pr)T€pâ
pT)TpOÇ
pr¡rpX
Dual.
N V. A.
G.D.
<j>pfV€
cbpfPoiv
àcupoP€
èaipopoip
\eopr0
\€0PT01P
prfTope
prjTopoip
pi]T€p€
prjrepoiP
Plural,
Nom.
Voc.
Acc.
Gen.
Dat.
1
(l>p€V€S
<l>pfv€e
<f)p(vàç
(bpfpcùv
<^p(a-ï{p)
i
8aipoPۍ
èaipopes
baipopàç
baipoP(ùP
8atpo(rï{p)
\€OPT€S
\€OPT€Ç
Xtopràf
\€OPT<ÛP
\€OV<Tt(p)
pTjrop€s
pr)Topۂ
pijTopâs
pT)TOp<ji)P
pj)rop<Ti(y)
p7]T(p€S
pT}T€p(S-
pr)T€pàç
prjTfpù)P
pTjTpà<rX{v)
* For nouns in o-. see § 84.
* f
26 scBSrAimvBB.
In the following words the final vowel of the crude form w
already long.
Greek C.F.
Gender,
English.
iraiâv-
masc.
pœan,
hymn.
ày<ûp-
masc,
contest,
games.
SepoipcûPT-
masc.
Xenophon.
0rip-
masc.
unid beast.
'EXXïjv-
masc.
a Greek.
1
Singular.
Nom,
Voc,
ÄCC,
Gen.
Dai.
naiäp
naidv
TTaiàvà
Traiàvoî
naiàpi
aytùv
ày<ùv
dy<ûvà
áytí>vos
ày<ùvï
S€PO<j)<ÛP
S€PO(p(ÛP
Sepocfxûvrâ
SepoijxavTos
S€PO(j)û)PTÏ
ôrip
%
ßrfpa
êgpos
erjpX
'EXXíyi»
'EXXiyv
'EWrfpâ
*E\\r¡vos
^EXXï/vt
Dual.
N, F, A,
G,D,
traiâve
TTaiâvoiv
ày<ùve
dytùvoiv
%€
ôrjpoiv
'EWTJPC
*E\\r)PoiP
Plural.
Nom,
Foc,
Âcc,
Gen,
Dal.
Tratàves
naiâveç
Traiâpas
iraiâpiùv
iraiàatiy)
dyayveç
dyiùves
aycùpàç
âycùpcop
V V/ \
ay<û<ri{ii)
OrjpfS
Brjpfs
ârjpàs
êrfpùnp
OripaXiy)
'EWrjpes
'EXkrjpes
'EXXiyj/aç
'EWrjpfùV
'EXXï;<r4(i')
76. So are declined noifiev-, m. shepherd; m. gmde^
(V. r¡y€fi<úv) ; y€povr-, m. old man, (and all nouns and partici¬
ples in OPT-, except oSoït-, tooth, and the participles yvopr-, BXèovr-,
dovT-, and 'àXopT-, all which form their N. S, masc. in -ovr*) ;
frpaKTop-, m. exacter ; aiôep-, m. skg (G. aiûepoç, etc.) ; hetpav-,
m. meadow; o-wnjp-, m. saviour; xop-, m. f. goose, Bíkov-, f.
image ; arjSop-, f. nightingale ; swallow, throw out v in
some of the cases, and undergo contraction : as, A. ç^Kova and
eiKd, G. eiKopos and €ikovs, etc.t
* Observe that in these five words o belongs to the root.
t These forms should perhaps be rather explained as deduced from
older crude forms in 01-, sikoí-, aijíot-, (§ 99); whence the V.
arjSoi and xeklêoi, and the N. tucta (in He^chius). Similarly Topyot-
and Popyov-, Gorgon^ coexist ; N. S. Topyta and rarely Topyoïv,
G. VopyovQ and ropyovoç, etc. f Ahrens.)
8EPARA.BLB (THIRD) DECL£Ní»iON.
27
77. The following words in rtp, viz. warf/)-, father ; /ti/re/)-, wo-
¿Äcr ; öiiyarfp-, daughter ; yaor«/)-, f. ; and Aïy/ii/rç/)-, ¿Ae ^ocí-
cfes« Demeter, drop € in the G. and D. sing. ; in the D, pL Tepo-t(v)
is changed into Tpäai{v); Arjprjrep- has also ArjprjTpâ in the
A. S. : aoTf/)-, m. stary retains e in the G. and D. sing., but the
D. pi. is a<rrpa<n{p) : âpep-, man, drops € throughout, except in
the N. and V. sing., and à is then inserted between v and p (§ 42) :
thus, N, avTjp, V. ap€p, A. apàpâ, and so on ; the D, pL is apBpa-
<ri{p). y
III. Mase, and fem, nouns whose crude forms end in f (af, ef,
of), or o".
78. Before those suffixes which begin with a vowel the f or a
is dropped. Before the sxiffixes which begin with a consonant f
becomes v.
79. In the Attic declension of nouns in ef the vowel of the
suffix is lengthened in the A. and G. sing, and A. pi. : thus, eä,
cwï, etc., appear in place of rja, ijos, etc., of the old declension. If
a vowel precede, tä, eäs, €ù>ç, €<ùp, are contracted. AU noims in
ef are masculine.
80. Words in o- do not take the suffix s in the N. sing. ; con¬
sequently, if the final vowel of the crude form be short, it is
lengthened. In the D. pi. one <r is dropped. If a vowel precede,
ca in the A. sing, is contracted into â instead of i;.
f
28 BUBSTAimVBS.
81.
f
breekC-F.
Gender.
English.
1
ßaaike f-
masc.
king.
masc.
a Borian,
ypâh
fem,
old woman.
ßop*
masc.& fem.
OJC,
Singular,
I^om.
Voc.
Acc,
Gen,
Bat,
ßa&iXevs
ßäaXXev
ßä<ri\eä
ßätriXeiüs
(ßdciXct) ßä<rX\ei
Acûpirur
Acapiev
^(ùpieày Aâ)piâ
A6>pico)r, AfûpUùS
Aú)p(€(
ypavs
ypav \
-ypavi» 1
ypäos
ypâX
ßovs
ßov
ßovv
ßoO£
ßoX
Dual.
N, Y, A.
G, B,
ßaaXXee
ßäa-XXeoiv
Aa)ptc€
^(ûpieoip
ypä€
ypàoip
ßoe
ßootv
Plural
Nom,
Voc,
Acc,
Gen,
Bat,
(ßatrXXees) ßäaXXrjs
or ßäoXXeis
ßaaXXeis
ßaaXKeäsßaaXXeisi
ßaaiXeonv
ßaaX\ev(rX{p)
^apiijÇy A(i>p(ctç
^(úptetí
Aù>p(câr, AoDpiäs
ùa)pie<ùVy A<ùpi<ûP
A<ùpifv<rX(p)
1
ypâeç
ypàes
ypavs
ypä<t>p
ypav(rX{v)
ßoes
ßoe s
ßov£
ßoCDP
^ouirt(>')
82, So are declined ypafifiaTef-, scribe ; itpef-, priest ^ îtrjref-,
h>rseman; Kkvnef'yihief ; pope f-, herdsman ; Meyapef-y a Me^a-
rian; Ueipaief-y the harbour of Athens; UKaraief-y a Platcean ;
*a\ief-yßsherman (generally without contraction).
83. The Attic poets occasionally make the G. sing, of noims in
if to end in cos : as, Orjtref-y TheseuSy G. ©i/ccos, as well as Bi/o-c^os.
The poets sometimes contract eà of the A. sing, into ij: as,
iepef'y a priesty A. îepeà and ieprf. The N. pi, in -i;s (from -rjes) is
characteristic of the older Attic writers.
♦ Compare the declension of the Latin bov-, ox,
f t. e, ßamKeag or ßa&iKitQ, It will be seen that ßaoiXeic is not regu¬
larly contracted from ßawiXtägi generally, when the forms of both
the N. and A. pi. are contracted, the acc. is not made from the uncon-
tracted form of the case, but assimilated to the contracted nom.
SEPARABLE (THIRD) DEOLENBION« 29
84.
Greek C. F.
Gender.
English.
rpt#7pf<r-
fern.
trireme.
UeptK^s^e'
mase.
Pericles.
OtóOíT-
fem.
shame.
\
\
^p»er-
maso.
hero.
Singular.
iTom.
Voc.
Acc.
Gen.
Dat.
Tpirjpris
Tpirjpeç
(rpit/ptä) Tpitjpti
(rpiTfpeos) rpirjpovs
{rpiTfpeï) rpirfpH
U Ol
i °
'i X
'
ï" ir 2
^ 2 /<
H Z
5-1 ^
P 2"Í
• Mi
^ 'O
g,;-ö
^ ^ H
^ s
2- 2-
ß K
aibfùs
Tipas
rjpas ^
Tfpaä or ^pa
rjpaos
< w
rjpai
(atSoâ) a¿$6>
(atÔoor) aidovf
(aidoï) aihoi
Dual.
N. v. A.
Q.D.
Tpirjpee
Tpirfpeotv or rpirfpotv
^pa€
r}paoiP
Plural.
Nom.
Voc.
Acc.
Gen.
Dot.
1
{rpirjpeti} rpirjpfis
Tpir¡peis
{rpiTjpeäs) TpiTjpeis
TpiTJp€(ÛP or TptTJpaP
TptTJp€a'l(p)
Tjpaxs
Tjpafs
Tfpaas or Tfpat
rfpaap
rjp(i>a'X{p)
1
85. Like Tpirjpea-- (which is strictly an adjective) are declined
all adjectives in co- (m. and f.) ; also ScúKparecr-, /Socrates, and many
proper names ending in ~Kparf(r, -aôevea-f 'ytpea, -(f>avfa't and -«X€€<r.
These proper names and ""Apio--, the god Ares, also form the A,
sing, as from a crude form in -a, after the analogy of nouns of
the inseparable (Ist) declension : thus, from SwKpaTeo-- we find
A. ^cùKparrj and 2a>KpaTi)v. Plato prefers the form in -i;, Xeuo- '
phon that in -í;i/ : other writers use both ; but of nouns in -yevetr
and Heavier the form in -^v is preferred, while of nouns in -kX^co-
this form is only found in the later writers. ^"Apfo-- has a gen.
Apeois in good prose. When these nouns have a plural, it follows
the A- declension.
86. Like aiÔo<r- are declined rjoa--, f. daybreak, and
skin (for the most part uncontracted, as being a monosyllable).
These words are not found in the voc. nor in the dual and plural
Instead of rjoa- and xpoa-, in Attic €o)- (§ 131) and xpwr- (N.xpwç,
A. XP*"™) used. On the other hand, yeXar-, m. laughter, and
íbpúiT-, m. sweat, have in the acc. y(Xo> (also ycXcoi/) and ldp<i> as well
as y€\(ûTa and íSpoira,
30
SUaSTAOTIVICS.
»
87. Like are declined Tpoxr-, TroSj a Trojan ; m.
and f. a jackal (these "without contraction) ; irä"T/>ü)<r-, m. an
uncle by the fathen^s side ; pijTpaxT-, m. an uncle by the mothers
side ; MÍi/wo--, Minos : the last three words have also na'rptùVy
etc., in the ace. and nâ'rpa in the gen., as if from crude forms
' na'Tp<$>-f etc. (see § 131).
rV. Neuter nouns whose crude forms end in a consonant,
88. Neuter nouns of this declension take no suffix for the N.
or A, singular ; these cases, therefore, do not differ from the
crude form. When the crude form ends in t, the r is ekher
thrown away or changed into r, less frequently into p.
89. Neuter substantives in €(r, a very numerous class, change
e of the C. F. into o in the N., V., and A. sing. ; but this change
does not extend to the neuter of adjectives in fo-. In the other
cases a is dropped, and contraction ensues (^ 33).
90.
Greek C.F.
Gender.
English.
Cö/iar-
neut.
corpse^ body.
1
repoT-
neut.
portent.
1
Tjpar-
neut.
day.
Kepâo-
neut.
ham.
Singular.
Acwt.
Voc,
Acc,
Gen,
Dot.
<T<ùpa
acùpa
atùpà
(TùipaTOs
<r<ûpàTÏ
repas
repas
repas
reparos
repart
rjpap
rjpap
rjpap
Tjpäros
V w
rjpari
sepas
sepas
sepas '
{Kepaos) septos
{sepat) sepa
yevos
yevos
yevos
(yeveos) yevovs
{yevei) yepei
Dual.
A. F. A,
G,J),
aKopäre
aa>paroiv
repare
T€paro¿v
rjpare
rjparoiv
(Kepae) sepa
(sepaoiv^ septov
yepee, yevrj
yepeoip, yevotp
Plural.
Nom.
Voc.
Acc.
Gen.
Dot.
*
1
atúpara
(Tfûparà
(riùparà
(r<»>pàr<t>v
acopa <Ti{v)
Tepnra
repara
repara
reparov
repàaï{v)
rjpara
Tjpara
Tjpârâ
Tjpàrcop
Tjpaaï{p)
1
(sepaa) sepa*
{sepaa) sepa"
{sepaa) sepa'
{sepatúv) septúv
Kepâaï{p)
1
(yepea) yevrj
(yepea) yevr¡
(yepea) yeprj
yepetop, yeptop
y€pe<Tt{p)
* Compare the Latin declension of neuter nouns in ës : e. g. ôpës-,
tasky gënës-, race, N.S. opus, gënùs (yívof), G. ôpërïs, etc., wliere s o'
the crude form is not dropped, as in Greek, but changed into r.
SEPARABLE (THIRD) ijjfiOLENSIOK. 31
%
91-. Like a-ofiar- are declined /icXïr-, honey ; yaXajcr-, milk (K.
and A, sing. yâ\a, § 55) ; Trpay/xär-, deed ; êavfiav, wandet ;
KTrffiar-^ possession ; alfiar-, hlood ; and ail neuters in fiar.
92. Like re par- are declined Trepar-, end, yood; arair-, dough.
In Homer occur suck forma as repaos, repautv, from C. F. repaa--.
93. Like rfpar- are declined ffirar-, liver ; d\ei<f>âr-, oil ; (ppea'r-,
well ; o-KoT-, dung ; and 'vSa-r-, water. The last two have in the
N. and A. sing. oKap and *vbmp ; but by some grammarians both
p and T in these words are considered to be radical, so that the '
crude forms would be ijpapr-, *vàapr-, etc.
94. Like Kepacr- are declined Kpeaa-, flesh ; yepào-, gift, honour ;
yTjpa<r-, old age; some of these words are also declined from
crude forms in 5r : as, Kepàr-, N. Kepâs» G. Kepâros, etc. 2eXa<r-,
blaze, and Beiraa--, goblet, are dechned in the same way, but often
without contraction, G. o-eXaoç, etc. : ßperäa-, image ; K<ùaa-, fleece ;
and ovôaor-, ground (poetical words), change a of the crude form
into e, except in the nom. and acc. sing., G. ßpereos, ßperovs, etc. :
Kpe<j)à(r-, darkness, has both Kvetpaos and kv€(1>ovç. The D. S. of
these words was in the old language written Kepai, yepat, etc. ;
more correctly, as the a is short.
95. Like yevetr- are declined reixfo--, wall (of a fortress) ; avÔea-, .
flower ; naBea-, suffering ; aXyftr-, pain ; v€<f)€<r-, cloud ; Kkeea-,
rumour; opea-, mountain ; and all neuters in €o-. TheN.,V., and
A. pi. of KXeecT' is kXco, not K\eT¡ ; but opea- retains rj. The G. pL
and the forms of the dual are sometimes found uncontracted.
96. A few neuters in p, veKräp-, nectar ; Bepäp-, palm of the
hand, etc., are declined regularly : cap-, spring {feap-, Latin vër-),
and Keàp-, heaH, contract ea into t) in G. and D. sing., and Keap-
also in N. and A.
B. Nouns whose crude forms end in a vowel (i or v).
97. In the Attic declension of nouns in í, t passes into e in all
the cases except the N., V., and A. sing. ; and in the G. sing, mas¬
culine and feminine nouns take the Attic termination a>s instead
of OS. In the Ü. sing, and N. and A plur. contraction is used.
Adjectives in t, such as tbpt-, experienced, and some substantives
in t, which are in great measure poetical, are declined without
the change of i into e,
98. A few substantives in v change v into e in all the cases
except the N., V., and A sing. : they thus take the same termina-
32r
tions as the Attic declension in < ; eec, retains v through
the whole of the singular.
99. All nouns in ot are feminine. In the N, sing, ot becomes
a (originally : the crude form remains unchanged in the voc^
but in the other cases i between two vowels disappears, and con¬
traction ensues. These words are seldom found in the dual and
plural, the fom^ of which, when they occur, are made as ñ-om a
crude form in o, after the analogy of the second or O- declension.
Except in the nom., the forms of the plural in the older language
would be the same, whether made from a crude form in o or in
ot.*
100.
Greek C.F.
Gender.
English.
woXt-
fem.
dty.
WOpTt-
masc. and fern.
a young ox.
iX&v-
masc.
a fish.
wrjxy-
masc.
cubit.
Singular.
Abm.
Foe.
Acc,
(ren.
Bat,
TToXiV
TToXt
TToXlV
9roXe(i>r
(troXci) troXci
iropTis
rroprX
TtoprXv
nopTios
rtopTU & iroprX
iX^vs
ixêv
txOvv
l\$VOÇ
ixêvï
nrjxv
mjxvp
(mjxfi) în7X«
Dual.
N, F. A.
G.D,
«
TToXec
TToXeotv
rropTi€
tropnoiv
IX^€
iX^oiv
mjx^e
Trrjx^oip
Plural.
Nora,
Vac,
Acc,
Gen,
Bat,
(woXccr) woX^ir
(7roX€€r) woXetr
(iroXfar) woXcts
TroXfú)!'
7roXeo'i(i')
nopTics & noprXs
irOpTKS & TTOpTtr
TTopTtas & TTOpnr
irOpTKûV
7ropTX<rX{v)
ixOves
IX0Vۂ
iX^ví
iX^vcûP
1 ix0vaï{p)
(jnjxfíí) mjxeit
(mixttt) mixfis
(mixtas) mixt»
TTTfXf^àV
mixt<rï(v)
* On these words see a paper in the Transactions of the Philolo^cal
Society, vol.vi. p. 155, translated from the German of H. L. Ahrens,
who cites (§§ 1, 7) t) Aijry, ij on the authority of the gramma¬
rian Herodian, and such nominatives as APTËMÛI, ^lAYTQI, etc.,
from inscriptions (Bœckh, Corp. Inscr. No. 696, 2310); and, again,
3ÏAN0O1 from an ancient vase, apparently a nom. fem, lS¡ap0^, the
name of a nymph (otherwise ¡SapOij) corresponding to the mase, river*
god !SapOo'Ç*
SEPARABLE (THIRD) DLCLENSIOK. 33
1
Greek C.F.
Gender.
English.
masc.&fem.
eel.
1
frXvam^
neut.
mustard.
1
1
flOTV-
neut.
town.
l
r
rjXOi-
fem.
echo.
1 Singular.
Nom,
Voc,
Acc,
Gen,
Dot,
ry^eXvi
fyXfXu
eyX^y^vt^
eyxf^vos
eyx^hvï
eXvÜTrX
eïvànX
aïuànX
aiväiTfos
(eXväire'i) trivanei
aoTv
aoTv
aoTU
aoreor
{a(TT€i) aerei*
r)xoi
(tx«") w®
(ijXoor) r/xovt
(ix«'0 VX<"
Dual
N, V. A,
0. B,
€yxf^€€
eyx^^fotv
<rXväiT€Oiv
%
a<TTf€
aoTeoiv
1
Plural.
Nom,
Voc,
Acc,
Gen,
Bat,
€yxfy^€ii
€yxf^€is
€yX€^€(ÛV
€yxfh€(ri(p)
((rXuäneä) eXväirrj
{eivaTTfä) crtrawi;
(eipäTreä) aXväirr)
eXvânfiùv
fTXvàlT€fTX(p)
(acTfa) aoTT)
(acrrea) a<rnj
(aoTfa) aarrj
aOT€<ùP
a(TT€(rX{v)
1
in. Like iroXt- are declined fiavn-, m. seer; m. serpent;
and all feminine nouns in -o-i (-rt, -¿i, ^i), derived from verbs
und denoting an act : as, npa^t-, doing ; seizing; Xí/o-i-,
loosening,
10^. Like iropri- are declined pr¡vi- (also, later, ftTyvid-*), f.
«
loratk; oi- (or ot-, i. e. oft-, Latin ovi-)y m. and f. sheep ; 7ro<rt-,
husband (in the dat. ti oo-ci, not ttooÏ : ttoo-i-, f. ctcí of dHnJcingy is
declined like rroXt-) ; and some proper names, as Sutw/fcrt-, Syen-
nesis,
103, Like tx^vf are declined Ôpv-, f. oak; iutv-, Í,pine ; o(^pv-,
f. eyebrow ; o-raxv-, m. ear of corn ; <rv-, m. and f. Kog, In the
old poets, and again in late prose, but not in Attic, the A. pi. is
found in äs, as ixOvas, vcKvas, Forms of the plur. of eyp^cXv-
retaining the v are sometimes found.
104. Like Trrjxv- a-^d aarv- are declined npca-ßv-, old man, am-
* So Ilapt-, Paris, is declined later from ITapií-, while OtrXS^ in
Homer (ucc. Bîtïv) becomes 0in- in some later writers.
f On the varying quantity of v in the nom. and acc. singular of these
iioiins, see Ahrciis, Phil, Soc. Trans, vi. pp. 167, 168,
D •
34 SVBSTÂI)T1VES.
hassador; ítcAíicv-, m. axe; ttccu-, n. herd (poet.) ; also adjectives
in V (m. and n.), except that in the G. sing, they take os, not wf,
and that ca of the neut, plur. is not contracted.
105. The Attic poets occasionally make the gen. of nouns in i,
inaac. and fern., to end in oy, as noKeas ; while, on the other hand,
such forms as aorctay are foimd.
106. Like rf^oi- are declined netdoi-^ persuasion; TrevÖoi-, tidings;
evtaroi-, well-being; ;(peiot- (Ep.), need; and many feminine pro¬
per names, as Ajjtoi-, Latona ; SoTr^ot-, Sappho.
INSEPAEÀBLE DECLENSION.
107. Words of this declension fall into two classes :
A. Masculines and Feminines in a (first declension). ^
B. Masculines, Feminines, and Neuters in o (second declen¬
sion).
108. The following is a tabular view of the suffixes added in
this declension :—
Feminines in a.
Masculines in a.
Masc. & Fern, in 0.
Neuters in o.
Singular.
Norn.
Voc..
Acc.
Gen.
Dat.
no ending
same as nom.
V
y
t (subscript)
y
no ending
y
0
1 (subscript)
V
same as nom.
V
0
1 (subscript)
Dual.
N. V. A.
G. D.
vowel lengthened
IV
1
vowel lengthened vowel lengthened
ÍV 1 IV
! Plural
. Aom.||
Voc.
Acc.
Gen.
Dat.
I
same as nom.
'í (vy)
<ÚV
IS
1
Í
same as nom.
■j (vs)
OiV
IS
1
w
a
same as nom.
a
(tíV
IS
1
inseparable decxension. so
RemarJcs on the Suffixes.
109, Voc, Sirig.—Of feminines in a, and in all plnral^, the
nominative is used as a vocative. Of masculines in a, the crude
form is, according to the rule, the vocative case ; but the vowel
is most frequently lengthened. The crude form of maso, and
fern, nouns in o also constitutes the vocative ; but the final o is
changed into e.
lie. Gen. Sing.—ao becomes ov in Attic (from the Ionic fw) :
in Doric this case ends in ao and d : oo is also contracted into
OV.
111. Dat. Sing.—The a and o of the cnide form are length-
ened, and the t becomes subscript (§ 28).
112. Accus. PluT.—avs and aus become as and ovs (§ 40).
113. Gen. Plur. — a<ou (Ion. €o>v) and o<av are both contracted
into 0)1/ in Attic.
114. Dat. Plur.—The original forms of this case in at(TÏ(v) and
oicrt(i/) are frequently found in the poets and in some prose
writers.
Examples
A. Masculine and feminine nouns in a.
(First Declension.)
115. Some difficulty arises from the modification to which the
final vowel of the crude form is subject in the singular. In
feminine nouns it varies between d, d, and 17 ; in masculines
between d and rj. Attention should be paid to the following
rules :—
116. a. If the vowel he long, it is, in Attic, d after i, t, and p ;
é
otherwise 7; (§ 34).
If the vowel be short, it is, of course, d.
Exceptions to this general rule are the fern, nouns icopa-,
maiden, and àtpa-, neck, in the inflection of which ij is used
throughout the singular, not d. On the other hand, the fern.
nonus yva-, ßeld ; ç\aa-, olive-tree ; Troa-, grass; croa-, porch; and
Xpoa-, skin, complexion, which, according to the rule, .should
exhibit 7¡, are inflected in d ; but these words originally ended in ,
36
f
SUBSTANTIVES.
ta- (yvia-, fXata-, etc.), SO that ä in the singular is only an appa*
rent exception to the rule.
In the Doric declension of these nouns the long vowel is always
«, in the Ionic always rj ; words, therefore, which, being intro¬
duced into the Attic from those dialects, retain their original
spelling, have not been cited as exceptions.
117. 6. The vowel is always long in the nom., acc., and dat. of
masculine nouns, which cases, therefore, end in 5i*, äf, and ä after
€, t, and p, otherwise in rjçy rjv, and jj.
118. c. The vowel is always long in the gen. and dat. of femi¬
nine nouns, which cases, therefore, end in âf and à after €, t, and
p, otherwise in rjs and 7.
119. d. There remain to be considered the nom. and acc. of
feminine nouns. In these the vowel remains short in the follow-
ing cases :—
(1.) Atter XX, w, aa (tt), \fr, and f ; that is, after the double
letters and repeated letters: as, N. sing. üv€\\ä, humcane;
yevva, offering ; y\<ùaaâ, tongue ; opinion; thirst;
TpaTTéfa, table.
(2.) After o- preceded by a diphthong or long vowel : aa^
N. sing, ftovaäy muse.
(3.) After p preceded by v, or by any diphthong (except at») ;
as, N, sing. a-(t>vpây hammer ; vfipa, attempt ; pa^atpa, knife : .but
ßopäj gate; yu^pâ^ country ; Xavpâ, alley. Exceptions are eVaipa,
female companion; náXaiarpóy wrestling-school; xoXXvpo, roU of
bread ; Atdpö, Mthra ; i>atôpâ, Phœdra.
(4.) In all words ending in -aiva, and in many others in -va :
as, N. sing. Xeaiva, lioness; €;(tSi'a, viper.
(5.) In all words in -rpta, signifying feminine agents : as,
N. sing, ivovi^rpia^ poetess ; and in the three feminine adjectives
pia, one ; ôîa, godlike ; ttotvio, mistress, worshipful.
(6.) In all words, including the feminine of all perfect partici¬
ples active, in which a is preceded by vi : as, N. sing. pvtä,ßy;
T€ríí<^ui^ having struck : pjjTpviä, step-mother, is an exception.
(7.) In disyllables in which a is preceded by the diphthong
at, and in some proper names of places of more than two sylla¬
bles : as, N. sing, yaia, earth ; Tortato, Histiœa,
INSEPARABLE (FIRST) DECLENSION. 37
(8.) In words oí more than two syllables in which a is preceded
by the diphthongs et and oi : as, N. sing. íepeto, priestess; aumä.
folly : except that nouns in -em denoting a condition^ and con¬
nected with verbs in -eu, have ä : thus, N. sing. jSuo-iXem, a qxieen,
but /âdo-rXecô, royal power,
(9.) In some isolated words : as, N. sing. Scatra, way of life ;
aKavÔ^ thorn. From Tren/a-, hunger ; roXpa-, daring^ and some
others, two forms are found—N. sing. írctua and roXpa and
ToX/ii;, etc.
In all these cases, therefore, the nom. and acc. sing, end in â
and av,
120. In other combinations the vowel is long, and (with the
exceptions already given) the nom. and acc, sing, end in 5 and ûp
after e, i, and p ; otherwise in rj and qv,
121. Throughout the dual and plural the vowel is invariably a. ~
122.
Greek C.F.
vIkot
aoa"
ôea-
(Ticta-
1
x<ûpa'
Gender.
fem.
fem.
fem.
fem.
V % 1
fem.
English.
victory.
satiety.
goddess.
shadow.
placCf country.
Singular.
Nom,
vïkt)
arr-q
ôcâ
oklâ
x(opä
Voc,
vTktj
áaq
ûeâ
okld
Xcopä
Acc,
pÏktjv
àaqp
êeâp
(tklâv
x<àpâp
Gen,
vïkt]ç
àcqç
âeâs
aKiàs
X<»>pàç
Dai,
PÏKTJ
àa-rj
ê€a
c
akia
, ft
X<opq
Dual.
N, V. A,
vTkû
se ••
aaa
Ôeà
aKiä
Xiùpâ
. Q.D.
pÏkuip
acraiv
ôeaip
cktaip
xcûpaip
Plural.
Nom,
viKai
aaaç
Ôeat
akiai
X<t)pai
Voc,
pikai
acrai
6e ai
CKiai
X^pai
Acc,
vikàs
âaàç
ôeâi
a-Kiàs
X<*>pàs
Gen,
' vl«ji>v
àaayv
ûeùùp
(TKl(ùV
Dot,
vikais
acats
ûeaiç
ckiaii
x<opaiç
3'3
«
SÜOSTANTIVKS.
1 1
Greek C. F.
Gender.
English.
1
ptovora'
fern.
m^ise.
äpoia-
fem.
folly.
ho^a-
fem.
opinion.
Xeatra'
fem,
lio7iess.
yXctxrao'
fem.
tongue.
Singular.
Nom.
Voe.
Acc.
Gen.
Dai.
1
pLovaa
povaa
povtrap
povoTjç
povarj
aro ta
äpoiä
avoiáv
àvoiàs
ávoia
4
Bc^a
ôo|a
Bo^âp
Bo^rjç
ôo|>7
Xeaivâ
Xcairtt
Xeaipap
\eaivTjs
Xeaipg
yXcoaträ
yXúxroá
yXcoff-irap
yXcoatrt/s
yXtíxTog
Dual.
..V. V. A.
G. D.
povcrä
pov(raiP
âroiâ
àvoiaiv
ôo^â
Bo^aip
Xeatrâ
\caivaip
yX(ù(T(rà
yX(ù(j(raLV
Plural.
Norn.
Voc.
Acc.
Gen.
Dai,
1
povaat
povaai
povaâç
povatúP
povaais
avoiat
avoiai
àvoiâs
àvOKûV
avouais
Bo^at
Ôo^at
Bo^âs
Bo^a>p
Bo^aiç
\eaivai
Xeaipai
Xeaipâf
Xeaipcop
Xeaipaïf
yX<ù<raai
yXonaaai
yX(ù(r(ràs
yXfùaacùP
yXùxraais
123. So are declined aÔtKta-, injustice ; aXíj^eta-, truth ; *a/ia^a-,
waggon', àpirvta-, harpy, yecjivpa-, bridge', yvaypa-, judgemerd',
bÍKa-, justice ; daXaa-íra-, sea ; Öepa7ra«/a-, maidservant ; Xiîpa-,
Zyre ; pt¿a-, rooí ; oro(f)ia-, wisdom ; rtpa-, honour ; <f>vya-y ßight j
;^Xatra-, cZoöE^—all feminine. Further examples for declension
will be found in § 119.
124. Some nouns in -ea contract ca into rj : as, (tvK€a-,ßg-trce,
N. (TVKeà or <TVKj],
125. The vocative of masculines in a retains a (1) in nouns,
ending in ra ; (2) in national names : as, Xlepo-a-, a Persian,
V. Ilfpira ; but Ueptra-, Perses, V. ïlepanj ; (3) in some com])ounds
ot the verbs TrwXe-, sell ; ufroe-, measure ; rpiß-, rub .• as,
rpa-, rt geometer, V. y€û?/i€Tpa.
INSEPARABLE (FIRST) DECLENSION. 39
126.
Greek C.F.
Gender.
English.
TToXtra-
masc.
citizen.
i
t
TeX a> ma¬
mase.
farmer of customs.
1
•
veâvia-
masc.
young man.
1
(epixta-yepfitj-
masc.
Dermes.
Singular.
Som,
Voc.
Acc,
(Jen.
Dat.
ttoKTttjí
TToXIrä
ttoklrriv
TTokÏTOV
ttoXItt]
tikiûvriç
texcùvy)
texcùprjv
tcxcûvov
reXcûrp
veâviàs
vfàvià
veâviàv
vçàviov
veâvia
4
^epprjs
'Epprj
^epprjp
*Eppov
'^PI^V
Dual.
N. V. A,
G. D.
TToXêrâ
TToXíTatU
Tc\(ûvâ
rexiùvaiv
reâVtâ
vcâpiaiu
'Eppä
*EppaiP
Plural.
Norn.
Voc.
Acc.
Gen.
Dat.
TToXlTaí
TrdXïrai
iroXIräs
ttoxïtœv
TToXÏTats
TeXcùvai
T€X(úVaí
reXcùpàs
t€X(ùvù)v
reXœvaiç
peâpiai -
pçâpLai
veâpiâi
VfàPKùV
veàviaii
'Eppai
*Eppai
'Eppâs
^epptûp
*Eppais
1
127. So are declined ArpciBa-, son of Atreus; y€<ofi€Tpa', geome¬
ter; oirXira-, heavy-armed soldier ; ikcbot^ Bcythian; râpia-, dis¬
penser; robora-, arcker—all masculine.
128. Some nouns in -pa and many proper names, mostly Doric,
retain the Doric contract genitive in ä : as, Moppa- (Bopta-), north
ivindy G, Boppâ
B. Masculine, Feminine, and Neuter Nouns in o.
(Second Declension.)
129. In some words in which o or 6 precedes the final vowel of
the crude form, contraction takes place.
40
SüBSTANnTES«
Greek C.F.
Gender.
English.
Xoyo-
masc.
word.
in)0'0-
fem.
island.
OCKO-
neut.
ßff-
ttXoo-
masc.
voyage.
/
OdTfO-
neut.
bone.
Singular.
Nom,
Voc.
Acc,
Qen,
Dot,
\oyos
Xoye
Xoyoi*
Xoyov
Xoyw
prj<roç
Vr)(T€
in^aov
VlfOOV
VT)<TCÛ
avKop
avKOP
(TVKOP
OVKOV
(rvK(û
t
(ÏTXOOÎ) ÎTXouç
(îrXoe) ítXoi;
(TTXOOJ') trXovjx
(ttXoou) ttXov
{TT\O<Û) wXa
(oartop) ooTovp
{paT€op) ofrroup
(oareop) ootovp
(oarcov) ootov
(OOTÍ^) oottí
Dual.
N, V, A.
Q.D.
Xoyw
Xoyoiv
tnj(ra>
vr¡<TOiv
OVKCù
0~VK01P
(TTXoíi)) TTXÖ
(TTXooii/) TTXOII'
(ooTeo)) oara '
(o(rr€oiv) ooToip
Plural.
Norn.
Voc.
Acc.
Gen,
Bat.
Xoyot
Xoyot
Xoyouç
Xoywv
Xoyoiff
vr¡(TOi
vrjcroi
vrjaovs
vr)<T<i)v
pr)<rois
<rvKa
avKU
trvKa
(rvK(ûP
avKOts
(TTXOOI) TTXoí
(ttXooi) TrXot
(ttXooví) ttXovs
(TrXocúf) TTXOÍP
(ttXooiç) TrXoty
(otrrea) oot5
(ooTca) oord
(ooTfa) oarâ
( oo'recúi') ooTöi'
(oOTfOtí) OOTOtÇ
130. So are declined ayyeXo-, m. messenger; â8c\<l)o-, m. br(h
ther; afiTreXo-, f. Vins; àovXo-, m, slave; fpyo-^ n. work ; ^fo-, m.
god (voc. öfoi) ; xtttto-, m. and f. horse, mare ; Kaveo-, n. basket;
voo-, m. mind; voao-, f. disease ; ¿ííXo-, n. piece of wood ; 68o-, £
road; po8o-, n. rose; poo-, m. stream,
131. There are a few nouns with a crude form ending in a
(apparently contracted from túo or ao) : these are declined as
folio W8 :—
BSBEPARABLE (SECOND) DECLENSION. 41
(Attic Declension.)
jGreekC.F.
Gender.
English.
Xecy
masc.
people.
Xaycö-
masc.
Aare,
âpiùyeù)'
neut.
upper room.
1
■ ÏÏ
•
Xecaç
Xfa>9
Xcú)!»
Xeú>
Xfo)
A
\äy<üs
\ày<ùs
Xâycoi» and Xaya>
Xây<i>
Xây^
aviùy^iùv
avfùy^fàv
ai/6)yfci»/
aviùy^iù
âra>y€<»
Dual.
7. A.
G.D.
XfO)
XC6>1»
1
XâycD
Xâyui»
For the Dual
and Plural neu¬
ter of this de¬
clension, seeAöi-
jectivesy § ISO.
1
Plural.
Nom»
Voc,
Acc,
Gen,
Dot,
Xco
Xc^
\€<ÛS
Xf6>l»
Xeôç
Xavci>
Aayû>
Xaycöi
Xâycdi»
Xây^ç
(
132. So are declinedm. Mount Athos; îô-, f. dawn (§ 86);
icâXù>-, m. rope ; Kw-, f. the island Cos ; Mf vcXf co-, m. Menelaus ; <
ptay-, m. temple; and some adjectives. Many of these words
sometimes throw away v in the accus, sing. : compare the regular
Greek acc. in the separable declension with the Latin,—Xfoyr-a
with leon-e^. Some of them, as Xto)-, ffw-, Mfi'eXfo)-, coexist
with crude forms in âo,— Xâo-, räo-, MfvcXäo-, etc., which are
declined regularly.
133. On a comparison of the two principal declensions, the
separable and the inseparable, they will be found to have the
following features in common :—
(1.) In the N. sing., masculines and, though less uniformly»
feminines, either take the suffix ç, or have the final vowel of the
crude form lengthened in compensation.
(2.) In the A, sing., masc. and fem. noims ending in a vowel
take the suffix i/.
(3.) In the D. sing, of all nouns the suffix is i, subscript in
nouns of the inseparable declension.
12
(4.) lu the N. and A. dual, either € is added, or, which is equi¬
valent, the final vowel of the cmde form is lengthened.
(5.) In the G. and D. dual of all nouns the suffix is iv (otv).
(6.) In the A. pi. of masculine and feminine nouns the suffix
is s added to the ace. sing. The original ending of the accus,
plur. in the inseparable declension, then, was vs : v was dropped,
the vowel being lengthened ; hence â?, ovs.
(7.) In the N., Y., and A. pi. of all neuter nouns the suffix is a.
(8.) In the G- pi. of all nouns the suffix is ícv.
(9.) In the D. pi, of all nouns the suffix was, originally, crr(i').*
134. The principal points of difierence between these two
declensions are :—
(1.) In the N. and A. sing, of neuters the separable declension
admits no suffix, the inseparable takes v,
(2.) In the G. sing, the separable declension has the suffix oç
(ù)ç) ; the inseparable has o, except that feminines in a take s.
(3.) In the N. pi. of masculine and feminine nouns the sepa¬
rable declension has the suffix cs, the inseparable takes u
135. In addition to the regular case-endings there are cer¬
tain suffixes which partake of the nature of case-endings, though
in the ordinary language their use is limited to a few words, and
they retain only the original signification of relations of place*
In the older language they were much more freely used. These
are,—
-Ô€, answering to the question : (acc.) ot/caÔe, to ones
house,
-Oevy „ „ whence: (gen,) oiKoôev,from onéS
house,
-6Ï „ „ where : (dat.) oKKoßi, elsewhere,
136. The suffixes -Bev and ~ÔX are appended to the crude form of
the noun : hBr^vr^-Sev^from Athens ; kukXo-ô^v, from the circle ;
6 is, however, sometimes substituted for a, as from the
roots (pifa-, root), or inserted as connecting-vowel, as iravr-o-Biv,
from all sides. The suffix -Ôc is usually appended to the accusa¬
tive form : as, Mfyapa-ôe, to Megara ; 'EXfVfjiva-he, to Eleusis ;
otxaSe, from ot/co-, is irregular, but oiKovhe is found in Homer.
* Compare the so-called adverbs of the place where, ^AQi]vr]<il(v)
n\aratáír£(í'), Bvpàai(v), etc. (§ 137).
PECULIARTÍli-S OP DECLENSION. 43
-A« sometimes combines with ç of the acc. plural to form -ft :
thus,"Aöiyfafe, to Athens^ íov^Aóqvacr-áe ; Qqßa^iy tú Thebes,
137. Besides this adverbial dative in ôi^ we find in some words,
with the same meaning, a modification of the ordinary dative :
as, otKot (otKú)), at home (poet. otKoôï) ; Hvôoiy at Pytho ; Icr^uoi, at
the Isthmus ç in Athens ; lIXaratuirl(i/), in Platœœ \
Ôvpâ<jX[y)y at the doors.
Peculiarities of Declension,
138. Many foreign proper names, the cardinal numbers from
n^vTCyfivey to ¡Karovy one hundredy inclusively, (in the sense
offas)y and a few neuters, as ofâp, dream; *iÍ7rap, waking vision;
bepaç, body ; o^eXos, usCy are undeclined, or are used only in the
nom. or acc.
139. Some proper names of places have no singular : as,
*'K6f)va.-y f. N. pl.'^Adi/i'ai, the city Athens; Mfyäpo-, n. N. pi. Meyapo,
the city Megara; TepTreo--, n. N. pi. TepTr?;, the vale of Tempe,
. 140. Of some nouns collateral forms exist, sometimes with a
slight difference of meaning, sometimes with a difference of
usage—one being found in prose, the other in poetry; or one
being of a later period than the other. Thus we find
'aXcû-, *âXù)i^-, 'aXcöcr-, and 'aXcoa-, f. threshing-floor.
Styl/-a-, f. and 8t\^eír-, n. thirst. •
Oepto-r- and Geptr- or ©eptÔ-, î, justice, law, the goddess Justice.
vana-y f. and vairea-, n. glen,
oXÔo-, m. and oxôa-y f. ba^ik.
0X0-, m. and (in plur.) ox€cr-, n. chariot.
TrXtupa-, f. and (in plur.) TrXeupo-, n. rib, side,
CTKOTO-, m. and o'^oreo--, n. darkness,
racù- and racoi/-, m. peacock,
<^aecr- and (¡your-,* n. light,
^doyyo-, m. and <^doyya-, f. voice, sound,
Xwpo-, m. and xo>pa-, f. place,
* The late and anomalous form 0ior- was evidently suggested, in
false analogy, by the contracted nom. sing, (¡kjjç {=z<l>aoç): it must not
be confounded with the old word m. man, hero, which is declined
regularly, N. A. 0iura; etc. Compare skin, by the side
of xpoff-, N.xp<^í:; § 86.
44
SUBSTÂIITIV]
141. Some notms in o !have one gender in the singular, ano¬
ther in the pIuraL Thus,
dfT/io-, chainy is m. in the sing., m. & n. in the pi.
¿vyo-, yoke, is m. & n. „ n. „
KfXtvdo-, way, is f. „ f. & a „
a lighty is m. „ m* & n. „
vfùTO'y hacky is m. & n. „ n. „
o'Îto-, corny is m. „ n. ^
oraôto-, a meamre ) - ^ ^ s. ^
of length, | ^ »
orad/io-, stally statioUy is m. „ m. & n. „
Taprapo-, TartaruSy is m. & f. „ n, „
142. Many irregularities arise from the coexistence of two
crude forms, one or both of which are declined only in part.
Some of the most important of these anomalous nouns have
been already given in the remarks on the several declensions ;
others are declined here ;—
yovv- and yovar-, n. knee^ N. V. A. yovv ; G. yovarot ; D. yovari ;
PI. N. V. A. yopara ; G. yoyarav ; D. yoi'ao-i(i'). Similarly is
declined
èopv-y Sopar-, and àopetT'y D, beamy spear, N.V. A. hopv ; Q. Sopa¬
ros (or Sopor) ; D. ôopârt (or ôopi) and bop^i ; PI. N. V. A, ôo-
para and bopT) ; G. boparoiV ; D. Ôopairt(i').*
yvva- and yvvaiK-y f. woman^, N. yvv7¡ ; V. yvvai ; A. yvi^anca ;
G. yiwatKor \ etc.+
baspv- and 8a/cpoo-, n. tear, N.V. A. Baicpv and baKpvov ; PL
N.V. A. baKpva; G. 8aKpv<ùv ; D. ôa#cpi;irt(i') and baKpvois»
bevbpo- and bevbpca- n. tree, N. V. A. b€vBpov ; G. bevbpov ; D. Sfi*-
àpcù and bfvbpn ; PI. N. V. A. bepÔpâ and bepdprj ; G. bfpbpav ;
D. bevbpots and b€pbp€<ri{p),
Atf- and Zef- (Atef-), m. Jupiter, N. Zevs ; V. Zeu ; A. Aio ;
G. Aior ; D. Ail. Also a poetical form—A. Zrjpäy etc.—is
found, as from a C. F, Zijp-,
* In addition are found such forms as yovvoç and yovvàroç, dovpoç
and bovparoç, etc. The inserted v is perhaps to be referred to the v
of yoW' and íopv-. With the lengthened forms yovaroç, SopaTOç, etc.,
compare 7rpo<T<u7rdra, ovHpàràf ^¿opará, poetical neut. pL from irpoe*
wwo-n/ace; ovttpo-, dream.; btapo-, bond.
t Compare the diminutive yvva-io-, n. a little woman, and the adjec¬
tives yvva-io- and yvvaiK-uo-y womanish.
PEX:UUARITIE& OF PECLEN8I0H« 45
0aXí;T- atïd ÖäXiy-, m. Thaies. N. V. OaXiys ; A. QakrjTa and 0a-
Xi;!' ; G. 0âXi7rof, OaXeúíf and 0âXov ; D. Oo\rjTÏ and 0âXi;.
ôepaTrovT- and ôepaw, m. servant, Ûepairopr- is declined regularly
throughout ; and from Ôfpàn- are found A sing, êepâirâ and
N. pi. êepaTTCç.
KupâT'f n. and Kpär-y m. and f. head. N. V. Kapä and Kpâra (neut.) ;
A. Kapä and Kpàrà (m. and u.) ; G. Kpäros ; D. tcapa and KpàrX ;
Pl. A Kpäräs f G. Kpârùiv ; D. Kpâ(rï(v).
Koiif<t}po~ and Koiuiûp-, m. partner, koiv^vo- is declined regularly ;
and in Pl. are also found N. Kotvavts ; A. Koivcnväs,
Kpïvo' and Kpivftr-, n. lil^. Kpïvo- is declined regularly ; and in
Pi. are found N. A. Kpïv€â{-i)\ and D. KptP€ai(v).
Kvov- and KVP-, m. and f. do^. N, kv(op ; V. kvop ; A. KÍíi'a i G. «ií-
vos ; etc. D. pi. Kv<rt(i').
\äf- and Xao-(?), m. stone, N. V. \âs ; A. Xäv and Xäa ; G. Xâos
and Xaov ; D. X5i ; etc. D. pi. \â€(TÏ(y).
vap-, vcp-f and vrjp-y f. ship, N. vavç ; A raw ; G. v€<ûs j D. vrji ;
Pi. N. vr)€s ; A, vavç ; G. v€<ùv ; D. í'au(rt(i').
OiÔmtoÔ- and Otöwroi;-, m. Œdipus. N. OtSwrous ; V. OtÔÎ-Trovs and
-ïtov ; A. Otôi-TToÔa and -^ow ; G. Oièï-Troboç and -ttov ; D. Ot-
àïirodï : also from a C. F. OtôcTroôa- are found V. OiöwroÄä ;
A. OtÖiTToSär ; G. OtâtTToôâ (for -8ao), in lyrical passages.
ov€ipo-y m. and n. oveipâr-y n. dream. N. oveipov and oveiooç ;
V. oveipe ; A. oveipov ; G. oveipov ; D. oveip<û (rarely oveiparoç,
oveiparï) ; Pl. N. V. A. ovetparà (rarely oveipà) ; G. oveipärivv
and ùveipiùv ; D. oveipâ(rï{v) and oveipoiç. In N. and A. sing.
ovap is found.
opvïÔ- and opvi-, m, and f. bird. N.V, opvî"ç ; A. opvtûa and opvVv ;
G. opvlôoç'y D. opviôï'f Pl. N.V. opvïâeç and opveiç; A. opvîôaÇy
opveiÇy and opvïç'y G. opviO<ùv\ D. opvÍai{y).
riv/cv-, f. the Pnyx. N. Tlvv^ ; A. ; G. Hvkvoç ; D. Hvkvï :
also in later writers XIiaíKa, etc.
rrüp- and ttvpo-y u.ßre. N.V. A. TriJp; G. Trvpos; D.-irvpi; PL
N.V. A. TTvpa y G. irvpiùv ; D. irvpoiç.
vio- and v΀f~y m. son. vîo- is declined regularly throughout ; of
vîef- are found in the sing. G. vieoç ; D. vi« ; in the plur.
N. V. A. vteiç ; G. vle(j)v ; D. vÍ€<rX{v) ; (uievcriv is late).
46
80bstantivkr.
\€p- and àand. N. V. ; Du. N. A, x^'P^ î G- D- xföot»*
(rarely ^(^etpoiv) ; D. pi. xfpfft(*') ^ the other cases are declinoci
from both crude forms ; but in Attic prose the forms from
X^tp- are used.
cût- (opaT-)y n. ear, N. V. A. our ; G. otos ; D. (ctX, etc.
For the dialectic varieties see below, Of the Dialects,
143. The following tabular view of the various terminations
of the N. S. in the separable (third) declension, and of the
crude forms to which they may coi respond, is given, partly for
the use of those who. having begun the study of Greek on the
ordinary system, may wish to engraft on it the crude-form sys¬
tem ; partly to facihtate the consultation of the dictionary.
Ending
of
Norn. Sing.
1
Ending
of
Crude Form.
1 '
Examples.
Nom. Gen.
9
Crude Form.
V
-pa
-par, n.
(Toipd, o-(ùpaToçy n. hody.
o"a)/iaT-
-air
-air
-aiS
1
Satff, ôairoff, f. meal,
îratff, TratboÇf m. and f. child.
t
Ôair-
TTOlÖ-
-ai*
TraiäVf TTûiâj'off, m. pcean.
Tïaiâv-
-av
-avj n,
'ain-j n.
peXàVf p€\âvoç, n. (adj.) black,
Tvyjrävf ri/t/z-aj^off, n. (part.)/^ar-
ïny struck.
flfXa^^-
Tvy¡favT-^
-5p
-Cip
yj/'äp, yjräpos, m. starling.
V
-ap
w
-ap
-apy n.
-ar, 11.
1
onp, odpoff, f. wife,
€apy cdpoff (rypoff), n. spring,
ïjpdp, TjpäroSf n. day.
odp-
ffup-
Tjpar-
-äff
-av
-avr
p€\âçf peXai'off, m. (adj.) black,
Tvyjräs, Tv>|Aan"Off,m.(part.)Aay-
ing struck.
pfXar-
TvyftavT-
-aff
-ab
-do-, n.
!-dr, n.
Xapirâçj XapTràboç, f. lamp,
Kpeäiy ifpea)ff, Il,ßesh,
rcpäff, Tepàroç, n. portent.
XapTTub-
Kpeatr-
T€paT-
-tivV
-af
ypauff, ypäos, f. old womari.
ypäf-
-€tp j
1 -f/> (-f'p)
X^ip, X^P®^ ^ hand.
xep- à x€tp
PECtJUA;uïrB.'â o¡r de:len'siox.
47
Eü'ding
of
Nom. Sing.
Ending
of
Crude Form.
EXAiU'LES.
Nom. Gen.
Crude Form.
-eií
•
-6iÔ
-€V
-€PT
K\tis, K\tiSos, f. ke^.
fiy, tvos, m. one.
\vdtts, Xi/öfvTor, m. (part.) Äa^>-
ùiç/ been loosened.
KXttb-
tv-
XvdtVT-
-€V
-€Vf n.
-eVTy n.
Ttptv, Ttptvos, n. (adj.) tender.
Xvûtv, XhdtvTos, n. having
been loosened.
TtptV-
Xvdtvr-
1
-€<T, n.
acK^ts, aacpovs, n. (adj,) clear.
aäipta-
-fUÍ
<Pcvtvs, (povtios, m. murderer.
(povtf-
-rjv
-ev
-TjV
Xiprjv, Xiptvos, m. harbour,
'EXkrjv, 'EXXr)vos, m.. a G reek.
Xiptv-
'EXXrfV-
'Tjp
-ep
■VP
aidrjp, aiêtpos, m. ether,
ôrjp, ôrjpos, m. wild beast.
aiêfp-
êqp-
■^s
-ta
-rjT
rpirjpris, rpirjpovs, f. trireme.
ßapvTTjs, ßäpijTrjTos, f. weight.
Tptrjpea-
ßäpvrrjT-
-I, n.
-IT, n.
aXvÓTTi, aïvântiùs, n. mustard.
pt\ï, ptXÏTos, n. honey.
crXváTTi-
peXÏT-
-llf
-IV
dtXtpïv, ôtXipîvos, m. dolphin.
à€X(pTp-
-tff
-1
-IT
-tS
-id
-IV
vroXís, TroXecBs, f. city.
XÖpis, g'eace.
t\ms, tXTTibos, f. hope,
opvïs, opvïôos, m. and f. bird.
àtXtpLs, ètXtpïvos, m. dolphin.
TToXí-
XàpÏT-
eXirïà-
opvTÔ-
è€\<f>ïu-
-f^v
-ov, n.
-ovT, n.
ev5aipoy, tv5uipovos, U. (aJj.)
happy.
Xvov, XvovTos, n. (part.) loosen-
evàaipov-
XvovT-
-op
-op, n.
"àop, "âopos, n. sxcord.
*^äop-
-OS
-oT, n.
-ta, n.
77t<f)ijKOS, TTtCpVKOTOS, H. (pai't.)
having been born,
ytvos, ytvovs, n. race.
TTC^CKOT-
y€vça'-
48
SüBSTÁNTITfiS.
Ending
of
Nom. Sing.
Ending
of
Crude Form.
i
Examples
Norn. Gen, Crude Form.
-OVÍ
-oF
~oà
'OPT
ßovi, /3oof, m. and f. <xp,
Trovf,* iToôof, m./bof.
oSovÇf odoPToÇf m. tooth.
ßof-
TTob-
oboPT'
-v
-V, n.
atrrv, atrTfor, n. city.
aaTtp'
»
-vv
'VP
'VP
-VVTf XL
po<rvPy poavvosy m. wooden
h o%ee,
èetKPVPy àeiKPvpTosy n, (part )
shewing.
pOOVP'
àflKPVPT'
-vp
-Vp, n.
ttvp^ nvpo9y n.fire.
TTVp-
-VS
V
'VÇ
-V
'vvr
-v
-lió
ixOvsy ixBvoiy xsi.ßsh,
hsiKPvsy bsiKvvPTOiy nu (part.)
shewing.
TTTfxvSy 7rr¡x^^^9 C^hit.
xkapvsy )^àpvôoSf f. military
cloak.
IX0V-
àeifcpvpT'
TTrfxv-
xXâpvà'
-(Û
-ot
iretOdy weiBovsy i. persuasion.
TTSlûoi'
-<ûP
^OP
-iùP
'OPT
'dVT
8aipdpy àaipovosy m. deity.
äydPy àydvoÇy m. public COTin
test.
\€dPf Xfocrof, m. lion.
S€Po<j>dVf S(Po(¡>dPTofy m. JFeno-
phon.
àaipoP'
oydP'
XeoPT'
StPO(f>dpr'
•Ú)p
-op
-dp, n.
pTjTdpy ptjTopoÇf m. orator.
¿Xdp, €X.dpoSi n. booty.
pTJTOp'
cXwp-
-Of
'dS
-or
'dV
athdSy aibovsy f. shame.
r/pûif, Tfpdoç, m hero.
7r€<f>vKdSy TTf^v/coToy, m. (part.)
having been bom,
€p(ùç, €p(ùT0Sy m. ¿ove.
aiôotr-
TfpdtT'
7r€<¡)VK0T'
€p<ÚT'
* Thé diphthong, however, appears in this nom. ttovç (i.e. voS-ç)
only because the word is a monosyllable; in the D. pi. wc have iro«
(iroS&i), not Tov&i: and although in the compounds rpÎTrovÇy rsrpi»
irovç^ etc., the diphthong was retained in the ordinary language, yet in
the old poets the more strictly correct forms rptwoçy reTpäiroCf etc.«, also
occur. See § 40.
f Tot the long vowel, sec above, note •.
AnjECnvES.
49
Ending
of
Norn. Sing.
: 1
1 1
Ending
of
Crude Form.
1
Examples.^
Nom. Gen. '
1
Crude Form.
-TT
-;3
yv^f yviroçy m. vulture.
XàXvyfr^ xaXtßoT^ m. steel, *
KâTij\ï<f>oçjf, upper story.
yVTT'
xäXHß'
KaTrjkï<f>~
4
'K
-y
-X
'KT
<f>vXn^y <l>v\aK0Sy m. tpatchmaii
(pikoyoçy f. fio/fM.
oyv$y ovvxoSf m. natly claw,
iw^y wKTosy f. night.
i^vXaic-
oyvx'
WKT'
ADJECTIVES.
144. The most numerous class of adjectives consists of those
which in the masculine and neuter are declined from a crude
form in o, in the feminine from a crude form in a. These are
declined like substantives in o maso, and neut., and substantives
fern, in a, except that in every case of the sing. fern, the vowel is
ä after i, and p, and after o preceded by p, otherwise rj.
<ro<f>0'y m. n. ; a'o<Pa-j f.
cleveTy wise.
Mose. Fem. Nevt.
«
1
aio*xpo-, m. n. ; aiaxpa-y f, ¡
ugly^ hateful.
Mose. Fem. Nevt.
Sing.
Norn,
Voc,
Acc,
Gen.
Dot.
a'o<f>os iro(f>Tj (to(I>ov
0'0(p€ iro(f>rf a'o<f>ov
ooipov ooc^Tiv <ro(j>ov
ooifxtv <ro(f>rjç
<ro<f)tp <ro<f>Tj cro^6>
oio'xpo; aitrxpà oto*xpoi'
ataxpe oio*xpd aioxpov
aicxpov atiTXpâv aiaxpov
ataxpov aio*xpd; aiaxpov
oio'xp^ aio*xpa ai<rxp<p
Dual.
N. V. A.
G,B.
<ro<f><û <TO<j>ä <ro(p(o
a'o(j>oiv (ro<f>atu ao<f>otv
acoxP<*> attrxpâ aio-yp^
aia-xpoiv aiaxpotv aiaxpoiv
Plural.
Nam,
Voc,
Acc,
Gen.
Bat,
i . .
ao<f>ot ooifiat a'o<¡>a
0*0004 0*0001 0*000
O*O0OVr 0*000; 0*000
0*006))' (TO(fyj)V 0*000»'
<ro0oi; 0*0001; 0*0001;
oio*xpoi oio'xpcu aio*xpa
oio*xpoi oio'xpoi oio*xpd
oio'xpoo; aicxpás ato'xpd
oio*xpo)v aio'XP<<i»' ai<rxp<^^
aitrxpoie owrxp®*^ oio'xpoi;
50 ADJECnVES.
145. So are declined,
dÎKato-, m. n. ; duaior, f. just ; N. S. diicaiuf, dtiraiá, ÔUaiOv,
aXXo-, m. n. ; oXXa-, f. other ; oXXoç, oXXi;, oXXo.*
¿TrXoo-, m. n. ; uTrXoa-, f. simple ; ¿TrXoof, ânXorj, âiiKoop,
adpoQ', m. n. ; a^poa-, f. collected ; a^poo;, a^poâ, adpoov.
146. Many adjectives of this formation, including most com¬
pound adjectives and derivatives in to, fto, and tpo, with some
others, have no special form for the feminine (adjectives of two
terminations) : as,
i7<rv;(o-, quiet ; N. m. f. Tfovxosy n. rjav^op,
är€KV0', childless ; N. m. f. àrsKvoÇy n. arfKvov.
Kap7ro<f>opo-, fruitful ; N. m, f, Kap7ro(f>opoç, il. Kap7ro(Popor.
acùttjpio-y saving ; N. m. f. o-coTT/ptoy, n. (tkottjpiov,
ßäaTKfiO'y kingly ; N. m. f. i3a<rtX€toy, n. ßaai^ftov,
àoKÏpo', tided ; N. m. f. doKtpoy, n. ôo«cipoi^.
ôtKuto-, ßu<TLX€io-, and a few others, are declined sometimes with
three, sometimes with two, terminations.
147. Adjectives in to and oo undergo contraction (§ 33) ; ojf
is contracted into rj, oa into 5 ;t the compounds of voo-, viind ;
poo- stream ; ttXoo-, voyage, are not contracted in the N. and A.
of the plural neuter.
148.
;(pva€o-,J m. n. ; xpv<rsar, f.
golden.
Maso. Fem. Neut.
1
apyvpeo-, m. n.; apyvpea-, f.j
of silver. 1
Mose. Fem. Neut.
Sing.
A^om.
Gen.
Xpvo-eos xP^^^^
Xpí'oovs xP^^l
Xpvoeov xP^^^^^
Xpvoov XP^®"*?^ XP^®"®®
etc. etc. etc.
apyvpeos apyvpeä apyopeoi'
apyvpovs apyvpä apyvpow
apyvpfov apyijpeds apyvpeov
apyvpov apyijpäs apyvpov
eta etc. etc.
Plural.
Nom.
\
1
Xpvor€ot xP®®"^®* xP®®"^®
Xpyooi xp®®"®* XP®®"®
etc. etc. etc.
apyvpeoi apyvpecu apyvpeä
apyvpoi apyvpai apyiîpô
etc. eta etc.
* On oXXo for oXXov, see § 191.
t These contractions shonJd perhaps be referred to sister-forms in tn
CO, such as the Ionic InrXtri. etc.
i Sometimes xpv<'tc~> ^th v, in lyrical passages.
ADJECTIVES. 51
áírXoo-, m. n. ; ÓTrXoa-, f.
simple.
Mase, Fem, Nexit,
cvpoo-, m. f. n.
welí-affected.
Mase. Fem, Neut,
Sing.
Nom.
árrXoor áriKorj áirhoov
ânXovç ¿ttXi; ¿ttXouj'
etc. etc. etc.
evvooç €VPOov
€VVOVS €VUOVP
etc. etc.
Plural.
Nam.
áirXooi áTrXoai cTrXoa
dTrXot âjrXai áirXá
etc. etc. etc.
€VPoot evpoa
evpoi
etc. etc.
149. So are declined of copper^ hrasen; abiKcpidco-,
brother*s or sister^s (son or daughter); 7ro/j<^i;peo-, purple; ôîttXoo-,
double^ etc. : like evvoo- are declined ävoo-, foolish ; wepippoo-,
surrotcnded by water ; ottXoo-, unfit for sea; and some others.
150. A few adjectives in <0 are declined after the so-called
Attic declension (§ 131): as,'tXeo)-, m. f. n. propitious; TrXea)-^
m. n. ; ttXço-, í.ful^L* Of and o-wo-, safe, only forms of the
N. and A. sing, and plur. are found, and these not complete in
aU the genders.
*îX€û)-, m. f. n.
TrXfö-,
m. n. ; TrXta-, f.
propitious.
w
full.
»
Mase. ácFem.
Neut.
Maso,
Fem,
Beut,
Singular.
Nom,
'rXecor
*IX€<ÙV
irXtcùç
îrXfâ
nXetùv
Voc,
TXecüff
TXéû)!'
nXfú)s
TrXfâ
TlX^ijiiV
ÂCC,
'rX£o)v
TrXecùp
TrXiât»
TíXetíiv
Gen,
^tXco)
TXfû)
îrXeo)
TrXeâî
nXeiù
J)at.
A
^rXeci)
4
*rx€w
TrXfû)
TrXeçr
TiXecp
Dual.
N, V, Ä.
*rxc<0
*TX€(Ù
TrXfcù
îrXfâ
TrXfo»
G, B.
iXfùyp
«
*IX€<ÙP
4
7rXi<ûv
TrXíatí'
7TX€<ÙV
4
Plural.
Nom,
TXeci)
TXeâ
wXetù
irXfatt
TrXeâ
Voc.
rXfú)
TXfä
V
TTXCÛ)
TrXfoi
TrXfrt
Acc,
'rXfcûç
*rXfö
4
7rXfû)s
TrXcâr
TrXfâ
Gen,
*rXeü)f
*IX€(ÙV
TrXecùP
nXffùP
TrXefûP
Bat,
'rXf(j)í
*ÏX€<t)S
7rXf<pç
9rX¿atr
7rX€(ps
• Also IXo'o* and írXfo-, Ion. a-Xcto-« • f Or, ir\eç.
AwncnvES
Some compound adjectives of this declension also make ilie
A» S* mase» in u^«
1Ó1. Adjectives in v are declined like those substantives in v
in which V passes into « (§ 100), except that the gen. sing, ends
in or, not o>r, and that contraction does not take place in the
neut. pi. The feminine of these adjectives is formed by the
addition of -tu to the altered crude form ; a is not lengthened in
the N. and A sing. (§ 119, (8)).
i7$ü-, m. n. ; f. ^.
sweet, pleasant,
Masc, Fem, Neut,
Singular.
Nom,
Voc.
Acc.
Gen,
Dot.
T)övs fjofta rfOv
■^èv ^Sftâ i7du
^àvv ^d€tâv ^ôv
riè€OÇ Tjàeiâs
Tfbfi
Dual.
N. V, A.
0,D.
rjèf€ rjèeiâ Tfbce
^àfoiv fjèfiaiv ^b€Oiv
PluraL
Nom,
Yog,
Acc,
Gen,
Dot.
^b€iç Tjàetai
^àfis Tfèeiai
Tjàetâs
T)b€<ûV ffd€lCiV f)hf<ùV
r}h€o-X{y) ribeiais r)b€aï{v)
loi.* So are declined ßä$v-, deep; ßapv-, hewoy; yXiîicv-,«rec/;
€vpv-f broad; swift,
152. Adjectives and participles in avr^ ovr, vvr, and are
declined like substantives in vr (§ 74*), The feminine is formed
by the addition of <ra to the masc. crude form ; awo-o-, oiro-o-,
ui^íra-, become <T(ra-, outra-, vera- €vr<Ta- becomes eo'O'a- m adjec¬
tives, 6io-a- in participles. In the N. and A sing., a of the fein,
remains short (§ 119 (2)).
ADJECTIVES. 53
\
irai/T-,
m. n. ; Trârra-, f.
Xvaavr',
m. D. ; XtJo'âo'a-, f.
w
ail.
havina loosened.
Mase,
Fem,
Nevt
Mase,
Fem,
Neut.
Sing.
Norn.
iras
nâaa
nâv*
Xvaäs
\va'äaä
Xvaâv
Voc.
Tràç
nâaa
nâv
Xvcrár
Xvaâaà
\vaàv
Acc,
iravra
nâaâv
nâv
Xvrrai^a
Xvaäeräv
Xvadv
Gen,
wavros
nä<rqs
navros
Xû(rain*or
\v<rä(rr)s
Xvaavrov
Dot,
Travrï
naarj
navrî
Xutrai/ri
Xvaâag
XvaavrX
Dual.
K V, A,
7ravT€
nàeà
navre
XiJ<7aw€
Xvaäaä
Xvaavre
G,D.
irapToiv
nâcraiv
navroiv
Xvaavroiv
Xvadaaiv
Xvaavroiv
Plural.
Nom,
7ravTۍ
nàaai
navra
\v(Tavr€s
Kvaäaai
Xvaavra
Voc,
navres
nâaai
navra
Xvaavres
Xvaäaai
Xvaavra
Acc.
navras
nàaâs
navra
Xvcravras
Xvo-äträs
Xvaavra
Gen,
navr<ûv
nàaoav
navro>v
Xvaavrcav
Xvaào'fùv
Xvaavriûv
Dot,
nàaXiy)
ndcais
nàa'X{v)
\va'à0'X(y) \va'äaais
Xû(râtri(i')
Xvovr-y
m. n. ; Xvovca-. f.
àovr-.
m. n. : 5ov(ra-, f.
loosening.^
having given,f
Mase,
Fem.
NeiU,
Mase,
Fem,
Neut.
Sing.
Nom,
Xv(ùV
Xvovad
Xvov
ôovs
àovaà
dov
Voc,
Xv<t>v
Xvoi/cra
Xvov
dovr
àovaa
àov
Acc,
Xuovra
XvQvadv
Xvov
Ôoin*a
àovadv
àov
Gen.
XvoiTor
XvovtrrfS
Xvovros
Ôoi^oç
àov<n)s
àovros
Bat,
Xvof/Ti
Xvovarj
XvovrX
àovrX.
àovarj
dovrX
Dual
N, V, A.
Xvovre
Xvovad
Xifovre
àovre
Sovad
àovre
G,B.
Xvovrotv
X uou<raii'
Xvovrotv
Bovroiv
àovaaiv
ôovroiv
Plural.
Norn.
Xvovres
Xvot;(ra(
Xvovra
àovres
àovaai
àovrd
Voc.
X vovres
Xvoucai
Xvovrd
àovres
àovarat
àovrd
Acc,
Xvovras
Xvovads
Xvovrd
àovrds
èovaàs
àovrà
Gen,
Xvovrav
Xvovcrcùv
Xvovrcùv
èovrtùv
àovciùv
àovrtùv
Dat,
Xvova-X^v)
Xvovaais Xvpva'X{v)
àovo'X{v) àovŒais
Öovo't(v)
* â in the monosyllable irâvi the compounds ^airavr- and trpotravT-
have, regularly, *âwàv and irponav in N. and A. neut. sing.
t Ali participles in ovr are declined like Xv-ovr- ; yvo-j/r-, «Jo-vr-,
<5tío-vr-, and ¿iXo-vr-, participles in vr from crude forms in o iyvo^,
know; do'^give; and 'aXo-,ie caphired), are declined like § 76,H.*
54
ADJECriVEB.
(
á
1 ^
1
\
»
detKwvT-, m. n. ; deno^o'a-, f* shewing.
Masc. Fern. NetU.
Singular.
iTowi.
Voc.
Jcc.
Oen,
Dai,
beiKvvs d€iKVv<ra detKvvv
àfiKVVS dflKVVaâ àftKPVV
BeiKwvrä Ôeticvvaàv à€iKvvv
èflKWVTOS deiKlñfOTfS èetKWVTOÇ
bfiKwvrï deiKvvayf ^eucwvrï
Dual.
N, V, A,
0. D,
BtiKWVTe beiKifvad èeiKtnnrre
àeiKyvPTOiu detKiwaatv èeiKyvvroii^
Plural.
I^om,
Voc,
Acc.
Gen,
Dat.
dfiKWtrres B€iKVV(rai BeiKWirrd
è(iKwvT€ç à€iKvv<rai dfiKyvvrà
èfiKJWVTas BeiKVVíxds BeiKWPra
deiKWVTfúv d€iKyvo'(ùv àeiKwyrcùV
detKvvaï^v) déiKvvaais d€iKvvaï{p)
»
\
•
xàpKPT'f m. n. ; xdpieaaa-, f. gracef ul.
Mase. Fem. Neut.
Singular.
Nam.
Voc.
Acc.
Gen.
1 Dai.
)(âpt€iç xl^pieaeä
Xàpifv ;(apte(T<7a ;^apífi'
Xàpievrâ x^ptfo-trai/
Xdpi€VToç ;(aptíírín;5 ;^aptíi/TOf
XapiftrrX ;^apt60'<777 ;^api€ï^ï
Dual.
N. V. A.
G.D.
Xdpi€VT€ ;^apt€<TO'â ;(api€VTe
XàpL€UTOiv ;^apt€<r(raii' ;^âptevToti'
Plural.
Nom.
Voc.
Acc.
Gen.
Dai.
Xdpi€VT(s ;^api€<7<7'at ;(apiii/ra
Xàpt€PT€ç ;^ap¿€(r(rat ;^api€ï/Ta
Xapupraç ;(aptf(ro*âs ;^api€M*a
Xàpi€VT<ùv p(apt€(r(7C4)i/ ;çapui^û)v
Xàpi€aai{v) ;^apte(r(Taiç
ê
AÍMECTIYES
65
ypa^€irr-f m. n, ; ypaifxta-a", Î. having been written,
Maec, Fern, Neuf,
Singular,
Nom,
Voc.
Ácc.
Gen,
Dot,
ypa<j>€iç ypaifxia-a ypà<pfv
ypà^eiç ypafheiträ ypä(l)ev
ypa(j)€VTa ypâ(p€i(ràv ypà<f>€v
ypä<f>€VTos ypà<l)€i<rT)i ypäipevros
ypà(f>emi ypâ^pearr) ypâ^€VTÏ
Dual.
N. r. A,
G,D,
ypà<p€VTe ypa(f>€t<râ ypa<}>€PT€
ypâ<p€irroaf ypà(pçi<Taiv ypâiptvToiv
Plural.
Nom,
Voc,
Acc.
Gen,
j Dot,
ypâipfpre^* ypa(f>€tcrai ypa(f>çvTâ
ypâ(f)€VT€ii ypä(f)€i(rai ypàcpeyrà
ypa(j)fVTas ypaipeia-âç ypacfxvra
ypä(f>€PTCiv ypaipetiTQiV ypafpevTfûv
ypä<p€i(rX{v) ypà<p€i<TaiS ypà(f>€i<TÏ(p)
153, Perfect participles in or form the nom. mase. sing, by a
change of the short vowel into w ; r becomes ç, both in the masc.
and neut. (§§ 55, 69). The crude form of the feminine ends
in Via,
1
«
\(\vKOT- m. n, ; XcXiÎKuia-, f. having loosened.
Masc, Fem, Neut.
Singular,
Nom,
Voc.
Acc,
Gen,
Dot.
\t\vK<ùÇ XAvKuta XcXvKOÇ
\e\vK<âis XeXvKvia XCXvkoî
XíXiíicora XfXuKUtäi/ \e\vKos
heXvKorof XeXvKVcás XeXvKoroç
XcXiÍKOTt XcXíÍKuia XeXvKorï
Dual
N. V, A,
G, D,
XfXvicore XeXvKutâ XeXvicore
XeXuicoroti' XeXv/cvirtif XfXvKoroii' j
Plural.
Nom,
Voc,
Acc.
Gen,
Dot,
4
\e\vKOTis heXvKviai XeXv/cora
\(\vKOT€S X€XvKviai XfXvKora
XfA'^/coras XfXvKviäs XeXvxoTa
XeXvKOTiûV X€XvKVl<úV X€XvKOT<ûU
XeXvKoo'{(y) X Xvfívíaís' XeXvxo(rï(p) ¡
'
ADJECTIVBÄ
154. Adjectives in av, €Vy are declined regularly : the crude
form of the fcin. ends in otvo, €iva (for ana, «vto, § '15)*
r
4
fiiKaif, m. u. ; fif\aiva-y f.
black.
Mase, Fem, Neut,
1
Tfpep-, m. n. ; repetpa'y f.
tender.
Mase, Fem, Neut,
Sing.
Nom»
Voc»
Âcc.
Gen*
Dai,
fjLfXâç fi€\aivä /icXdr
/ufXâr /AcXairâ ^fXâr
fifXâvà fieXcuvâtf ficXàv
fuXàvos fieX^ttvrjs fieXàvos
fifXàvï ficXaitnf /xcXâri
tepr¡p Tfpfipà Ttptp
T€p€P T€p€tpâ r«p€P
T€p€pä repeipâv rep^v
T€p€Pos r€p€iPTjs repepoç
T€p€PÏ T€p€lPJJ T(p€PÏ '
Dual.
N, V, Á,
Q.D,
fieXâue fieXatvä fieXàve
fifXapoiv fÂ^Xaivaiv fieXàvoiv
T€p€Pe repeipâ rf^eré
T€p€POlP TCp€iPatP T€p€POiP
1 Plural.
Nom,
Voc.
Ácc,
Gen,
Dat,
fieXâpes fAfXaipat fi€Xâpâ
fÀeXàpfs fieXaipai fieXapà
fieXàpàs fX€Xaipâç fieXapâ
fi€Xàpap fieXaiPup fieXapotu
fji€Xàai(p) ficXaipaiç ficXà<rt{p}
T€p€P€S T€p€lPat T€pfpà
Tfp(P€s repeipai repfpâ
T€p€Päs T€p€tpäs T€p€Pä
T€p(P<úP TfpeiPfùP T€p€Pa>P
T€p€crï{p} T€p€ipats rtp€<rï{p)
So is declined raXai^-, m. n.; râXacra-, f.wretc/ied. Homer some¬
times has ToXâs in the vocative.
155. Adjectives in ov have no distinct form for the feminine .
they are declined like substantives in or. In some words v is
omitted, and contraction ensues.
1
cdX^pop-f m. f. n.
so undr-minded,
Masc.dsFem. NeiU,
p(i(op-f m. f. n.
greater.
Mase, de Fem. Neut*
Sing.
Nom,
Voc.
Acc,
Gen,
Dai,
<r<û<l>p<ûp cítxppop
(TOX^por (TíúíPpOP
a'^<l>popà a<û<f>pop
a<û(f>povos <r<ù(j>popot
a-<ù<f>popï a<ù(f>popX
p€l(cùP p€i{ov
pctÇoP P'€l(oV
pei^opâ & p^dCop
pet^opos p(i(opos
p€i^opX p(i(opX
Dual.
N, V, A,
G.D,
aùxjypopc 0(ù(f>poP€
aaxPpopoiP CTùXppovoiP
pfi¡op€ pfi^ope
pei^opoip pei^opoip
Plural.
Nom,
Voc,
Acc,
Gen,
Dai.
(T<û(}>pOP€S O'<ù(f>p0pâ
cùiifypopes Cùiifipopâ
a<û(ppopâs a'<ô(f)popâ
ciûfppopfûP a<ú<f>pop<úP
a(ù^po<rï{p) <r<ù(f>poa-X{p)
p€í¿OP€f & pfi^OVÇ p(l{^0pä & p€l(4»
pft^opts & p€i(ovç p€i¿bra & pu{<a
pfi^opàs & pa^ovs pei^opâ & pci¿ú*
p€i(op<ùP pii(op<ùP
pet,(o<TX(p) pfi(oat{p)
ADJECnVBS ¿7
156. Like aaippop- are declined a<l>pov-, seTiadess ; tvBaipop-,
fortunate ; rnercifvl^ and many others. Like pu^ov^ are
declined apuvov-, bitter ; KaWtov-, more heoAttijul ; ^rrov-f less^
and some other comparatives.
157. Adjectives in ea- (m. £ n.), a very numerous class, and
frequently formed from substantives in ےt (neut.), are declined
like those substantives, except that is is not changed into os in •
the N. S. of the neuter (§§ 84, 90).
e
oXijdeo--,
m. f. n. true.
1
1
1
ifosc. é Fem,
Neut.
Singular.
Nom,
Voc.
Acc,
Gen,
Dot,
ä\r)ör]5
àXrfÔiç
(âXndea)
(aXïj^eos)
(ahrjêi'i)
oKtjÙtj
àXrjôovs
àXrjêii.
aXrjOis
aXijOis
à\7]Ô€S
{aXrjêioç)
{aktfôeï)
1
aXf;dovr
aXrjOii
Dual.
N. V, A,
G, D,
{oKrjôfi}
(a\tj6(oiv)
aXrjôrj
àXr)ôoiP
(aXrjêii)
{á\r¡6ioi.p)
àXrjÔrj
àXrjôoiP
Plural.
Nom,
Voc,
Acc,
Gen,
Dot,
(aXïjdeep)
(aX*?Öeer)
(aX7;ôeâs)
(aXijöewi/)
aXr)Ô€0-ï{p)
âXijdecr
â\r)Ô€is
àXijOiis
aXrjùiàp
(oXi^dea)
(aXi;dea)
{aXTjOià)
{âXrjÔKùp)
áXr¡$€(ri{p)
àXrjêrj
àXrjÔrj
àXrjOrj
àXi)Ô<ùP
Adjectives in eeo- contract la of the A sing, and N. A. neut.
pi. into 5, not tj : as, crôfâ for ci/Setâ, from ipèiia-, needy. In
■words ending in uxr or veo- both contractions are used : as,
*vyiâ and 'vyirjj from 'vyteo--, healthy ; ev0vä and evc^v^, from
€v<l>via-, weU-yrowny of good parte,
158. So are declined a^pî^eo--, accurate ; apeXeo--, careless ;
aabiveo"', weak ; eyKpareo*-, strong ; evyereo-, well-horn ; evo-e/Seo-,
pious ; o-a^eo--, clear ; 'vyteo--, healthy. On the declension of
proper names compounded of yereo--, hirth ; Kpareo--, power ;
o-deveo--, strengthy etc., see § 85.
159. The above are the pnnoipal classes of adjectives. Many
single adjectives, chiefly oorapouuds, of various xcrmiuatious, '
ADJECTIVES.
are declined like noiiua of the separable (third) declension!
thus, '
âirarop-, f<xtheHe$$ ; N. S. m. f. atrarcúp, n. oTrarop.
A, S. anaropa anaropy etc.
fviKntà', full of hope ; N. S. m. f. €V€\'rris n. cveXiri, etc.
I Î ^tXoTToXir, n. <pï\o7ro\ï.
G. S. m. f. n. <j>ï\o7ro\ïbos & <f>i\o7rdK«û9f
làpi-, sMlfid ; K S. m. f. tàpïs, n. idpt
G. S. m. f. n. lèpios & tbpeas (§ 97).
160. Xlany adjectives, either from their form or meaning,
admit of no special form for the neuter : as, tjXÍk-, in one's prime-,
ápiray-y rapacious ; pcùvvxrt solid-hoofed ; ayvcöT-, unknown ;
aèprfT-, untamed ; unwearied ; yvpvrjT-, light-armed ;
f¡pióv7]T-y half-dead ; nevrjT-y poor ; àpdKKÏà-y cowardly ; anaib-f
childless ; aiB<op-, fashing ; paKpoxeip-, long-handed. These are
all declined regularly : thus, N. S. m. f. ápTra^y mprjsy paKpo\€ípy
etc. Some of these words are accompanied by collateral forms
which admit of a neuter : as, aèprjTo-, N. S. m, f. abprjToçy n. aàprj-
TOP, Similarly are found p<ùPvxo-y ayrwro- or aypoxrro-, aKprfTc,
and others.*
161. Adjectives compounded of îtoÔ-, foot, take an anomalous
neuter nom. and acc. in -ovp : thus, ottoS-, 'mthout feet ; rptTroÖ-,
having three feet ; rerpaîroS-, having four feety are declined N. S.
m, f. anovsy n, ottow, etc.
162. Some adjectives ending in a suffix exclusively masculine,
are for the most part only of the masc. gender : thus, côeXopra-y
voluntary ;t vßpiara-y violent ; vetpeXrjyepera- (poet.) cloud-collect-
ingy have no feminine. Similarly T)pXy€p€ta- (poet.), early-horiiy
has no masc.
163. The adjectives peya- and peyaXo-, great ^ ttoXi/- and ttoXXo-,
mucky many J irpàv- and irpäo-, mildy are declined partly from
one crude form, partly from the other.
* Yet the consonant-forms are sometimes found as neuter, at all
events in the gen. and dat.: as, ap<j>irpr)Toç avXiov, Soph. Phil. 19^
ey pecoic ßoroig <7Ï$ï}po<ptj<nyy Aj. 325.
•f iiut t9e\ovT7¡v avTijv occurs in Herod, i. 5.
I
ABJîflcnvES.- • 59
*
0
ficya- and /ieydXo-, na. n. *,
^eyaXa-, f, great.
Mase. Fem. NevZ.
!
TToXv- and TToXXo-, m. n. ;
TToXXa-, f. muck, many.
j/ttsc. Fem. Neut.
Sing.
Nom.
Voc.
Acc.
Gen,
Dat.
fX€yas fXtyâXrf fjLsyä
fi€yä fxeyâXrj fi€yä
^eyäv fjL€yà\r)V geyà
/icyâXov g.€yà\rjs fX€yä\ov
fi€yâX<ù fjLfyäXrf fX€yàX<ù
TToXvf TToXXîJ TToXl»
TToXv 1 TToXXï) TToXv
TTOXVV TTOXXTJV TTOXV
TToXXoV TToXXrfS TToXXoU
ÎToXXw TToXXrj TToXXö
Dual.
lY. V. A.
O.D.
fieyaXíú fieyuXä fjifyaXo)
fifyàXoiP fieyàXaiv /xeyaXoty
7T0XX(ù TToXXà TToXXo)
TToXXoiv iroXXaiv iroXXoiv
Plural.
Nom.
Voc.
Acc.
Gen.
Dat.
fxeyaXoi fieyàXai fieyàXa
jiifyâXot /xeyâXat fieyàXa
fieyaXovs fxeyäXäs fieyaXà
fi€yàX<ûv fxeyàXcùP fxçyâXcov
fjLcyâXois ficyâXais fieyàXois
îToXXoi iroXXai TroXXâ
TToXXoi noXXai ttoXXo
TToXXûVff TToXXds TToXXa
iroXX<ÛV TToXXiùV TToXXú)!'
TToXXois TToXXaiç iToXXoiç
1
V
TTpào' and TTpâV', m. n. ; Trpâeia-, f. mild.
Mase. Fem. Neut.
Sing.
Nom.
Voc.
Acc.
Gen.
Dat.
TTpâos 7rpä€iä npaov or jrpäv
TTpäe TTpäiia jrpäov
TTpäov TTpäeiav ^ npäop
irpäov irpäeiäs Trpäov
rrpäcü npätia rrpâ(a
Dual.
N. V. A.
G. D.
7rpâ<ù TTpàfià npâ<û
TTpâoiP TTpàiiaiP TTpâoiP
Plural.
Nom.
Voc.
Acc.
Gen.
Dat.
1
Trpâets or irpñot Trpâeiai Tipàfd.
7rp(Í€is or TTpâoi Trpàeiat Trpâea
npñovs npñfiás Trpäed
7rpâ€<ùP TTpâcKùP TTpàfKûP
7rpa€(rL(y) or irpdofç irpà^iais 7r/>âé(rt(v) or irpâoiv j
CO ABJECnVBS.
Comparison of Adjectives.
164. The most frequently used sufiix for the comparative
degree of adjectives is -Tipo (m. n. -ripa, f.), and for the superla¬
tive -raro (m. n. -rara, f.).
165. These suffixes are added to the crude form of the simple
adjective ; but crude forms in o lengthen o into a>, if the sylla¬
ble preceding be short.
Positive. Comparative. Superlative.
Kov<l}0'f ligJU ; Kov<poT€po^, lighter ; #cov<^oraTo-, lightest.
irwcpo-, hitter ; TrtKporepo-, bitterer ; TriicporaTo-, bitterest.
aoifiO', wise ; co^wTipo-, wiser ; o-o^coraro-, wisest.
«
yXí»icv-, sweet ; yXvicvrcpo-, sweeter ; yXv*vraro-, sweetest.
peXai^*, black ; peKavrepo-y blacker ; peXairâro-, blackest.
paKap'y blessed', paKoprepo-, more blessed ; paKapraro^, most blessed,
«rac^io"-, clear ; ca^corfpo-, clearer ; ira^ioraro-, clearest.
;^apt«T-, \apif<TT€pO'', more grace^ ^apteararo',most grace*
graceful ; ful ; (for yapievr-repo-, § 37) fvd.
d;(apiT-, UTir äx^pKTTspo-, mOTC ungrocC" axapiararo', most WOr
graceful. ful ; (for a^aptT-ripo-) graceful ;
166. Tipaio-, agedt îroXato-, ancient; and o';^oX<uo-, leisurely,
omit o before these endings—yspairspo~, rroKaiTepo-, a-xoXairaro*;
but from TraXaio- and o-^oXaio- the fuller forms are sometimes
%
found. On the other hand, petro-, in the midst ; "«ro-, equal ;
€vbio-, calm ; îrpwto-, early ; oyj^to-, late ; 7rXi70"io-, Tiear, substitute
at for o or a> in the comparative and superlative : as, pea-airtpo-,'
TTpaHairäro', etc.;—quiet, has both ^<rv;^atT€po- and qirvx<^
Tipo-*;—<l>X\o-, (fear, has <pX\o>T€po-(-TaTo-), <f>X\airfpa-^-TaTo-), and
{jyiKTepo^Taro*) : also <^lXtoI^•, (^iXioro- (§ 169). From peao* was
also formed p€a-aTo-, in the midst, originally a superlative : in
like manner veâpo-, youthful, and veâro-, last, must be regarded
as originally comparative and superlative from vio-, young, new.
* These forms in airipo, airaro, were perhaps originally adverbial
comparatives and superlatives, made from such adverbs as vaXat, mpq,
<sxo\y. from which, in like manner, the adjectives woXoio-,
rrspaio*, hevxaio*, o^oXato-, were derived. Exactly in the same way
must pvxoiraro', in the remotest corner, be regarded as formed from
pvxoii in the corner, an adverbial dative from pw^o-. SeeAhrens, G. G.
§§112.9, 212.4.
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIV
0
61
€v3a(/ioi^j prosperous ;
167. In some adjectives the syllable «r is inserted between
tiiese suffixes and the root : this takes place,
a. With words in ov : as,
o-o><f>pov-, sound-minded ; Comp, o-ox^poi'foTcpo- ; Sup. tra>^/>o-
[vforaTo-.
€vàaifiOP€fTT€po^ f svdai"
[fxovsararo-.
But TTiov^f faty has morspo- ; and ttcttoi^-, ripe, Trewairepo-.
h. With the words aKpàro-, unmixed ; €pp<úpevo-, strong ; and
some others, which make aKparsirrepO', €ppa>fi€Pfa'r€po-, etc.
168. The words XâXo-, talkative ; tttojxo-i beggarly ; o^o</>ayo-,
dainty; and a few others, take 'larepo, -ioraro : as, XäXta-Tspo-,
7rra>xiOTaTO-, etc.
169. The second, and less frequent, suffix for the comparative
of adjectives is -top (t for the most part in the older language,
r in Attic), and for the superlative -toro : the final vowel of the
crude form is rejected before u These suffixes are chiefly found
in connection with adjectives in v.
Fos. Comp.
^6-u-, sweet ; f¡hiop-, sweeter ;
Tax-u-, swift ; Baeraov-, swifter ;
(for raxtop', § 45 )
pti^op-, greater ;
(for fifytov-, § 45)
These comparatives are declined like other adjectives in op (§ 155).
170. Very frequently comparatives and superlatives in Iqp,
toTo, are found in connection with positives of a somewhat dif¬
ferent crude form, or even containing an entirely different root :
thus,
Comparative.
aiaxlov-,
(also aío-xporepo-,
(also €X^pOT€pO-,
fiaaaop-,
(also p,äKpOT€pO-,
fífiOP-,
(also fiÏKpoTepo-,
/ícy-a-, great ;
Sup.
{¡àiaro-, sweetest.
räxtoTo-, swiftest,
ptyiaro-, greatest.
Positive,
ataxp^f shameful ;
exBpo-, hostile ;
' gaKpc, long ;
/utKpo-, little Î
Superlative.
atcxtOTo-.
GwrxporaTO-).
€X^*<rTo-.
tx^ parara-).
p.r\Kiaro-{or fxÔK-)
fiäKporäro-).
oíKrpo-, pitiable \
(also otKTporspo-,
fiiKporaro-).
oiKTiaro-.
oucrporaro-).
62
adjectives.
PoHttce.
aKy€ivo~^ painftil y
icaXo-, hemtiful ;
oXïyo- (íXaxv-),/«^ ;
yoXv-, much^ many ;
podio-, ea$y \
Comparative.
aXy^oí^•,
KoXXioi^-,
tfXaoro'Oi'-,
TrXftoi^-,
pool/-,
i^perlative.
oXyioTO-.
KoXXtOTO-.
eXa;^tOTo-.
(also oXiyiOTO-).
TrXfioTo-.
pooro-.
171. Many of these forms are connected with neuter substan¬
tives in ea : compare ato-xftr-, shame ; hatred ; prjKta-,
length ; oXyetr-, pain ; icaXXfo*-, heavty ; raxco-, swiftness. Again,
the verbs aiaxyv^^ shame ; prjKvv'y lengthen ; oKyvv-y pain^ etc.,
render probable the former existence of adjectives in v.
172. In connection with äyado-, brave, good, the following com-
pamtives and superlatives occur ;—
Comp.
àpctvov-,
apctov^ (Epic),
ß^Xrlov-,
Kp€icr<rop- (KpeiTTOi^-),
\a>'iov, Xwoi/ (poet,),
<f>€pT€pO' (poet,).
iSup.
apioTO'.
/SeXrioTo-,
KpärKTTO' {KpaT€(T', Strength),
XûXTTO-.
^epraro-, (jxpiaTO" (poet.).
173. In connection with kqko-, cowardly, had, the following
comparatives and superlatives are found :—
Comp.
KaKÍoV-,
X^puv- (xepfiov-, Ep.),
r¡(T(rov- (for rjKiov-),
Sap.
KaKlGTO-,
X€lpi<TTO-.
TJKIOTO-,
174. The following words are more or less defective :
Pos.
(e|, out of,)
Çvnep, over,)
{irpo, before^
Comp.
varepo-', later ;
'uTTfprfpo-, higher ;
TTpoTcpo-, former ;
Sup.
vararo-, latest.
eo^xaTo-, farthest.
*^viT€pTaTo- &'vTrâro-, h ighest,
npdiro-, first.
* Homer has a defective adjective—A, sing. D. PI- I'i-
X^po^Çt inferior, witli which these words are doubtiess counecîc î
63
I
ADVERBS FROM ADJECTIVES.
17j. Adverbs are formed from adjectives by the addition of
the suffix -m to the crude form : as, temperate^ <r<ú(l)po~
vwr, temperatelp ; ttoit-, all, TravToas, in all %oays,
176. The final vowel of adjectives in o disappears entirely
before the adverbial suffix : 0-0(^0-, wise, a-o(f><ûs, wisely ;
c<M, i/zvxpwî, coldly.
177. Words in v and co- are modified in the same way as in
the gen, sing, of the adjective : (ra<j>€cr', clear, c-a(j)<ú9 (a-a<f>€a>s),
clearly; but ràxv-, quick, quickly^ without contraction.
178. Very frequently the acc. neut. both of the singular and
the plural takes the place of the adverbial form : as, ra^v,
quickly; eu (Epic ei)), well, originally the neuter acc. sing, of an
adjective cv- or rjv-, noble, good.
179. Another form of the adverb is in a : as, raxà (from Tax-v-)j
quickly, perhaps ; 'apa, at the same time (from the obsolete 'âpo-,
one, some, whence 'àptùs, etc.) ; paXa, very. To pa\a belong the
comparative pdhXov {potius), and the superlative paXtoT-a {potis-
simum).
180. For the adverb of the comparative the neuter acc. sing/
of the adjective is employed, and for the adverb of the superla¬
tive the neuter acc, plur. of the adjective : as, crorjxúrepov, more
wisely ; KaWTov, more beautifully ; <To(})(ùTârâ, most wisely ; koK-
Xtora, most beautifully. Adverbs in wr are, however, sometimes
formed from comparative and superlative adjectives : /caXXtovws,
more beautifully.
»
181. The adverb ovT<as, thus (from touto-, this), loses the final
s before a consonant. The following adverbs, derived from pre¬
positions, have entirely lost the s : ava, upwards, from ava, up ;
jcaro), downwards, from Kara, down ; ^o-o), within, from €s or ctç,
into ; €¿0), without, from out of ; also the comparatives av(ù~
T€p<û, KaT6)T6pú), otc. Similarly are found ajrcoTtpca (from airo,
from), more remotely ; Cor eyyurfpoi/), more nearly ; and
íyyÍTaTo) (or ef^urard), most nearly, from tyyv-, near ; and a few
othei*».*
4
m
PRONOUNa
The persoctai pronouns are,—
First Person.
L me.
Sbcond Person.
thou, you.
Third Pü-rson.
him, her, it
Singular.
^om.
Acc,
Gen.
Bat.
€y<û
€ft€, fl€
€fAOV, pOV
€ftOl, flOi
Sé
(TV
o-e
(TOV
aoi
ov
t
01
Dual
N.Ä.
G.B.
\ '
(v6>ï) v<a
(vOHv) V(^P
(<r<f>u)i) <r(f><ú
{(Ttfxúiv)
(<T<f>àif)
{a<f>(ûtv)
PluraL
Nom.
Ace,
Gen.
Bat.
«
1
rmàç
! í/**"
1
*Vfl€lÇ
*VfJ,<úV
'vp.lv
<r<f>€iç, TL (r<f>xa
<r<f>ä5, n. <y<f>€â
(r(p<úv
o-<pï<TÏ(y)
183. The crude forms in the singular are ffie- (Lat. ww-), o*«-
(L te-), and e- (L. se-). The nominatives eyw and <rv are anoma¬
lous, that of €- is wanting.
The crude forms in the dual are v*»- (L. nos), (L. vos),
and <r<f)ü>- : the dual of the 3rd person is not used in prose.
The crude forms in the plural are ijfie-, 'vfic-, and c- is
at once the personal pronoun of the 3rd pers. (L. eo-), and a
reflective pronoun. It is not of frequent use in Attic prose, the
cases of auro- (with the exception of the nominative) being used
instead in the former signification, and the compound eavro- in
the latter (§§192,194).
184 If there is no emphasis on the personal pronoun, its
forms are enclitic. In this case the shorter forms of the 1st
pers. are alone used : àoKet fxoi, it appears to rne ; but «/ioi ov ao»
Touro ap€aK€i, ü is to me, not to thee, that this is pleasing. When
the forms of the plural are enclitic, the final vowel in the aca
and dat. is sometimes shortened : ^ßäs, 'vfjXv, etc.
• Or, perhaps, rather iifxtr-, <r^ír-. On the primitive forms
of the personal pronouns, see a paper by Mr. Key, PkiL Soc, Trattx.
iv. p. 25.
PRONOUNS. 65
»
185. The original demonstrative pronoun of the Greek lan¬
guage was TO-, tkUj thoit. In the declension of this word, r of the
0. F. is softened into ' in the N. m. f. of the sing, and plur.; and
in the N. and A. n. sing, v is not added.
TO-, m. n. ra-, f. this, that ; the.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
Masc. Fern. Neut. Masc. Fern. Nevt. Mase. Fem. Neut.
Nom,
Acc,
Gen.
Dot,
>■
t <
0 tj TO
rov T7JV TO
TOV Tf)Ç TOV
T© TTJ
Tú» t5 Tû)
TO«' raiv Toiv
♦ 1
oi at Ta
TOVS Täs TO
T€ùU TCÙV
TOIS Tats TOIS
4
In Homer ro- retains its original demonstrative force : in
later Greek it was used as the English definite article the.
In Attic the feminine forms of the dual are seldom found,
rw, TO«', being used instead.
186. From the simple demonstrative, or article, to-, other
stronger demonstratives are formed : (1) To-ôe, this (Lat. Ao-), by ^
the addition of the enclitic demonstrative particle ; and (2)
TOVTO-, this, that (Lat. ho- or eo-), by reduplication. To-ôe is de¬
clined like the article. Tovto-, in like manner, softens r into the
aspirate in the N. m. f. sing, and plur., and rejects v in the N".
and A. n. sing. ; the diphthong of the first syllable is ov when the
vowel of the final syllable is o or «>, av when that vowel a or rj.
«
To-ôf, m.n.j To-ôf, f. this.
Masc. Fern. Neut.
TovTo-, m.n. ; ravra-, f. this,
that.
Masc. Fem, Neut.
Singular.
Nam.
Acc.
Gen.
Dot.
obe robe
Tovbe TJ^i^be Tobe
Tovbe Tijabe Tovbe
rtúbe ^Ijàe TCùbe
ovtos ovn/ tovto
tovtov Tavrrfv tovto
TOVTO V . TaVT7;ff TOVTOV
TOVTcj) ravrji tovt(ù
Dual.
N.A.
G.J).
TCùbe TÔbe TCibe
Toitfbe raeube TOtvbe
TOVTO» ravrä tovto»
rovTotv Tovraty rovrotv
Plural
Nom.
Acc.
Gen.
Dot.
oîôe aîÔc Tu§t
TOVO'Sc TOO'fic Tofie
Ttûvbe Ttûube Ttúvbe
TOtabe Tatabe Toiobe
ovroi avrai ravra
TovTovs ravrâç ravra
TOVTÍÚV TOVTOV TOVTOV
rOVTOlÇ TaVTOiÇ TOtfTOlf
0
F
66
4
FRONOtJlfrS.
aS/. From to-, this^ are derived, furtber, roíro-, so gretxty so
fnang (L. tanto-y tot); roto-, of,such a kind (L. talv-)"; and n;Xi*o-,
of such an age, so great; which are declined regularly (N. S»
ro<roçy roarj, too-op, etc.). In Attic prose, however, the forms
rotro-Ôe, roio-Bcy n;X«co-5e, which are declined regularly, and
TOíTOVrO-, TOIOVTO-, TJjXliPCOVTO- (N. TOCOVTOSy TOaaVTrj, TOaOVTO and
ToaovTou, etc.), are used instead of the simple forms.
188. The adverbs from to-, ro-ôe, and tovto-, are ¿>ç (earlier,
Tfiöf), (for aaàe), and ovrœs or ovTiùy in this mannsTy sOy thus.
The adverb ¿¡s (for Twy), tkuSy must not be confounded with ¿>Sy
hoWy as, the adverb of the relative pronoun : in accentuated
Greek these are distinguished (wr, ùts, thus; but ¿y, how, as),
189. Exetj/o-, that yonder (L. iUo-), is declined regularly, except
that it also rejects the final v in the N, and A n. sing. ;—
Sing. Nom, €K€ipos ^ksiptj skcipo
JÍCC, eKeiPOP €K€IPTJP €K€iPO
etc. etc. etc.
J? rom €K€ivo- is formed the adverb skcipcjs, in that way,
190. The forms of the demonstrative pronouns are often
strengthened by the addition of 1 : thus, ovroaï, ohl, €K€iv<ùvty
avrriiy roio-Öt^ etc. Compare in Latin, kosce, hisce, eta In Ionic
Greek, and in the poets, €K€ívo- is also found in the shorter form
kdvo-,
191. Avto-, self (L. ipso-), and oXXo-, other, are declined regu¬
larly, rejecting, however, v in the neut. sing.
avro-j m. n. ; aera-, f. self, oXXo-, m. n. ; aXXa-, f. other.
Mase, Fem, Neut, Mase, Fem, Neut,
Sing. Nom, avros avrrj avro oXXoî aXXi7 «XXo
Acc, avTop avTTjp avTo oXXoi' aWrjp oXXo
etc. etc. etc. etc. etc. etc.
192. The personal pronoims compounded with avro- give the
reflective pronoims ; they are declined as follows :—
Singular. Plural.
Acc, efiavTop, -tjp, myself y rjfiäs avrovs or avrây, ourselvcs,
Oen, efjLavTov, íJ/ícov avrwp,
etc. etc.
PROKOÜNS, 67
/
Singular. PIuraL
Acc* ftfavrov^ -»?*'> thyself^ vfxàç ovtovs or avraç^ yourselves
or irai'TOVf
Oen, a€avTov, -lys*, vficov avtíúVf
or aavTOVf -i;r,
etc. etc.
Acc, iavTovj -7}v^ -o, himself y heV" o-cftäs avrovs or avràç, themselves,
or avrovy -o, [self itself, and eavrou?, -ár, a,
or avTovs, -dr, -a,
catirov, -17?) -ov, (r<l><ûv avrcùVy
or a¿rov, -i]Çy -ov, and /avrcDi' or avT<0Vf
etc. etc.
193. Avto-, in connection with, and immediately following, the
article to-, signifies the same ; it is thus declined :—
Sing. Nom., o avros 17 avn; to avro
or avTof (ávTOí) avn) {avrrf)* tovto or tovtov
Gen, Tov avrov or tovtov, tt/ï avn/ç, tov avrov or tovtov, etc.
194. Avto- in all its cases, except the nominative, is also used
for the pronoun of the 3rd person, Äm, her, it, etc. In this sense
it is never placed at the beginning of the sentence.
195. From oXXo- is formed the reciprocal pronoun oXXt/Xo-,
each other; the N., of course, could not occur: it is thus de¬
clined :—
Dual. Plural.
Acc, (oXXi/Xo), -5, -©) aXXj;Xovr, -or, -a
Gen, aWrjkoiJ/y -aiVy -oiv aWrj\a>v
Dot. dKXrjXoiPy -aiPy -oiv aWrjXoií, -at?, -oty.l*
196. The possessive pronouns are derived from the personal,
and are declined like adjectives in o with three terminations
(§ 144).
* In accentuated Greek avrfj or àvrrjt whereas the nom. sing. fem. of
TovTO-, this, is avTT/: so ravrà (for ra aura), the same things, but ravra,
these things,
f This form appears to have arisen from a reduplication. Compare
the similar, though more extended, use of altero", alio-, repeated, in
Latin.
68
PRONOUNS
From €fi€' is made minef N. cfiosy ffxov.
<t€'
<ro-, thiney N. croÇf ^^9 <rov.
y-
CO- or Ó-, hisy heVy N. iosy iov
or or, ov.]
i/te-r-
ripercpO'y ouTy N. ^perepoÇy -pa, -pov.
*v/i€-r-
^vfierfpo-y your, N. *vpf rcpoj, -p5, -pov.
(T^cTepo-, theivy N. <r4>€tfpo^y -p5, -pov.
197. The possessive pronoun of the 3rd pers. (co-), is not used
in Attic prose ; for the simple possessive the genitive avrov
(ejus) is employed, and iavrov (avrov) for the reflective: thus,
Tov iràrfpà avrov, patrem ejus ; rov cavrov iraripa, patrem.
Similarly, ftov, aov (enclitic), fjp<ûVy v/i6>v, and avTcùv, are used for
the other possessive pronouns if unemphatic : thus, to» tpop
TTarepa, Tneum patrem ; but tov 'jrarepa ftov, patrem meum.
198. The relative pronoun is ó-, whoy whichy wliat. In the N.
and A. n. sing, v is dropped.
6-, m, n. ; à-, f. whoy whichy what,*
Singular. I)ual. Plural.
Masc. Fem. Neut. Mosa, Fem. Neut. Masc. Fern: Neut.
Nom,
Acc.
Gen.
Dat,
eft
0Í tf 0
* * t
ov rjv o
<• t ,
ov TiÇ OV
tit
9 d te
t « - c
(Ù a (Ù
olv alv olv
* f «W
01 at a
* C — C V
ovr as a
a>v 6>v ¿V
ois aU oís
199. The direct interrogative pronoim is tïv- ; who ? which f
what ? The indirect interrogative, compounded of rXv- and the
relative ó-, is ó-riv-. The forms of the direct interrogative, which
are then enclitic,t are also used for the indefinite pronoun, any,
some. In the declension of this word, v is dropped in the N.
and A neut. sing., and disappears before o- in the N. masc.
without compensation, contrary to the rule (§ 40). Compare,
also, the shorter forms given below,
* The forms of the nom. sing, and plur. of the relative are written in
accented Greek as follows: oç, 8; ot, at, a; they may thus be dis»
tinguished from the con'esponding cases of the article, ¿, )), ro; ot, at, ra,
where it will be observed that the identical forms have no accent.
f Enclitics are little words which are pronounced with, and as it were
Uan on (cyicXiv-, lean on) the word preceding. Hence, when written
with other words, they take no accent, except that disyllabic enclitics
are in certain cases accetited on the second syllable. Thus, while the
cases of the interrog. pronoun always have an accent and on the root-
syllable, those of the iiidef. generally have none: riçi rivai who? but
rte, rtva (sometimes nvá), some one.
è
PRONOUNS. 69
r
1
Ttp-y m. f. n. who ?
which f what ? ; any.
Maec, éFem. Neut.
o-rtf-, m. n. ; à-Tip-, £ who, etc. !
(indirect interrog.) ; whosoever.
Mase. Fem. Neut.
Singular.
Norn,
Acc,
Gen,
Dot,
V V
tis Tt
w M V
tipo Tt
TtWf tXpos
V V V
Tift Tlfl
f w C w f w
OOTlf i^tls 0 tl
<ww €ww ew
ofTtfa rjpTipa 0 Tt
ovrifoi qoTXpos ovTtfor
(ww <ww Cww
^ivi i;Tifi ^ift
Dual.
NA'
G.D'
tXp€ rXpe
tXpoip tXpoip
¿rtfe 'ÔTiff ¿ítXp€
oIptXpOIP OIPTXpOIP oipTlPOlP
PluraL
Nom,
Acc,
Gen,
Dot,
tXp€S Tlpa
V W WW
tipos Ttpa
tXpcíp tXvùhp
TiQÏiy) TÍ<Tt(l')
Cv tw <wwv
otrtff? aiTtP€S oTipa
f w w f w w Cv w w
ovortfof aortfoí arifa
¿hptXvcùp cîptXpîûp ¿)ptXpo>p
t ww/\ « wv/\ t V V/ \
ot<rrt<7t(f) aïo-Tio-i^f) otoTt<rt(f)
For TÏi/off, Tivï (both interrogative and indefinite), tou and
are often used, and arra for the neut, pliir. TÏvà (indef.) For
ovTipotf tûTtpiy oTov and ÔT<a are found ; and in the plural, less
frequently, 6r<ùVy QToi(ri{v)j for ¿apTtvoiVf otoTÍ(rt(i') : árra occurs for
'artva. To distinguish the neuter pronoun from the conjunction
ÓTt, hecattsCy that, the former is usually written ó tí, or ó,Tt.
200. Another indefinite pronoim is quidam ; it is some¬
times uninflected, more usually declined as follows, with the
article :—
Singular, N. ó, to bfiua* PluraL AT. oí beiveç,
A, tovy ttjvy to àdpà, A. tovs bfipos'
G» Tov, rr¡Sy TOW h^ipos» G» r<ùv bfip<ûP'
D. T^, TI7, Tö hfVPl,
201. From the relative ó- are derived óo-o-, how greaty how
many (L. quanto-y quot), and 0Í0-, of what hind (L. qualv-)* To
these correspond the interrogatives ttoo-o- ; and Troto ; which are
also used as indefinite, and the indirect interrogatives órrooro-
and ÓTToto-. For a more complete list of these forms, see § 203.
202. The indirect interrogatives ó-rti', óttoto-, etc., are also
relatives {whoever, etc.), differing from the simple relative 0- as
the latin forms made by adding -cunque differ from quo-.
4
203. Table ov Courklative Pronouns.
Demonstrative,
Kelative.
Interrogative.
Indefinite.
{Enclitic^
Indirect Interrog.
(and Relative).
Greek.
English.
Latin.
TO-, ro-5e, TOVTO-f
thiSf tliat.
ho-, i- or 60-.
t
0-»
who, which, what.
qui- or quo-.
TXV~ ;
who ? which ? what ?
qui- or quo- ?
Ttl'-,*
a, any, some.
qui- or quo- (end.),
all qui-.
¿-Ttl'-,
who,etc.', whoever,etc.
qui-; qui-cunque.
G.
K
L.
ercpo-,
one of two.
altero-.
iTorçpo- ;
whether of the two Î
utero-?
ITOTfpO-,
either of the two.
utero- (end.), alter-
utero-.
¿TroTepo-,
whether of the two ;
whichever of the t wo,
utero-, utero-
cunque.
G.
E.
L.
roo'o-, roo-o-Ôe,
roirovro-,
of such a size, or
number,
tanto-, tot.
otro-,
(as great, as many) as.
quanto-, quot.
TToao- ;
how great ? how
mang?
quanto- Î quot ?
7roo*o-,
of any size, or numr
ber.
aliquanto-, aliquot.
i
ÓTTOCTO-,
how great, etc.) how
great soever.
quanto-, etc. ; quan-
to-cunque, etc.
G.
E.
L.
Toto-, TOlO-be, TOtOVTO-,
of such a sort, such,
tali-.
0(0-,
(such) as,
quail-.
TToto- ;
of what sort ?
quail- ?
Troto-,
of any sort,
(quali- übet.)
órroío-,
of what sort ; of
what sort soever.
quali- ; quah-cunque.
G.
E.
TtjXÏKO-, Trj¡\iKO^€,
TTjXlKOVrO",
of such an age, etc.
^Xtko-,
(as old) as, etc.
nrjkiKo- ;
how old Î etc.
WTfKÍKO-,
of any age, etc.
éirrjXtKO',
how old,etc.) how old
soever.
* In accentuated Greek the interrogative and indefinite pronouns are generally distintruishable. the former bavins an
aceentp the latter in most casee having none*
204. Table op Correlative Pronominal Adverbs.*
where.
whither.
whence.
road by which.
time.
manner.
ro-, this, that
To&i, erÔa
evôa
evô^v
'TJi
Tore
Tû>S, û)f
To-he, this
evÔâde
evôdbe
evÔevbe
rrjàe
¿>d€
TOVTO-, this, that
€UTavêâ
tvTavÔà
eprevÔev
ravTT)
0VT<ûÇ
fKeivc, that yonder
eK€i
€K€l(r€
€K€lÛ€V
€K€ÍPg
€K€lV<ùÇ
auTo-, self, etc.
avToût, avroul"
avToae
avroôep
avrcûç
d-, which
oûï, ov
f
01
0Ô€V
c
.7
ore
6>r
TTo- ;] rvhich ?
TToêï J TTOV 5
TTOl ;
Ttoôev \
ttiy;
tV0T€ f
îrwr ;I
TTC-, end.], any
TTOÔX, TTOV
ttot
noôev
irrp
oirp
Mpq.
wore
trcûr
ÓTTc-l whichever
OTToßl, OTTOV
OTTOi
oiroêev
oiTore
onciS
irepo-, other of two
ÍT€pú}Ol
€T€p<i}<r€
ÍTep<ú6ev
€T€p(ùÇ
7roT€po- ; which of two ?
7roT€p<ú6i ;
;rotfpû><r6 ;
OTTorepaxre
€KàT(p<ùO-€
oTTorepcaêev
7ror€p<ùS ;
oTTorepo-, whichever of two
€KaT€po-, each of two
OTTOTfpüyßt
o7roT€pa>ç
iKarfpaiÇ
€KaT€p<oai
€KaT€p(t)6€V
fkuctto-, each
€Ka(TToôï
€Kao-ToâfV
tKaorore
Qpo-, one and the same
ópov
opoue
opoôev
opg
opas
aWo-, other
aWoôi
oKkoae
aWoêev
aXXg
aXXore
nWas
TTuvT', all
['d/io-], one, some
iravTodt
iravroae
•navToùev
TravTTj
trawore
navras
'âpov
'd/ioöeu
€ V *
apg
< V
apas
ouô-duo- (ovtív-), ) .
5v wT / - I ? ^ot one
pr)b-apo- WTiv-), )
ovÔapoûï (& -pov)
ovhapoae
ovôapoôcï/
ovbaprj
outrore
ovbdpas
prjèapoÔX (& -pov)
pT)àapo<r€ {'pot)
pgàdpoôev
prjbapg
pgirore
prj^apas
apóoTfpo-, both
ap(f>OT€p(ùôï
apifiOTepùxre
ap<f>or€p(ù6€v
aptporeprj
ap(l)or€pas
(
ovôfrepo-, ) neither of the
ovSerepaxTe
Ovb^TfpiûâiP
ovberepas
prjà(T€po-, ) two
pgàeTepaxre
pgèerepiùdep
prjberfpas
* Some of the forms included in this table are of rare occurrence, others are only found in the poets, or in Ionic Greek, etc.
t These seeming genitives, avrou, ou, ttou, etc., are perhaps contractions of the older forms avro^, ¿èc, iro9í, etc.
X The interrogative pronominal adverbs take an accent in accentuated Greek, noX\ Trorc; ttwc; and are thus distinguished
from the indefinite adverbs, which are enclitic, ttoi, Trore (sometimes Trorl), ttcoc. See § 199.
72 KUMERAUi.
I
i
205« From rXp-y any^ are derived the negative pronouns ovrii^
(nëTnônr^ nuUo^^ firfrXv {ne qui-) no oTie, none ; and from mpo-t
one of tfVOy the negatives ovÔ€tî/jo-, ftrfderepo-y neither of the two.
206. As from to-, thiSy and whaty are derived Toto-, of this
sorty and olo-, of what sort; so from oXAo-, other, is formed
oXXoco-, of another sort; from erepo-, the otheTy ¿rcpoto-, of the
other sort ; from ópo-, one and the samcy ópoio-, of the same sort ;
and from navr-y all, navroio', oj all sorts»
y
207. In addition to the adverbial forms from oXXo-, «aoro-,
and iravT-y given in the table, the following are found ;—
iiXXa;^o^i and aXXa;(OV, iiXXa;^0(re, (ùCKâ\o6€Vy €ÚCKá^r¡»
€#ca(rra;^oöi and €ícatrra;(ov, ÍKa<Tra)(ooty ¿Kairra^oB^v»
navraxpÔX and iravrá^oVy Travra^^ooe n-avra^oBep, irapraxfj*
And in like manner from ttoXXo-, manyy are derived—
noWaxoBX and 7roXXa;^ov, TroXXaxocre, iroXXaxodei', woXKaxjj*
208. Other correlatives are reas and To<f>pay so long (L. tamdvu) ;
€<ùs and o<^pa (for o(f>pa)y while (L. qnamdiii) ; ttootos ; which in a
series f and ottootoç ; rrfpXKä {rijvXKäbey n/vwcavra), then ; ^vtMy
when ; TnjnKa ; when ? and ¿mjvXKa.
209. To relative pronouns and adverbs may be joined the
particles ár¡y ÔijTroTe, and ovp, with the meaning of—ever (L.
-cunque), and the enclitic Trep, by which the idea of precision is
added: oortr drjirorty quicunqtie; ottcds ovp, utcunque; ¿owcp,
just as.
NUMERALS.
210. The cardinal, ordinal, and adverbial numbers are as
foUov's
NUMERAIS.
73 '
Arabic
Sym¬
bols.
Greek
Sym¬
bols.
Cardinal.
Ordinal.
Adverbs.
1
0
a
m.n.;
np(ùTo~
*o jra¿ *
2
A
bvo-
devTfpO'
ÔXs
3
M
0
1
Tpl-
TpXTC
TpXs
4
0
r*<r<raf>'
TeraprO'
TCTpaKiS
5
w
e
TTfvre
nepTTTO'
TTepraKXs
6
/
T
êê •
€«TO-
<> V V
eÇoKtr
7
< V
€irra
€^Ô0^£>-
f W V
tirraKiç
8
V
oKTca
oyôoo-
OKTaKXs
9
&
€VVfâ
evoTo- (eworo-)
cvükXs
10
/
i
0€Ka
ôfKaro-
àéKaKXs
11
lo'
(vèeKa
(i^SeKoro-
¿pdeKaKXç
12
iß'
àaàcKa
ÔcûdeKarO'
èiùàeKQKXs
13
TpiCTKaideKa
rpio/catSeicaro-
14
tô'
TeaaapecrKai^eKa
TfO'írapaKaideKaTO'
15
iç'
TrevreKaiBcKa
TrepTfKaiSeKaro-
16
/
IT
(KKGideKa
iKKaideKaro^
* 17
if
énraicaiéeKa
iTTroKOiSeKaro-
18
irf
OKTCíKaiÓfKa
oicTû)KaiÔej<aro-
19
i&
evveaKaiàeKa
eweaKoideAcoro-
20
0
K
€iKO<rX{v)
eiKoaTO"
eiKoaaKig
21
0
Ka
€v- Kai €iKó<rX{v)
€P- (or TrpCDTO-) Kai eiKOOTO'
30
V
A
TptäKoprä
rpiaKocTO'
rptôicorroKir
40
Tfo-càpaKOprà
TefTcräpaKoaro'
T€<r<rdpaKOpraKXg
60
w
V
irevTTjKovra
TTetfTTjKocrro-
TreimjKovraKis
60
r
i^rjKOvrä
e^tjkoo'to'
e^KovraKXç
70
o
A
eßdopijKovTä
eßdoprjKooTO"
epoopTjKovraKis
80
r
7r
oyàoTjKOirrâ
oydorfKoaTc
oy Bar) KOvraKXs
90
9
euevrjKOvrâ
€P€PrfKO<TTO-
evepr^KovraKXs
100
CKarov
eKaroo'TO' ,
¿KaropraKXs
200
• /
(T
A
Ôiâ«o<rio- (plural)
ôiditoirtocrro-
BiäKo<ridKXs
300
0
T
0
Tptâ#CO<7iO-
TpiÖKoaiocrro-
400
w
V
a m
TeTpaKOcriO'
TerpaKoaiooTO"
500
TrePTO.KOfTlO'
TTei/TOKOO'tOO'TO-
600
' 0
X
e^aKoaio-
e^a#co(7toírTo-
700
€7rraKo<rio-
eTTraKoa-ioaro
800
ê
<0
OKTd.KOfriO'
oKTaxotrioo'To-
900
m
evaKoaio-
fï'o/coo'ioo'ro-
1,000
\T\io~
;^rXiocrro-
^ïXiaKXs
2,000
ß
àt(r)(t\LO-
Ôt(r;^rXtôa'To-
10,000
/-
pvpio-
fivpiocrro-
pvpiaxXs
♦ Probably contracted from 'àfiaKXç, which would be the regularly made adverb from
the old *6í/io-, one, eome. If *d/xo- and o/io-, one and the same, are connected, and
¿/iov would be represented both in root and meaning by the Latin semel, simul. Com¬
pare, further, *äfiä, sim-plex, sim^iUs, the German samm^lung, and Bnglish same.
74
IHTMERÂIfi.
I
211. The letters of the alphabet, in uninterrupted order, are
sometimes used as symbols of the numbers. In the notation
given above, which is that in most frequent use, f {vau)y or
V {stigma)^ is inserted after e as the sign for 6 ; ? (Iwjppa) after
TT, for 90 ; and ^ {sampi) after o), for 900. With 1,000 the alphar
bet begins again ; but a dash is now made under the letters :
thus, ^)3t/iÔ'=2344 ; ,
212. The cardinal numbers from 1 to 4 are declined as fol¬
lows :—
m. n. ; ¡iia-, f. one. dvo-, m. f. n. two.
Mase. Fem. Neui. M. F. N.
K
A. €Pa fiiap €P
G, ivos fiiäs €vos G. hvoiv and hv€iv
D. kvX ¡iva ívX D. bvovv (rarely ôu(ri(i'))
Tpt-, m. f. n. three. reo-o-dp- (rerrdp-) m, £ Xi.four.
M.F. N. M.F. N.
N. Tp€is rpiâ N. Tfcaapes reaaapa
Ä. rpevs rpiä Ä. reaaapas reaaàpâ
G. rpi(ùp G. T€(T(ràp<ùV
D. rpXaXiy) D, rea-a-aptrXiy)
213. Like év- are declined m. n. ; ovdepca-, f., and prjbep-^
m. n, ; pïjôc/ita-, f. not even one, no one, compounded of cV and
ovà€, Avo is also found undeclined. Ap<f>o-, both, N. A.
ap<^ú) G. D. apvpovv, is interchanged with the plural form
Tfp-oi, -aij ~a ; the neut. sing, apvporepou is also frequent.
214. The cardinal numbers from 5 to 199, both included, are
undeclined : for 13 and 14, however, are also found 7pets Kai deKa
and T€cr<rap€s Kai bcKa, rpeis and Tecro-apes being declined. In
expressing the composite numbers above 20, the smaller num¬
ber is generally placed first, kat being used ; nevre kai cikotrxj 25 :
the order is, however, sometimes reversed, and then Kai may be
omitted ; cikooï kai irevre, or ciKoaX ircvre. In the combination of
three numbers, the larger numbers usually precede ; ¿Karov kai
€lKO<rX Kai ¿TTTO, 127.
215. For the ordinal numbers from 13 to 19, rpXro- Kai óeicaro-,
etc., also occur. Above 20, either ircpTrro- Kai hkooto-, or €i*ooto-
ïTtpTTTo-, or n€PT€ Kai ciKoaro-, may be used.
N
VERBS. ' 7Ä
216. The higher cardinal numbera from 200 upwards, and all
the ordinals, are declined regularly as adjectives in o with three
terminations.
217. Distributive numerals are formed by compounding the
cardinals with the preposition avv, with : as, o-wÔvo, two by two
(L. Mni) ; avvrpeis^ three by three (¿rint), etc.
218. Multiplicatives are formed by composition with the syl¬
lable ttXoo-, ttXoi»- : as, ¿ttXoo-, óttXov-, simple ,* 8t7^Xo^^•, t^íttXov-,
twofold, threefold, etc. Compare the Latin words simplo-, duplo-,
etc. A series, of similar meaning, is formed in nKatrio-, hnikaaio-,
twice as many ; rptTrXacrio-, TroXXaTrXao-to-, etc.
219. Numeral adverbs in -a^ or -xj; are formed (§ 207) : as,
fxopaxa, in one way only (from ¡lovo-, single) ; hXxd
two ways y Terpaxpi
220. Feminine substantives in -aô are formed : as, povàà-, the
number one, unity ; 8ua8-, the number two, rptaS-, tr^pirah-, «ä-
Toi/raS-, xtXiaÔ-, pûptaS- : pvpiàè- is used to express multiples of
10,000 ; Tp€is pvpiàÔ€s, 30,000, etc.
221. Adjectives in -ato are formed from many of the ordinal
numerals, signifying on what day an event happened : thus, Ôcut€-
paio-, Tptrato-, 5e/icaraio-, etc., on the second, third, tenth day, etc.
so are made nporepaio-, varcpaio-, on the day before, on the day
after ; but these are chiefly used in the dat. fem., as Tr¡ nporcpaia
(sc. Tjpepa), on the day before,
222. From the most important adjectives of quantity are
formed adverbs in -kXî\ as, e/cao-raKiç, each time; noWaKXs, many
times, often ; oXXyaKtç, few times, seldom ; oaaKXs, nXda-raKÍs, etc. :
^vaKis and rptoKti, for Ôts and rpXs, are quoted by a grammarian
from Aristophanes.
VERBS.
223. In the conjugation of the Greek verb are distinguished—
a. Three numbers ; singular, dual, and plural ; and three
persons in each number.
224. b. Three voices: active (or simple), ^rpairov, I turned;
eXvo-a, I loosened: middle or reflective, erpairopTjv, I turned
myself: eXvaaprjv, I loosened for myself:* ojid passive, crpaTnjv,
I was turned ; e\v6r¡v, 1 was let loose,
* E' p. ixvaavto tovç (pXXovç, they set their fiiends free.
76 VERBS.
225. Tliere are special forms for the passive voice only in the
indefinite tenses; in the other tenses, the middle forms have
at the same time a passive signification.
226. Verbs which are only foimd- in the middle or passive
are called deponents.
227. c. Two main classes of tenses ;—
A. Principal Tenses : viz,
Preservt-lmperfecty \va>, 1 am loosening.
pTescnt-Petfectj XéXiííca, I have loosened.
Future (simple), Xv<ra), 1 shall loosen.
Future-Perfect (pass.), XcXvcro/iai, 1 shall have been let loose.
B. Historical Tenses : viz.
Past-Imperfect, €Xvoc, I was loosening.
Past-Perfect, eXeXvKrj, I had loosened.
Aorist, or Past-Indefinite* ) cXvo-a (1 aor.), I loosened.
(of two forms), ) írpairov (2 aor.), I turned.
228. The imperfect tenses, present and past, signify (1) an
action, etc., going on at the time specified: as, tvttt*», I am
striking; ervtrrov, I was striking: and (2) an action, etc.,repeated or
habitual : as, tvtttû), I (habitually) strike ; ervm-ov, I used to strike.
229. The perfect tenses of the Greek verb signify not only that
the action, etc., is completed, but that its consequences survive :
redwjKa, I have died, am dead ; €K€K\T)fir¡v, I had been called, my
name was ; XfXva-o/zat, I shall have been let loose, I shall he free.
No separate form exists for the future-perfect in the active voice :
when such a tense is required, it is expressed by a periphrasis of
the perf. participle and the future of «o--, be : XcXiíKwy eaofxat, I
shall have loosened.
230. By indefinite or aorist (aopttrro-, und^ned), is meant that
the action, etc., simply, is signified, no regard being had to its
duration or completeness : €rv>//-a, I struck. An indefinite, tense,
therefore, may either signify a single and momentary action, or
an action of some duration contemplated as momentary.
231. The simple future active is, according to the nature of
the verb, either imperfect (a future state), &lyy}(T<ù, I shall be
silent, or, more frequently, indefinite (a future action), tv^îù, I
shall strike. In the passive the future of this form, ru^o/wii, is
• See, however, § 310,
VERBS.
I
77
only imperfect (7 shall receive Uorvs, uot, I shall he struck), a
distinct form existing for the indeñnite future.
232. d. Five moods, viz.
we are loosening,
cXvo/iep, we were loosening,
\v<ofA€v, we are to loosen (solvamus).
\voifi€Py we were to loosen (solveremus).
Xvire, loosen ye !
Xvttv, to loosen^ or loosening (subsi),
Xvoi^-, loosening (adj.).
233. The past tenses of the subjunctive and the future subj.
are commonly treated as constituting a distinct mood, called the
optative: thus, for example, Xvojftev (pres.-imperfect subj.) is
called the present subjunctive, and \voip.€v (past-imperfect subj.),
the present optative. These tenses, however, are as closely con¬
nected in use and signification as the present and past tenses of
the subjunctive in Latin.
234. The infinitive and participle, as partaking partly of the
nature of the verb, and partly of the nature of the substantive
or adjective, are sometimes comprehended under the name of
the participial mood.
235. In addition to these forms verbal adjectives are derived
with the endings -to and -rto : as, Xiîro-, soluhilir; Xvrco-, solvendo-.
236. The original person-endings were, probably, as follows :—
Singular, 1.
2.
3.
ACTIVE.
*
MIDDLE AND PASSIVE.
Principal
Tenses,
SJ
-/it
'(Ti
w
-Tt
Historical
T'enses,
-V (for ft)
'-S
-j'(forT)
Impera¬
tive,
-ex
-TÛ)
Principal
Tenses.
-/tat
"(raí
-ral
Historical
Tenses.
"prjp
"(TO
-TO
Impera¬
tive,
-(TO
-<rô<ù
Dual, 1.
2.
3.
-fl€V
TOP
-TOP
-fX€P
"TOP
Trjp
-TOP
-T(ùP
"peôop
"Crôop
"(TÔOP
-peôop
-<r6op
-(T6r)V
-crôop
-(T6(ÙP
Plural, 1.
2.
3.
-fjL€P
-re
-pai*
(for -pTi)
'fl€P
-t€
-V*
(for -pt)
-T€
-PT(OP
-peßä
"(TÔe
"Praí
-peOa
"(tôe
-PTO
-(TÔe
-<r6(ùp
* Older forms were, -¿(tÏ, -oav (for Í9)avn, cavr). See § 337, and n.
Indicative,
Subjunctive,
Imperative,
Infinitive,
Participle,
7S
VERBS,
237. The person-endings of the principal tenses of the. active
voice are best seen in the pres.-imperf. indicative of c<r-, "be :
238. The endings of the three persons in the singular are,
properly, afi&xed pronouns, J, thoUy he ; and may be compared
with the crude forms of the personal pronouns, -¡u with /¿e-, -o-i
with 0-e-, and -rt with the C. F. of the article to-.
239. The 1st person of the dual always coincides, in the active
voice, with the 1st person plural.
240. According to the manner in which these sufl&xes are
added to the tense-forms two principal conjugations may be
distinguished :
The ßrst conjugation connects the personal sufi&xes with the
tense-forms of the present and past imperfect, and of the
2 aorist (active and middle), by means of a vowel called the
connecting vowel, or vowel of irfiexion : as, Xu-o-ftec.
The connecting vowel is sometimes e(ï/), sometimes o(a)). In
the indicative it is o before ¡x or v, e before o- or r ; in the present
tenses of the subjimctive it is <0 before /i, tj before <r or t ; in the
past tenses of the subjunctive (optative) it is always o, forming
the diphthong 01 with the vowel t, which is characteristic of
those tenses ; in the infinitive it is always €, ' and in the par¬
ticiple o.
As the 1 pers. sing, of the present-imperfect indie, active in
this conjugation ends in -to, the verbs which belong to it are
often called verbs in Û.
24l'. The second, and much less frequent but older, conju¬
gation connects the personal suffixes with the tense-forms of
the present and past imperfect and 2 aorist without any con¬
necting vowel : as, ecr-/xeï/, we are.
As the 1 person sing, of the present-imperfect indie, active in
this conjugation retains the original ending -fí, the verbs be¬
longing to it are often called verbs in MI.
The forms of the other tenses are common to both conju¬
gations.
242. The characteristic of the subjunctive mood in the present
Singular.
1. (for e<r-/xi)
2. €(r-(ri (Att. et or etr)
3. eir-rt(ï')
€(T-fí€V
€(T-TOV
€<T-TOV
Dual.
Plural.
€<r-fi€v (Ion. et-ftey)
C<r-T€
€1'<tX{P)
VERBS
79
tenses consists in the lengthened connecting vowel : pres.-imperf.
of the india Xvo/iei', 7ve are loosening ; of the subj. Xvax/xfi', rve are
to loosen.
243. The characteristic of the subjunctive in the past and
future tenses consists in an i inserted before the person-endings,
which usually combines with the preceding vowel to form a
diphthong, ot, at, or « ; past-imperfect of the indie. tXvo/iei/, we
7oere loosening; of the subj. Xvoi^içv, we were to loosen.
244. The present tenses of the subj. have the personal sufQxes
of the principal tenses.
245. The past and future tenses of the subj. (opt.) have the
personal sufíixes of the historical tenses, except that in the
1 pers. sing, -¡u is used, and that in the 3 pers. sing, v is always
dropped, as it is frequently in the indie. (§ 272, etc.). The forms
of these tenses are, however, sometimes found with prefixed to
the person-endings ; the 1 pers. sing, then ends in v. The suffixes
thus become with the mood-vowel—
t-jji/, i-7;r, t-T/ ; t-ïyroï', 1'7)top ; i-T^/zev, i-ijaav or i-€V.
These forms are, in Attic, preferred, the singular^ in the
imperfect of contract verbs and of verbs in /xt, in the 2 aor. of
verbs ending in vowels, and in the future of liquid verbs ; also
in the rarely used past-perf. subj. The forms without 17 are,
however, sometimes found in the singular, and those with tj
occur in the plural, at all events in the 1 and 2 persons.
246. The original ending of the infinitive mood was, in the
active, -fiepaif or, with the connecting vowel, -c-fiepai ; and in the
middle, -aôaiy or, with the connecting vowel, -c-o-Ôai.
247. The original ending of the participle was, in the active»
-PT (o-vr), and in the middle, -fxepo {-o-fifpo),
%
Of the Augment.
248. All the historical tenses of the indicative mood take, in
addition to the person-endings, a further sign of past time, called
the augment. The augment is either syllabic or temporal.
249. The syllabic augment consists in the vowel e prefixed to
the root, and is admitted by all verbs which begin with a con¬
sonant : as, Xu-, loosen, eXvov, I was loosening ; tutt-, beat, rrvnrjp,
I 7vas beaten. An initial p is doubled after the augment:*
♦ See § 286, n.
80 VERBS.
%
piTtT'(pï<l>-)t throw, eppinrov, J was throwing. In three verbs,
ßov\- (m.),* wish ; ôi/va- (m.), he able ; peXX-, be g(Ang to y the
syllabic augment sometimes appears in the form »; : r)ßov\oprfv, I
was desirous ; ijhvuaprjv, I was able ; rjpcXKov, I was going to —,
as well as eßovXoprfp, etc.
250. The temporal augment consists in a lengthening of the
initial vowel of the root, and is admitted by all verbs which
begin with a vowel. Thus,
a becomes : ay-, lead, ^ leading,
e iy eXa-, drive, rfKaaa, I drove.
0 û> opvx", dig, apv^a, I dug.
Ï r 'iK- (m.), come, 'ÏKoprjv, I came.
V V *v<l}âv-, weave, *v(f>aivov, I was weaving.
ai 0 at(TÔ- (m.), perceive, jja-êopTjv, I perceived.
av Tfv avàa-, speak, ijvBa>y, J was speaking.
01 tú OlKTCp-, pity, (ÛKT€ipâ, I piticd.
The long vowels rj, ta, T, v, and, for the most part, the diphthongs
€1, €v, ov, do not take the augment,
251. The following verbs beginning with e take ft instead of rj
in the adgmented tenses: ea-, suffer; eêïb-, accv^stom ; iKXKr,roll;
«Xk- or cXkv-, draw; in- (m.), follow; cpyaB- (m,), labour; ipn- or
ipTTvd-, creep; iarta-, feast ; ex-, hold; also (in the 2 aor., and
the I aor. pass.), €-, let go, send ; and the aorist roots éX-, seize,
and ià-, seat. The reason of this peculiarity appears to be that
the roots in question originally began with a consonant, either
/ or <r, and therefore took the syllabic augment : when ß or tr
was dropped, e of the augment combined with e of the root to
form fi.t
252. For the same reason the verbs 'ab-, please; ày-, break;
'aXo-, be captured; <ùÔ€-, push; ww- (m.), buy, take the syllabic
augment in some or all of the augmented tenses : as, eâôov (for
€fadov, Horn. euaSov), I pleased, etc. Similarly from ïô-, see (ori-
* The symbol (m.) inserted after the crude form of a verb signifies
that that verb is inflected only in the middle or reflective voice (depo¬
nents). Many of these verbs, however, have aorists of the passive form
with the deponent roeaniiig.
t Compare éw-, kpn-, and ií- with the Latin roots or sequ-, serp-,
and $ed- ; cpyd^- and the subst. ipyo-, n. work, with the English work,
and German Werk; and €%- with its 2 aor. tax'Ov (for i-trtx-ov), the
bye-form nrx-t»*, sud the future '
VERIÍás.
81
ginally fï8-, Latin v%âr)y the 2 aor. is eidov (i.e. eibov from eftSor),
I saiVj not ïÔop.
253. *Eo/)ra8-, keep holiday, takes the augment on the second
syllable : ew/jrafov, I was keeping holiday. The compound verb
àv-oty-, open; opa-, see; and âvbâv- ('âÔ-), please, take both the
syllabic and temporal augment : i<ûp(ùv, I beheld ; avcayov, I was
opening ; irjvôavov (Horn.), I was j^leasing.
254. Verbs compounded with a preposition have the augment
between the preposition and the root : as, bring in,
€icr€<l>€pov, I was bringing in ; 7rpo<r-ây-, lead vp, 'Kpocr(]yov, I was
leading up. Ek has the form €| before the vowel t
throw out, €^€ßä\ov, I threw out. Ivv and fv, if they have under¬
gone any change before the initial consonant of the verbal root,
resume their original form : o-vX-Xey-, gather together, I
gathered together; tp-ßaK-, throw in, €V€ßa\ov, I threw in. Tlie
final vowel of prepositions ending in a vowel is elided before the
augment : a7ro-(f>€p-, bear away, I was bearing away :
but Trept, round and Trpo before, never suffer elision: irepteßaXov,
7rpovßä\op, for TTpoeßäXop.
255. Verbs which are not compounded with prepositions, but
derived from compound nouns, regularly take the augment at
the beginning : as, cpaprio- (m.), oppose oneself (from epavrio-, op^
posite), TfpauTtovpTjp, I was opposing myself; nappija-iab- (m.), speak
boldly (from Trapprjcia-, boldneSS of speech), çnappr^a-iaaaprip, 1
spoke boldly. Yet in the Attic dialect many follow the rule of
compound verbs : as, ^KKKr¡a-iah-, hold an assembly (from cKKkr^o-ia-^
assembly), e^ckkrja-ta^op, I was holding an assembly ; 'vttotttçv,
suspect (from 'íJttottto-, suspicious), 'lÍTrwTrrcvírá, I suspected.
256. Some compound verbs had so entirely lost this character
that they were treated as simples : as, Kaôcvh-, sleep, cKaÔevhov, 1
was sleeping; KaOXh-, make sit down, «a^ío-a, I seated: but
Ka6r¡vhop is also found. Some of these verbs take a double aug¬
ment : as, av€x~ (lïi-)j uphold ; âvopôo-, set upright; past-imperf.
1 pers. r)p€i)(opjip, Tjpœpâovp, and a few others.
Other irregularities and exceptions to the general rules will be
found in dictionaries.
Of the Crude Form of the Verb, and the Tense-Forms.
257. By the crude form of a verb is meant that form from
the union of which with the endings of persons, tenses, and
a
82
VERBS»
moods, in obedience to the laws of letter-change, all the various
forms of that verb may be explained. Thus, from an inspection
of the forms Avw, I am loosening; Xvo-©, I shall loosen ; XeXvKa,
I have loosened: Tt/iaü), I honour, value ; TlfiTjo-ofiev, we shall
honour; rerífirjKev, he has honoured, it is seen that Xv- and rl^a-
are the crude forms of those verbs. Again, from the same crude
forms, by the addition of certain other suffixes, nouns are de¬
rived: e.g. Xiio-t-, the act of loosening; Xvnjp-, one who loosens;
Xurpo-, ransom: rlfiqa-i-, valuation; TÏfirfTa-, one who values, censor;
TifXTjixar-, estimate.
258. K the C. F. of a verb cannot be further analysed it is
called a r,oot, and the verb made from it a root-verb. But if the
C. F. be itself the C. F, of a noun formed by some noun-suffix, or
if it be formed by the addition of some verbal suffix, the verb is"
called a derived verb. Thus, rlpa- is at the same time the C. F.
of a feminine substantive signifying honour, derived from the
root TL-, pay (honour), by addition of the fern, suffix -¡xa, and the
C. F. of a derived verb signifying render honour.
259. By a tense-form is meant that form from which, by addi¬
tion of the personal suffixes, the several persons of the tense are
made : thus, rïpoo-- is the future tense-form of ripa-, whence are
made TtfiTjo-o}, I skull honour, TTfirjo-cis, you will honour, etc.
260. Imperfect Tense-Form.—From the imperfect tense-form
are conjugated the present and past imperfect tenses, active and
middle.*
The imperfect tense-form is not always the same as thé crude
form of the verb : it is much more frequently the C. F. strength¬
ened by some addition or modification. Thus, XeiTro) is I am
^eaving, and Xfitt- is the imperfect T. F., but the C. F. of the
verb is Xwr-, as seen in the 2 aor. ^XXttov, I left. This strength¬
ened form is sometimes called the increased form.
261. There are many different ways of making the increased
form, and according to the relation existing between the crude
form of the verb and the increased form of the imperfect tenses,
verbs may be divided into several classes.
262. 1. Verbs in which the C. F. is not increased. To this
class belong most verbs whose C. F. ends in a vowel (sometimes
called pure verbs), and many verbs ending in some consonant :
* That is, rnitldlc and passive, so far as these voiees coincide, § 225.
"VERBS
83
loosen ; nav^^ make to cease ; vÏKa-, conquer ; (jiXXt-f love ;
èovXo-, enslave ; Tp^n-y turn ; äy-, lead ; ¡i€v-y remain. In all these
the imperfect tense-form coincides with the crude form.
263. II. Verbs in which the C. F. is increased by strengthen¬
ing the root-vowel.
a. When the final letter is a mute consonant : as, C. F. tok-,
melt ; \aß-, take ; Jice ; nXB -y persuade ; rpiß-yTuk: I. F.
(increased forms) ttjk-, Xr/ß-,* ^cuy-, Trcid-, rpiß-.
h. When the final letter is a liquid (v or p) : as, C. F.
destroys (pap-yShem, âpvv-y drive off: I. F. àpivv-.
But these words should perhaps be referred to the next class
(see § 45, d).
264. III. Verbs in which the C. F. is increased by adding t
cons. (§ 45).
a. If the final consonant be any k-sound, it generally passes
into cr<r (later Attic tt) : thus, C. F. (pvXaK-, watch ; ray-, ar-
rangei opvy^ydig: L F. ^vXatrcr-, raco'-, oputrcT-. But many words
ending in y, including several signifying sound, have their in¬
creased form in f : as, C. F. Kpäy-, scream; ot/Awy-, cry otpot ;
(Tí^ay-, butcher : I. F. «paf-, oipco^-j <r^af- (and acparr-).
b If the final consonant be d, it passes generally into f ; thus,
C. F. (ppàà-y tell : I. F. <^paf-. Some verbs ending in r have their
increased-form ending in o-cr (rr) : C. F. TrXar-, mould; «per-, row;
appoT-yJit : I. F. TrXao-íT-, epeo-o*-, ápporr- (and óppof-).
c. A few words ending in a p-sound have increased forms end¬
ing in cro- or ^ : thus, from ttctt-, cook ; vXß-y wash, the increased
forms are Treíro*-, vi^- (later vlttt-).
d. Final X passes into XX : thus, C. F. /3aX-, throw ; ayyfX-,
announce : I. F. /3aXX-, ayyeXX-.
265. IV. Verbs in which the crude form is increased by some
consonantal affix.
a. av or V is added.
When av is added, if the root-syllable be short, either it is
strengthened by prefixing to the final mute its cognate nasal
(§ 26), or, less commonly, the added syllable is lengthened : thus,
C.Y. aiad-{m?^y perceive ; tvx~j hit; paÓ-, learn; \äß~y take:
1. F. aiaS-aVy rvyx-av-y pavÔ-aVy \apß-äv- C. F. ^Xk-, comc ; aXTr-,
sin : I. F. àXXr-aiv-.
* Sec below, IV, a.
84
VERBS.
When V is added, the root-vowel is often lengthened : C. F.
TC/A-, cut / ôâ#c-, bite / ßa-y go ,* eXa-, drive : I. F. tc/ív-, daKv-y ßaip-y
eXaur-. But in some of these verbs the v may have claims to be
regarded as originally part of the root.
b. pf is added : C. F. 'be- (m.) come ; I. F. ík-pc-.
c. pv is added. Some verbs of this formation have roots end¬
ing in 0-, which passes into p before w (§ 48). Thus, C. F.
(S¿K-), shew y (evy- (¿vy-), join ; €<t-y clothe : I. F. ôf nc-w-, ¿eiry-ru-,
d. T is added to many roots ending in a p-sound : C. F. tvit-,
strike ; ß\äß-y thwart ,* ßa<j>-y dip : I. F. rutrr-y ß^avt-, ßutrr-.
e. €Ô or Ô is added : C. F. <^Xfy-, scorch ; ed-y eat ; 'rr\a-,ßll :
I. F. (p^ey-eO-y caô- (fox eS-Ö-), TrXrjO- {bc full). The verbs of this
class are chiefly poetical, and coexist with forms made from the
simple root ; e. g. ^X€y-û>, iriyiTiKrjpX {IJill). The 2 aor. is
also found strengthened by addition of €0 or àô.
266. V. Verbs in which the C. F. is increased by adding ktk or
ttk. : C. F. 'aX-o-, be captured) yyjpa-j grow old ; evp-yjind ; 7ra6-y
suffer y yo'wtiy gape : I. F. uXictk-, yqpaa-k'y fupia-k-y traax"
7raß(tk-)y ;^ao-/c-. Verbs of this class usually signify, in those tenses
which contain the element o-k, the beginning or progress of an
action, etc., and are hence called inceptives,
267. VI. Verbs in which the C. F. is increased by reduplica¬
tion, that is, by prefixing to the root a syllable consisting of its
initial consonant and the vowel ¿ ; the short vowel of the root
is then often elided : C. F. Ôo-, give ; ycv-y become ; trer-, fall :
I. F. diào-y yiyp-y ttittt- (for yiyep-y nXirer-), This mode of forma¬
tion is often combined with the preceding : thus, from ypa>-y be
of opinion ; 8par, run away, the increased forms are ytypcùo-k-,
àièpa(rk-.
268. VIL Verbs in which the C. F. is increased by the addition
of € :* C. F. èok-, seem, «âX-, call ; cûô-, push : I. F, Sok€-, #câXe-,
Koße-, On the other hand, in many words the short form is used
in the imperfect tenses, while the longer form in € appears in
the other tenses : thus, ßovX- (m.), wish, is the imperfect T. F. ;
while the future, perfect, and aorist are made from ßovXe-,
* This € is perhaps a modification of i cons., and may be compared
with Í in such Latin verbs as cäpi-, rdpi-,/¿ici-, wliich also only appears
in the imperfect (and future) tenses.
VERBS,
85
269. By the side of a few simple verbs the root-vowel of which
is e, collateral forms exist, made by adding c or a to the C. F,,
and changing the root-vowel into o in the former case, into o> in
the latter : thus, (j)o߀- (m.) is found by the side of <j>€ß- (m.),
take to ßigktyfear ; (jiop€- (with a slight change of meaning), by
the side of carry ; rpcwTra-, by the side of Tp€7r-, turn.
Sometimes a substantive seems to connect the earlier and later
forms : thus, ßee ; <j)oßo-j m. ßigkty terror ; derived verb
^oße-yput toßight, frighteny and (mid.) conceive terroVyfear,
270. VIII. Verbs ending in f or tr properly fall under classes
L and II, ; but as they have certain peculiarities in common, it
is convenient to class them by themselves.
F is dropped in the increased form ; a before f becomes ai
(in later Attic ä), c generally remains unchanged ; in those
tenses in which a consonant follows the C. F., af and e f for the
most part become av and €u. Boots in. cf often retain traces of
a primitive root in v. Thus from Kaf-,bnrn; (originally
pouVy the imperfect T. F. are /cat- (Att. /câ-), x«- (poet. x«0-
2 is dropped in the imperfect T. F., sometimes with, more fre¬
quently without, compensation : in the other tenses it is dropped
before o-,* but generally reappears before p, r, or Ô. It is not
always easy to determine with certainty what was the final con¬
sonant of verbs ranged under this class ; many exhibit traces of
a lost dental mute, which of course appears as <r before p, t, or
Û. Thus from icXao- (/cXaÔ- ?), break ; airaa- {a-irah-1), drarv ;
vaa--y dwell ; reXeo--, comjglete (compare the subst. TcXto--, n. end) ;
icKeih-y shut (KX€tâ-, f. key)y the imperfect tense-forms are «Xa-,
íTTra-, vai-y reXe- (poet. TeX€¿-), kXíi-,
271. The imperfect tenses, present and past, are made from
the imperfect tense-form (increased form), by the addition of
the person-endings, with the connecting vowels proper to the
several moods and persons (§§ 236, 240).
272. In the First Conjugation (verbs in Û) the personal suf¬
fixes of the singular are much disguised, coalescing with the
connecting vowel. It is to be observed that,
(1.) In the 1 p. sing, pres.-imperf. indie, act., -pt is dropped,
and 0 lengthened into o) : Xva> for Xvopt.
In the 2 and 3 pp. sing. -ioX and -ert become -us and -ft. In
the present subj. the t becomes subscript, -r¡s and -¡j.
* But see § 40, n.
86
TERES
In the 3 p. plur. -oi/îtï (for -ovrX) becomes -ov<ri;: Xvovct for
XvoiTi. The original form in ovtX was retained in Doria With
XvoiTi compare the Latin solvunt
(2.) In the 2 p. sing, of the pres. indie, mid. -tj or -ei results
from -€(tr)ai : Xv.v or Xvei for Xueaat (§ 48) : €t is the pure Attic
form, and the only existing form in the three words otet, thm
thinkest; ßovXei, tkou wisJiest ¡ and oyj^ei, thou wilt see. In like
manner a is dropped in the subj., Xvrj (never Xvft) for Xinjo-at.
(3.) In the 3 p. sing, past-imperf. indie, act. the sufiSx v (for t,
§ 55) was only retained before vowels and the longer pauses
(§ 56).
(4.) In the 2 p. sing, of the past-imperf. indie., and of the
imperf. imperat., in the middle voice, -oy arises from c(<r)o :
fXvov for €Xv€o-o, Xvou for Xveo-o. In the 2 p. sing, past subj. mid.
-oto arises from -oteo.
(5.) In the 2 p. sing, imperf. imperat. act. the ending -ÔX is
dropped ; Xv-e, loosen I for Xu-c-Öi.
(6.) In the infin. act. -at of the ending -e-fievat was thrown
away ; /i was then dropped, and e-ev contracted to eiv : Xv-civ for
Xv-€'fi€v, from Xxf-e-fievai*
(7.) The C. F. of the participle in the active ends in -ovt (m.
and n. ; -ovaa, f.) ; in the middle and passive in -ofievo (f. -ofxeva).
For the declension see §§ 152, 144.
273. Verbs whose crude forms end in a, f, or o, regularly con¬
tract those vowels with the connecting vowels of the endings
according to the rules laid down in § 33.t Hence they are called
Contract Yerbs. Verbs ending in the weak vowels t or v do not
suffer contraction (§ 32).
274. The past-imperfect indie., active and middle, will of course
have the augment prefixed.
* Such forms as Xvtfitv and Xvtjievat are found, however, in the
older poets.
f The four verbs ^a-, live; tniva-, be hungry; be thirsty;
XPCL- (™-)» ^ others, contract into -q (p) instead of à (^) ;
thus we find in the infin. ^íjv, 'Truvqv, ènj/qVf xpqaOat, for Ttiiväv,
etc.; and in the india Kgy etc., for etc. Similarly pîyo-,
freezet contracts into w and y, as well as into ov and ot: infin. piytav
and plyovv; subj. pXytp and plyoi, etc. Monosyllable roots ending in £-
only take those contractions which issue in ei: thus, from ttXc-, saik is
found ttXéw, I sail, not wXw; but the 2 p. is regularly ttXéií: for TrXfcis;.
VERBS.
87
275. Future Tense-Form, — From the future tense-form is
deduced the future tense, active and middle. It is regularly
made by the addition of -(f)o- to the crude form of the verb ;
the € is usually dropijed: as, \v-, loosen; >ûo--, shall loosen.
The future is thus formed in all words ending in vowels or mute
consonants. The gutturals combine with <r to make | ; the
labials to make yj/- ; the dentals and <t are rejected before it (§§
39, 40) : as, ay-, lead ; ypä(j>-, write ; ah-, sing ; o-itevh-, four ;
TfXícr-, complete: future T. F. a¿-, ypayj/--, atr-, o-Treto"- (§ 41),
276. The o- of the future is generally added to the crude form
of the verb : thus, rvir-, beat ; (JivXäK-, watch ; (j)päh-, tell, the
increased forms of which are tvttt-, (f>v\aa-a--, <t)pa^-, have in the
future Tvyjr-, (pvXa^-, (ßpäa--. But in those verbs (Class IL) which
end in mutes, and make their increased forms by lengthening
the radical vowel, and in some others, the future is made from
the increased form ; thus, Xitt-, leave, I. F. Xenr-, future T. F.
Xeiyj/-, not Xiyfr- ; Xa/3-, talie, I. F. Xvß- and Xapß-av-, future T. F.
XjjyJ/^ (Ion. Xapyjr-).
277. Verbs ending in a vowel have the vowel lengthened
before o- of the future ; a becomes â if e, i, or p precede, other¬
wise 7/ : thus C. F. dpa-, do ; ea-, allow ; ripa-, honour ; nou-,
malte ; èovXo-, enslave ; Xv-, loosen : future T. F. Öpäa--, eäo--, tï-
pTj(T-, iroiTja--, hovXaxT-, Xv(r-. There are some exceptions to this
rule ; but of these the greater number are apparent only, a final
consonant (cr or Ô) having been lost between the vowel of the
root and the future a : thus, T€Xç{(r)-, complete, future reXea-
(§ 279).
278. Verbs ending in X, p, v, p, originally retained the old form
of the future, ecr : as, ßaX-, throw, future T. F. ßaXea--, not ßaXa- ;
(T was then omitted (§ 48), and, in Attic, contraction ensued of
' with the vowels of the person-endings : äpvv-, ward off; ayyeX-,
announce ; vep-, distribute ; (¡)6(p-, destroy : future T. F. àpijve-,
ayyeXe-, vepç-, tfißcpe-, for àpvvea-, etc. Three verbs, kcX-, drive
to land ; Kvp-, meet ; op-, rouse, form the future in cr without e
— TceXcr-, Kvpcr-, opa-,
279. Attic Future.— Many verbs ending in aô and tS, whose
futures end in aa- and to-, and others which exhibit in thé future
<r preceded by a short vowel, frequently throw out a (§ 48) ;
contraction then ensues of a or e with the person-endings,
88
VERBS.
according to the usual rules : thus, tXä-, drive ; T€Xf(o-)-, com¬
plete: future T. F, cXair-, TcXeír-; 1 p. pl. €\a<ToyL€v {eKaopiiv),
€\Q)fÁ€Uy T€\«TOfji€v (reXeo/ifv), TfXovfxfv, Between t and the per¬
son-endings the original e was retained, and then contracted;
KopXè-j convey^ fut. 1 p. pi. K0fU(T0fi€v, or KOfnovfiev (not «o/aio/xc»').
This form is called the Attic future.
Other irregularities, affecting individual verbs, will be noticed
in the tables, or found in dictionaries.
280. The person-endings of the future tense are, in the indica¬
tive, the same as those of the present-imperfect ; in the sub¬
junctive (opt.), as those of the past-imperfect. There is no
future of the imperative. In the infinitive and participle the
endings are those of the imperfect.
281. In the active and middle there exist no special forms for
the future-indefinite, the simple future in <r being indefinite in
verbs of an active^ imperfect only in verbs of a static significa¬
tion (§ 231). Thus, XvcTio, I shall loosen, is indefinite ; irtyr/o-o),
I shall he silent, is imperfect : ap^at is either indefinite, I shall
obtain the command, or imperfect, I shall exercise rule. But the
passive voice possesses a distinct future-indefinite (§ 331), and
the simple future in cr is used only as a future-imperfect : this
future is, consequently, much more frequently found with the
middle, than with the passive signification ; and hence it is
usually called the future middle. It is, however, no less a tense
of the passive voice than the corresponding forms of the present
and past imperfect, and is always employed when its peculiar,
shade of meaning is required.*
282. The future middle is often found with an active signifi¬
cation, especially in verbs expressing some act of the body end¬
ing in oneself, so that a reflective form is reasonable : as, okov-,
hear ; aS-, sing ; ßahXb-, walk : futures, aKovcropai, I shall hear ;
atTopai, I shall sing ; ßädiovpai, I shall walk.
283. For the future perfect, see §§ 308, 309.
284. Perfect Tenses.—From the perfect tense-form are made
the present and past perfect tenses of the active middle and
passive, and the future perfect (sometimes called the third future),
which is for the most part confined to the middle and passive.
* As in Soph. Phil. 48, «rat ^vXa^iTai GTißoQ, which Schneidewin
interprets by tv tpvXaKy ecrai.
VERES,
89
285. The leading characteristic of the perfect tenses is the
reduplication, which consists in prefixing to the root its initial
consonant followed by the vowel c. In verbs compounded with
prepositions the reduplication is inserted between the prepo¬
sition and the root : as, Xv-, loosen, peifect T. F. XeXu- ; but €k\v~,
perfect T. F. ej<XeXv-.
The reduplication is retained through all the moods, and in
the participles.
286. In forming the reduplication the following rules are to be
observed :—
a. If the C. F. of the verb begin with an aspirated consonant,
the corresponding tenuis is substituted in the reduplication
(§ 44) : as, place; 6v-, sacrifice; (ppâà-, tell: perfect
T. F. K€xcûpr)-y T€Ôv-y 7r€(ppâà-.
K If the C. F. of the verb begin with two consonants (not a
mute and liquid), or with a double consonant, or with p^ the
syllabic augment (e) is prefixed instead of the reduplication (p
being at the same time doubled*): pay-, hreak; oreX-, send;
seek ; perfect T, F. cppùyy-, ctrraX-, But Acra- (m.),
acquire; pva- (m.), remember; and ora-, stand, make kcktt]-,
p€p,ur)'y ioTT]- for {aearrj-)»
c. If the C. F. of the verb begin with a mute followed by a
liquid, the mute only appears in the reduplication : as, ypäfp-,
write; n-Xay-, strike; irvef-, breathe: perfect T.F. ytypa^-, TrenXrjy-,
Trenvev-. But verbs beginning with yv take the augment only ;
verbs beginning with ß\, yX, have both formations (§ 60, b.).
287. Words beginning with a vowel have the initial vowel
lengthened, as in the case of the temporal augment : as, opêo-,
straighten, perfect T.F. a>pda)-.
288. Some verbs beginning with a, e, or o, take, however, in¬
stead of this augmented vowel, what is termed the Attic
reduplication, which consists in a repetition of the first syllable
of the root, the original initial vowel being lengthened : as,
• The ground of this peculiarity appears to be that initial phad been,
in the old language, almost always preceded by f ; hence the perfects of
verbs beginning with p were only entitled to the augment, and when f
was removed p was doubled. Compare pay-, with Latin frag- ; pi^-,
throw ; pi^o-, make to strike root; pey-, work, with the German werfen,
Wurzeh Werk : fprj^i-, for pn^i-, breaking, is cited by a grammarian
from Alc¿eus. (Alirens.)
90
VERBS
aKov'{aKof-),li€ar ; ikvô-, come'y opvx'idig: perfect T. F. u/ci/ko-,
iKr¡\vÓ-y opa)pvx<
289. The verbs *0X0-, he taken; ây-, hreak; ik-, &cem; cô- (or
r)ô-)j he accustomed; av-oiy-, open^ which originally began with f,
have in their perfect, ¿aXca-, eây-, eot*-, (and €a>B-), ap-c(py-
(from f«/âXû)-, etc.).
Other irregularities will be noticed in the Tables of Principal
Parts.
290. Perfect Active Tense-Form.—In the older stage of the
language a perfect active was seldom formed from any other than
root-verbs. If the root ended in a vowel, k was inserted between
that vowel and the person-endings. In Attic Greek, however,
the formation of a perfect active was extended to all classes of
verbs, and the insertion of k became a leading feature of the
tense, the older and simpler form of the tense being retained
only in root-verbs. Thus of the perfect active two forms are to
be distinguished, the older, or (so called) 2nd perfect, and the
more recent, or 1st perfect. The 2 perf., again, is sometimes
called the strong, and the 1 perf. the weak form of the tense.
291. Older, or Second, Perfect.—The 2 perf. is much the less
frequent form of the tense. It is formed immediately from the
C. F. of the verb, but the following vowel-changes must be
attended to : a is lengthened into à after p, otherwise into t) ; as,
Kpäy-, cry out ; ïrXay-, strike ; perfect T. F. KCKpäy-, wcnXrjy- ; but
pay-, break, has eppayy- : € becomes o ; as, yep-, become, peif. T. F.
yeyov-. Verbs of class IL a. generally use the increased form in
the perfect, as in the future, ft becoming 01 ; as, Xitt- (XftTr-),
leave; (/)vy- {<j>^vy^,Jlee : perf. T. F. XfXotTr-, ireepevy-.
292. First Perfect.—The 1 perf. tense-form is made by adding
K to the reduplicated root : as, Xu-, loosen, perf. T. F. XeXií/c-. The
final vowel of pure verbs is regularly lengthened before k, as be¬
fore tr of the future.
293. In words ending in any of the guttural or labial mutes *
is not added, but the final mute is aspirated instead : as, ßXäß-,
thwart, hurt ; kott-, cut ; ây-, lead ; (¡>v\àk-, watch : 1 perf. T. F.
jSe/SXa^-, K€Ko(¡>-, 7JX-, 7re<l)v\âx- : and x? of course, undergo no
change,—ypâej)-, write, 1 perf. T. F. y€ypâ<j>-. Three verbs, irepir-,
send; rpeir-, turn; kXítt-, steal, change c into o in the 1 perf.,
ir67rop(^-, T€Tpo(f>- (also rerpacf)-), K€K\o(j>-.
294. The dental mutes go out before k : as, <ppâà- tell ; irïô*
(ttciÔ-) persuade : 1 perf. T. F. 7r€(ppäK-, ireneiK-.
VERBS.
91
295. Monosyllabic words ending in X, v, or p, and having e as
their radical vowel, change this e into a in the 1 perf. : as, oreX-,
send; (¡)Ô€p-, destroy: 1 perf. T.F. €crraXK-, e(f>ÛQpK-: final p is
often thrown out :* rev-, stretch; Kpïp-, judge: perf. T. F. Tera«-,
KÇKpÏK-, The perfects of ßoK-, throw ; Kap-, toil ; rep-, cut ; ôav-,
die, suffer transposition of the vowel, which is then lengthened,
߀ß\r]K-, K€KpT¡K-, T€Tpr¡K~, T€êpr)K (7netatheSÍs),f
296. From some verbs both forms of the perfect are made.
The 1 perf. is then usually transitive, the 2 perf. intransitive :
the 2 perf. of some verbs is intransitive even when no 1 perf. ia
found.
297. The person-endings of the present perfect of the indie,
active are attached by means of a connecting vowel a : the 1 p.
sing, takes no suffix, the final ï is dropped in the 2 and 3 pp. sing,
and in the 3 p. ä becomes e, v (for r) being retained before vowels
and the longer stops : in the 3 p. plur. -avri becomes -äaX.
298. The person-endings of the past-perfect indie, active are
those of the historical tenses, but these are attached to the
tense-form by means of the diphthong ei.J In the 3 p. plur. the
ending is -aav, and the connecting vowel e, not et. In the older
Attic the forms of the singular end in -r¡, -rjç, -€í(v), contracted
from the earlier Ionic -ea, -eas, -€€{v) ; and e seems to have been
used rather than in the 1 and 2 pp. plur.
299. In the past-perf. indie, the augment is prefixed to the
* Final V of these roots disappears also in other forms, and should
rather be regarded as foreign to the root.
f It has also been proposed to explain these forms as derived, by
syncope, from ßißäXrjK', etc. (§ 46, n.),
f Such is the usual explanation of the syllables a and h in the perfect
tenses of the active. It has been argued, however, with much proba¬
bility that these vowels are rather integral elements of the tenses in
question, corresponding to that element which in the Latin stands
between the sibilated (or other) perfect tense-form and the person-
endings, and ])erhaps representing the verb be. Thus, ¿(tttjk-tj or
¿orrjK-ia (i. e. éarrjK-ecr-a ?), I had stationed myself, will answer to stei-
ëra-m, éarrjK-rjç or èarTiK-ea-ç to stet-ëra'S, karriK-taa-v to stet-ëra-nt,^ic.
The 1 person suffix, which is wanting to the form in -tj, is seen in the
common iarrjueiv. This view will be found consistent with that pre¬
sented in § 337» n.; iarä-aäv, they were placing, iarrjK-eaà-v, they were
from placing (themselves). Key, Lot. Gr. § 475, ».
92
reduplicated root ; it is, however, very frequently omitted in
Attic Greek.
300. In the subjunctive the perfect (present and past) has the
same endings as the imperfect. In the past-perfect the endings
-otrjv, ~oir)Sy -oirj, are preferred for the singular, as in contract verbs.
301 The imperative of the perf. act. is only found in a few
isolated forms, almost exclusively of verbs whose perf. is used as
a new present ; the old ending of the 2 sing, in $ï is preferred :
as, ia-râÔïy stand ! reôvâôï, die ! Tedrarci), let Mth die / K€Kpa)(ßXy
shout! y€y(ûv€, speak!
302. The ending of the infinitive is -evai (for -pcvai*) ; the
C. F. of the participle ends in -or (m. and n. ; -via, f.). For the
declension see § 153.
303. Perfect Middle and Passive.—The present and past per¬
fect tenses of the mid. and pass, are formed by adding to the
reduplicated T. F. the same person-endings as in the imperfect
tenses, but without any connecting vowel : thus, Xv-, looseUy
perfect T. F. XcXu-, 1 p. perf. indie, mid. XcXii/iat, 2 p. XeXvo-ai, etc. :
past perf. indie. ikeXvpijv, etc. : infin. XeXvo-Ôat, partie. XcXv/iero-.
304. The perfect tenses of the subjunctive are formed by
means of the perf. partie, passive and the corresponding mood
of etr-, he.'f
305. The same rules apply on the lengthening of the final
vowel of contract verbs as in the 1 perf. active. In like manner
€ of monosyllabic roots ending in X, v, p, passes into a : rpe(^-
{Ôp€(j)'), nourish; rpen-, tum; and (rrp€(p~, twisty siso change e
into a in the perf. passive : as, reOpappaiy I have heen nourished^
Tcrpappai, eoTpappau
306. As the person-endings begin with consonants, in annex¬
ing these to roots ending in a consonant various changes become
necessary :—
Ä. Before p (§ 38),
C. F. 1 p. perf pas.
any guttural becomes y ; ttXck-, plait, iteiik^ypat.
dental o- : iriÓ- (îrei^-), persuade, iT€irçL<rpai.
labial p : ypacf)-, write, yeypappai.
* The fuller suffix is seen in the Epic forms IcTaptvai and eoraptr.
idpevm and idpev,
t From KTw (in.), acquire, and a very few other verbs, are formed
KeKT(t)pai,^KeKTypr¡v (also -ypijv), etc.
■\'ERr.S
93
[loots ending in yy, yxt lose y and ¡x before those endings
vhich begin with fi : as, o-(;f>tyy-, squeeze ; Ka^xir-, lend ; 1 p. perf.
Das, €<r<})iyfjiai, not eaipiyyfjLat ; KCKafXfxai, not KfKafxfxfxai. N befoiB
i generally becomes o-, sometimes /i. Those verbs which drop
inal V in the perfect active (§ 295), drop it in the passive also.
h. Before o- (§§ 39, 40),
C, F, 2 p. perf, pas,
any guttural becomes k : ray-, array, rera^ai (kc).
dental is dropped : -jvid-, TreTreto-at.
labial becomes tt : ypatp-, y€ypa\j/-ai (îto-).
c. Before t (§§ 36, 37),
C. F, 3 p. perf pas,
any guttural becomes k ; ray-, TcraKTai,
dental o* : irW-, Tr^rreíoraí.
labial TT : ypà(f>-, yçypaiTTai,
d. CT of <rô is dropped when a consonant immediately precedes,
bhe preceding consonant being subjected to the usual laws
(§ 48) ; as, Teraxôe, ßeßXaifyÖat, for r^rayuQ^, ß^ßkaßaQai,
e. The endings of the 3 p. plur., -vrai and -vro, cannot be pro¬
nounced after roots ending in a consonant. Sometimes the Ionic
endings, -arat, -aro, are substituted, before which y, k, ß, tt, are
aspirated : as, C. F. ray-, Teraxarai, they have heen arrayed. More
frequently a circumlocution is employed of the perf. part, with
bhe 3 p. plur. of the pres. and past tenses of €o--, he: as, 7r€7r€t<r-
aevoL (or -pepai) etat, they have heen persuaded ; tt. r¡(Táv, they had
been persuaded,
307. In many verbs ending with a vowel, <t appears to be
inserted before p. and r in the perfect passive : as, C. F. reXe-,
complete; o-Tra-, draw; aKOV-, hear: perf. pass. rereXecr/xat, eoTra-
trrai, riKovapeSâ. In most of these caseä, especially when the
preceding vowel is short, it will be found that the o- is rather
part of the root, and has disappeared from it in other forms of
the verb, or represents some other consonant which has so
disappeared (§ 270).
308. Future Perfect (^rd Future), Mid, and Pass.—This tense
adds <T to the perfect T, F., and takes the person-endings of
the principal tenses {-opai, etc.) : as, C. F. Xv-, loosen; TTpäy-, do:
\ p. fut. perf. XeXva-opai, ireirpa^opai. This tense is not formed
from verbs whose C. F. ends in a liquid.
94
VERBS
309. Two instances only occur of a future-perfect in the active,
and these are from verbs whose perfects have acquired the force
of a new present : shall stand ; reOvrj^, shall he dead. In
other cases, when a fut.-perf. is required in the active, it is
formed by means of the perf. part, and the future of co--, he :
XeXvKioff (-fcvta) ecrofiai, I shall have loosened.
310. Aorist (or Indefinite) Tenses.—The indicative mood pos¬
sesses no special form for the present-indefinite, I strike : in the
lew instances in which this tense is required the past-indefinite
is generally employed. Hence by the term aorist the past-
indeßnite is usually meant, unless the contrary is specified : yet
the subjunctive contains distinct forms for the present and past
indef. ; the aorist imperative is, of course, present ; and the in¬
finitive of the aorist, as of the other tenses, is either present or
past : the aorist participle, like the aorist indicative, is almost
exclusively a past-indefinite. The passive voice has a ñiture-
indefinite throughout.
310.* Of the Aorist Tense, as of the Perfect, there are two
distinct forms : the older form, commonly called the Second
Aorist; and the more recent, commonly called the First Aorist:
the 2 aor. is sometimes termed the strong form of the tense,
and the 1 aor. the weak form. These tenses are identical in
meaning, and are seldom both formed from the same verb, or (if
formed from the same verb) both in use at the same period.
See, however, § 323.
311. The middle aorists have not, like the imperfect tenses of
the middle, the signification of the passive as weU : thus, ervyj/^a-
fjLTjv (1 aor. mid.) is only I struck myselß not I rvas struck. The
passive voice possesses a distinct form for the aorist, as it does
for the future-indefinite.
312. The aorists, first and second, take the augment in the
indicative.
313. Older, or Second Aorist Tense-Form.—From the 2 aor.
tense-form is deduced the 2 aor. tense, active and middle. The
tense-form is the pure crude form of the verb.
314. In many verbs having e for their radical vowel, this e
passes into a in the 2 aor. : as, rpíir-, tum, 2 aor. T. F. Tpair-, or,
with the augment, f^rpair-. The 2 aor. of ay-, lead, äyay-, and a
few other 2 aorists which are only used in poetry, are formed by
reduplication.
VEJIBS.
95
315. The inflexion of the 2 aor., active and middle, is the same
as that of the imperfect in all the moods.
316. The 2 aor. is for the most part only found in verbs which
have an increased form diflerent from the pure crude form.
Hence it is (with a few exceptions, § 332) not found in vowel-
verbs.
317. First Aorist Tense-Form.—From the 1 aor. tense-form is
deduced the 1 aor, tense, active and middle. The tense-form is
made by the addition of the syllable a-a to the crude form of the
verb: C.F. Xv-,ypa(^-, TfX€(o-)-, laor.T.F. fXvora-, cypayp-a-y creXco-a-.
The remarks in § 275, etc., on the modification of consonants
and vowels before o- of the future, apply equally to this tense.
318. Words ending in X, p., Vy or p, which form the future with¬
out (T, also reject o- in the 1 aor. The radical vowel is lengthened
in compensation : â becomes ä after e, t, or p, otherwise t) ; «
becomes ei ; Ï and v become t and v. Observe, however, that
"âp-, raise, and *aX- (m.), leap, though presenting in the 1 aor,
indie, by virtue of the augment, have ä, not r), in the other
moods. A few other verbs have à for rj even in Attic, as «epSac-,
gain; KoCkav-, make holloro ; \^vKav, whiten ; opyav-,make angry :
1 aor. T. F. (with the augment) ik^vKàva-, é/c^pódi/a-, cKotXaya-,
(lûpyâva-. Some verbs, as (rrjpäv-, shew ; Kaôâp-, cleanse ; Tçrpàv-,
here; and piav-, pollute, vary between à and r¡, (o-rjprjva- and ea-rj-
pâva-, etc. The four verbs ap-,fit, «eX-, Kvp-, op- (§ 278), and k€pt-€-
goad, make the 1 aor. regularly in o-a, rjpaa-, e/ceXca-, çKcpaa-, mpa-a-,
tK€p(ra- : päx' ^ other words insert e before cr,
epax^o'äptjv, JJought, etc.
319. In affixing the person-endings, observe that
In the 1 p. sing, indie, act. v is not added : in the 3 p. a passes
into f, and v is retained before vowels and the longer pauses,
€TV\Ia€v or (Tvype.
In the 2 p. sing, indie, mid. a(a-)o becomes œ.
In the present tense of the subj. act. and mid. a of the tense-
form is absorbed in and jj of the endings ; and in the past
tense it combines with the mood-vowel i to form at.
In the 2 and 3 p. sing, and the 3 p. plural of the past subj. act.
the forms of the .¿EoHc aorist, -eiaç, -ete(j'), -€iup, are preferred
even in Attic.
The 2 p. sing„ imperat. act. has a suffix r, and a passes into o :
in the 2 p. sing, imperat. mid. t is added for the person-ending.
96 VERBS.
320. In the infin. act. the mood-ending, the syllable /¿ei/ being
dropped, coalesces with a of the tense-form into the diphthong
at. The infin. mid. ends, without change, in -ao-^ai.
The C. F. of the particip. in the active ends in -avr (m. and n. ;
•âa-a, f.) ; in the middle in -afxevo (m. and n. ; -a/icfo, f.) For the
declension see §§ 152, 144.
321. Three forms of the 1 aor. will be found to coincide
exactly, the 3 p. sing, past subj. act., the infin. act., and the 2 p.
sing, imper. mid. In accented Greek these forms are often dis¬
tinguishable by a difference of accent.*
322. The 1 aor. is the form of the aorist tense for all verbs
which cannot, (and for many which can), form the 2 aor. Hence
it is found in all contract verbs, in most verbs ending in a liquid,
and in all derived verbs.
323. From some verbs both forms of the aorist are made, the
1 aor. having a transitive, the 2 aor. an intransitive signification
(§ 333).
324. Aorists Passive.—The aorist of the passive is made from
a different tense-form from that employed in the active and
middle. There are two forms of the tense, as in the other voices.
325. Older, or Second Aorist.—The tense-form of the 2 aor. is
made by adding € to the pure C. F, of the verb. As in the 2 aor.
active, € in monosyllabic roots is sometimes changed into a;
C. F. TV7r~, stri/ic ; Tpe(j>-, nourisTi- : 2 aor. T. F. ti-ttc-, rpacpe- ;
whence erv-nriju, I was struck ; €Tpâ(j>7jv, I was nourished.
326. First Aorist.—The tense-form of the 1 aor. is made by
adding de to the pure C. F. of the verb. On the necessary
changes of final consonants before d, see §§ 36, 37. The final
vowels of vowel-verbs are, with few exceptions, lengthened, as
* The 3 p. sing, of the aor. past subj. act. always has the acute
accent on the penult., the inf. act. is always accented on the penult., with
the circumflex if the vowel be long, the imper. mid. is accented (with the
acute) on the antepenult, in a word of more than two syllables, but in a
disyllable it will be identical with the inf. act. : thus, from the roots
ßovXtv-, advise; tvtt-, strike ; irpáy-, do; kax-e-, call, we shall have
Fast subj. act. Inf. act. Imper. mid.
ßovXivaai (or ßov\evaHi{v), etc.) ßovXivaai ßovX(vaau
Tv\pai Tvxi'ai Tv\pai.
wpáKai TTpä^ai • -n-pà^ai.
KoXkaai KaXioai ráXíoat.
Parti¬
ciple.
Infin¬
itive.
Imperative.
Subjunctive.
Indicative.
Greet C. F.
Increased Forms.
English.
u
-0
S3
Ä
T¡Í
a
t?í
25
uQ
:3
rjJ
1
>
O
H
<
H
S
S
"k
Past
(Optative.)
Present
(Sdbjunctive.)
Past-
Imperfect.
Present-
Imperfect
¿
'S
-i
<s
hd ü cß
lo jo fo
^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^
•í 4 -í -1 ¿ -1
£ ^ £ 2 £
9 £ ^ ^
P< rs
^ o
>-í
N Ü E»
îo
ooooooqo
2 A 's -i à Ô -ft
ft fn m «3 q <-c
ft ft ft ,
^ Ü W3
jo
¿a £a-a^« g
q a "è
2c en a o o
o ft ft ft
s-/
^0 £zî
to
OfnOcnenoicnQ
ft -i -ft -t cf. «-. ft
en a a q ft ^
ft ft ft w
^ ü î»
jo
q "ft -1 -i *q
pj m a © q
ft ^ ft
f V
i '
O
-i
a
3 §
^ sl
a 5
o
-1
-O-
•ö
ß
«rx
0
's
■i
1
R
5
3
p s
•«S •*
ri
i
p
p -o. á h í-'
"0 -3 S 2
p p ^
-1 7
2 è -"
, R q a si'
ft p 3 ^
>c"V ft 7 i
^ q ft o 2
¿ "i, 2 "i<î<
í/ ?<"
p -c- ^ a
"p -3 s s
5 ft ä =i
q 7 7
s' £ ? £ ..^
¿ ^ e -
^ i>v en Ol Ol
3 -
p ä R
q 7 7
<q ? q 2
q ft ¿
1.^ "* 1
p -©. á a
V© *3 s 2
-s P p =í a
q 7 7
í' £ 9 £ 5
¿ ' e ^
ft 2 5
3 í v
* -í h
S? « <s
fa'
9 5=^'
1?
p p p
s "-S -v»
s -x» ^
R ^>-
S >" >
O
o
H
£
g
n
¿
5p
1
o
rt
p
"SS
o
f
«
fl>
ó
1
o
"ft"
g
??
rñ
o
o
o
h
"í
a
0
's
1
I'
£
■hi
/—n
!•
P
■£'
Pl
3.3,3,3,3.3.3,
p p p p p p p
ft, o Ol <Vi fn li fn
■i 'S 3 'i "Í
£ ^ '^ £ o £
3 £ si ^
Pc ^
'S c
•-s
H 1 a, -i a, -Í -1
-ft -R -s -s -p -5
Pi £ Pi Pi Pi Pi Pi
^ 3 3 'i
£ M '*' £ 2 £
q £ ^
Pc 'S
^ C
►-í
3|3,3,3,3.3.3,3,
^pp$|tp$dpp
ooooqoco_
2 a ^555"
ft en o, .a o Oft
ft ft ft
3,3,3,3,3,3i3,3,
2 3"P H laacs
^ 2 "ft5 2 ^ ^
ft ft ft
3i 3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 3,
"P'P'P'R^'P'P'P -
£a ¿¿¿«¿la £
q -i -R 1 -i o
a< o> a o o
ft ft ft
3, a, 3, 3i 3i 3i 3, 3,
*£ "pi*£ ^1 P'^ ^ *£
q H "ft "Í o
2c cn a q o
ft ft ft
3, 3. 3, 3| 3, 3, 3, 3,
1^"P"P"P'P"R1
Ofooenoioioio
ft ft ft w
3, 3, 3| 3| 3i 3, 3, 3,
1 "pil "pi'pi'pi'pil
ft a ^ 3 ^
ft ft ft
3, 3. 3, 3, 3, a, 3, 3,
'R'Í^'PI'E P"!
Ooiooioioioie-
1 a-e 3 3 -'s ^
ä 's ^
ft
3, 3, 3, 3. 3, 3, 3, 3,
"1 "pi"! "pi*Ri^ ^ *£
9c3"s3 3
ft ft ^
1.-/
q 3.
as -í'
o 9
R P
a '
a
2
¿
's
■?
A
O
«s
'S
-í
/-s
p
3
T
?
p
3
?
p p p p p p p
a â 3 3 3 3 3
^ ¿ ¿ ¿ rj ¿ i
S ^ ^ £ 2 S
§,l
o
•-J
p p p p p p p
a ^ ^ a ^ 3 ^
§ 1 3 e 3 £
§,Í ^
o
pppppppp
33333333
©¿¿oo¿¿¿
23"€^^'S-Sa
ft 'n o, a o Oft
ft ft ft
PPPPPPPP
qqoooooo
2 i ^âa-3
ft en m a o Oft
ft ft ft
pppppppp
33333333
¿á ¿¿¿■¿'á g
q a Ts 'í o
2c en s q q
ft ft ft
PPPPPPPP
33^3^3^
ga £-3a«3'ft3 £
p 3 ^ 3 3
Pc en s q o
O ft ^ ^
v-/
'ftjxs'a'ej'is'a'a'a
33333333
OenoeórñrñrnA
« s-g ^ 3 's
ft ft ft W
<a'ci'>s'*s'*s<«s'>s'ft5
^^3*^33333
1 sil s 1
ç <i .e
pppppppp
^3333333
|â|33~â®
 « «
ft
Nw^
pppppppp
OoiOíSenenP
-s -
ft 9
% a
o»
A
ü
ti
M
•i
n.f
o
c
>-
o
c-
)
/--v
o
ís
>"
o
<Äi
o
cr
>"
o
«
óí Oí Oí Oí Oí Oí Oí
o o o o o o o
«««««««
O O O O O O O
s 2 ^ H H ^
£ ^ '^ £ 2 £
q £ ft ^
P< ft
'S ¿
■1
^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^
« O ft <S <S o ft
0 o o o o o o
ft ft ft « ft ft ft
1 ft a ^
s a s 2 £
q £ ft
P< ft
'=: o
oooqoooo
oooqoooo
23"s^35-S-S
^^2-5s2 oft
ft ft ft
OOOOOOOO
2 H"R 3 2-255
^ ft *§ 1 «q ^
Oí Oí Oí Oí Oí Oí Oí Oí
oooooqoo
ooqqqqqq
£5'£^-¿'«¿'»¿ £
9c 3 "S 2 3
ç' ft ft ft
s_^
«ísftcíftftftft
£££££2P£
q -1 *R 'I a o
^ rn fn o q
ft ft ft
v«/
oimmoioioi/yioi
Oí Oí Oí Oí Oí Oí Oí Oí
oooooooq
qqqooooq
OnjOenoioifno
ft ft ft w
cnoimoioioicnrn
OíOíOíOíOíOíOíOí
qqoooqoo
qqqooqqq
««««««««
ft a ^ J «q ft
5 ft ft
Oí Oí Oí Oí Oí Oí Oí Oí
OOOOOOOO
Cft<Sc;<SíSC<s
oooooooo
Oenocnrnmoe.
§ a-e 3 3 - " ®
a 5 r: «
ft
ooooooop
lalii"-'
<i ü
s2- i
ft V
q ?
Parti¬
ciple.
Infin¬
itive.
Imperative.
Subjunctive.
Past.
(Optative.)
Present.
(Subjunctive.)
Indicative.
Past'
Imperfect.
PiTsent-
Imperfect.
^ 2
C5 7T
2 ^
rr> I
>• '
-2 Ö
^ a
? §
o 9
hj
CS « « « « 52 «
q q c» q q q ^
^ i® ® cd
£ £ "^ £ 2 £
q ^ «S ^
ft
««■sics^gcsc-ä
¿.S ^
^ Í.'¿ ¿ ¿"s ^ "¿
ö'»>ct>oo5d*" s
^ Pc^« 'S ®
a. 'S ^ o >-
a ïi
•-«í "ö *5
a a
^ J>: q
?§
a -©■ ^
"c -5
w vtx q
3 r
"ô "3 S 2
a a 3 tí
"^■^a -j ?
^ r
c'a 2~î= s
-s -gT: -g
a js .3 ^ >
r e
-R £ "a
.s¿ sb
%• '
^•3
q ^
s Q
a -S- a
y *0 "3
:3
§^•3 ^
s. a)
a a.
S
1:1"^
sT^ a ûi
.rv tïc
"a
£
"a
M *-l H ^
^ 5D *-b ^ ^ ^
£ £ '^ £ g £
q 'S 'S ^
a< ft
3, 3,3,3, 3. 3, 3, 3, 3,
'S'a'a r-r-a*r-r-s
aaaaaaaaa
£.¿ £.¿cs ¿¿-sa £
^q-aqq-sh ^
^cofe<i>qiaa 5
a'«?>23<a5'" s
Í« a< 'S a o
3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 3,
'£"£'^*£'£-£'£'^'€
^qlsqq-r-îo-r
o m cb^ o qs w
a< Si 'S 2 ^
a a a a a a a
q r; q q q q
q q q q q q ç»
^ O ^ ^
££«,£■ 2 e
a a a a a a a
3 3 3 3 3 3 3
q q q q q q «s
sa Ó cb CD Qi ^
£ £ "^ £ 2 £
q 's 's 's
§^2
aaaaaaaaa
ooooooooo
^ a q "s
5 05 <Pi -v,
<I>qS O
a( 'S 'S ^
<35
o -R
Ci
Si
aaaaaaaaa
ooooooooo
aaaaaaaaa
333m33333
¿c3 £¿ss ¿.¿"«ö £
I a-| q a-R g -r
R 2 S^'" "
•- a< 'S 'S ®
aaaaaaaaa
a "R a a "R
05 2î qs <35 m
m <35.3 o q»
a< 'S 'S 2
â,l §=§."8
" ^ 1 § ?
; «cj g
Í "§
r "r a r "r
<35 s: 05 <35 m
<*> q5-s o
a< R 's O
«es'cä'ss'rä'ää'ei'ss'ei'iq
0oi02"0200
cir<ssri-r;e*c;
T:
£ a £ a a £ ai-a £
^q-raq~r-i -r
^<35^ <3X353 a o
(5m<^00<3>*» a
S ac 'S 'S o
aaaaaaaaa
5 2.-5
m <^ <3> -
œi o o
acR R ^
<25 «•
' 2 2
<S o
r r
a a a a a a a
omo2i2:aç?'iâo
2 a -.2 a a -S 1
e §?! 1 ?
a
R g
Oí Oí Oí Oí 'Oí Oí Oí
o o o o o o o
^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^
o o o o o o o
fn fn i>i m m fn o
q q q q q q R
05 ^ <^ ^5 ^5 ^5
£ £ '" £ 2 £
a R R ^
Re o
R 't
a a a . . .
^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^
£ £ m e 2 s
a R R ^
R< o
R -í
oí oí oí oí
q "R q q "R
cci 2^ <3> <35 ?■
f" <3>RS O
a<R R
Oí Oí Oí Oí Oí Oí Oí Oí Oí
Parti¬
Infin¬
Subjunctive.
Indicative.
ciple.
itive.
(Optative).
y p
JTÍ b Cß
«1
>'
r.
<Si <Si <-i «1 <Si <31 <-i Ri <3i
«1 <Si <31 <Si RI RI Ri Ri RI
q
q
qqqqi^qqqc^
qqqqq<it<qq<t
c>
•r
i
q
<15
q
OOoOOOOOO
r q t= i ¿ts -h ó ts
q m <35CS q q» «
qcR R o
0<*0'nnio»»«i^0
r q "r ¿ q -r a ^ts
♦i3ioiCb<¿iviqo<o
q 2:>3 o <3>'"OS
q<r r o
V
-ç-
0
*r
O
1
>-
-|N
q
<35
q
^ H V
■R -q q 2
qt q
? ^¿ T
2 2 ^ -S
Ts -r es J
■ss es R ^
R T ■* -
-R -q ^ 5
gc q -^-ç.
.5 .2 ^ "r
T: ts q S
S 2 " -r
■C J
0«-^
q o
o Ts
'S 5
r <?
o J
•q
q
q
"r
?
o
2 q
Q
q -r
-q
q
q
q
;
n
'
rs
'rñ^
1
1»
q
nC*
q
<35
q
ft>
p
"
■*
»
•Ni
q
•Ni
•N»
qqqqqqqqq
-NÍ-NÍ-NÍ-N:-NÍ-NÍ-NÍ-NÍ-NÍ
-NÍ-.i-NÍ-NÍ-^N^-<-Nf-^
qqqqqqqqq
•NÍ-NÍ-NÍ-NÍ-NÍ-^-^^N.;
o
•r
?
1 o
q
<35
q
qqqqqqqqq
R q*R ¿q'R a S-R
N|<C)rvs(:^5^i*q ^
q fn <©.3 o <I> ^
q<r r o ^
R q-R q q-R ■i*'-R
^ <£)s '35cd5 q^-^s
qoic^Oqi^'-jg
q( R R q ^
1 ■"
' -Ni
q
-Ni
•Ni
qqqqqqqqq
•N;-«.J-NÍ-NÍ-..J-N<~^-..>.^
qqqqqqqqq
•NÍ-NÍ-^-NÍ-^-^N.ÍN^^^
•NÍ-NÍ-NÍ-NÍ^V>'^-^N^N<;
' ^
>-
o2;qS2q<*'iaq
q <35r 2 qs^C/S
«- q< ^ o
1 1
( ^
o
q
<35
q
R q "R 5 ¿"R a S -R
la5iv.®<:C>5i,o ^
q fh <35cs q ^
R< R R ^ ^
•s^^q *1,
q -í.
1 ^Ts
R ^ "R
H
>"5
>^-5S es
Ts
CS
T:
.3
e q q
q q q
£ ? 2
q q q
q
Oí'q
q
q
2 'S 'S
"s *3 *3
¿ T: Ts
-R q q
q 2
ö R
l^q
R S
■S -S R
R
s
V-
.
q
e
'
q
2
m q
? -3
q
q ^
" es
q
1
q
o
-r
q
fi
<35
q
"H
R
q
q
O
■
fD
o
H
►
0
crq «
3ri o 2.
00 P ^
Parti¬
Infin¬
SüBJÜNCTIVK.
Indicative.
Fn o
ÇU .
ciple.
itive.
(Optative)
hí b3
o •
•I
B
S.
D
P.
s.
D,
P.
tJi
¡0
v
>'
Ri
<Si
Ri RI <Si Ri <Si Ri Ri Ri
Ri Ri Ri Ri R« Ri <Si -Ri
q
<^
i:|i<||(^q<^q(^<^
ç»qqq<hq<^<i
q
fw
qqqqqqqq
qooo'ïloog
q >'
r
i
1
r
2 "i "r -Í -î ó Ts
R <»> Ol CS q "<
R R R
9cá"S3Í "
T R s
<% ?
s '
"o -3 s 2
^ -q R 2
&->'>'
V
gl a "ir-ç-
? ^¿ T
2 2-r-Ç
o o <-<
ros
R y 1
p 7 -
q
r
i i "
7
3
-ç-
•• «
eis -4
Ö- IR R<
Si
2
»■ s 7
s© j •*
■q R
J!
rîi
qc-^
q q
q R
p
p
© -3 r>
r ^
-q
1
-Í J
q
q
2
q ©1
•
j"
-
q --i
■§
q
R
etc.
etc.
q V
im
q
r
a
•ô.
-q
q(
o.«©.-©.
S.."q -q
r-q q<
R
q
q
qqqqqqqq
qqqqqqqq
-Ni
-Ni
-NÍ-NÍ-NÍN^-NÍ-NÍ-NÍOÍ
-^-^•^'-^-NÍ-NÍN.^-NÍ
-Ni
•NÍ-NÍ-^N^-^-N»-«^-^
-Ni-Nd-Ni-Ni-Ni-NiN^-Ni
q q q
a -Ni -NÍ
a -Ni -i
fj.oooOfyo<^
q
r
R
qqqqqqqq
2 ^*r ^ a-S5-3
¿í5¿2í22¿
«3^23
g
© a "
1
« - ç 5 = « ^
k ^ '=^ ^
r
p
p
ua*
q
q
qqqqqaaa
aaaaaqqq
2.
-Ni
-N
•NÍ-^-NÍ-NÍ-NÍ-NÍN<-NÍ
•Ni-Ni-Ni-Ni-Ni-Ni Ni -Ni
Cb
•Ni
-^-ji-^-^-N(-NÍ-NÍ-N^
•NÍ-NÍ-NÍ-^-NÍ-J^-NÍN^
C
V
R
r
1
1
R
qqqqqoqq
S a"^ 5 a-S-S-s
R o es q <q R
R R R
CI5022Í2£
S -í R -i -s «o
2 o ^ o o
^ 2 r r
r ^
N.-/
e
-t
-3/
h
q -1.
©» q 1.
"r
*r
R ^Ts
R 1 Ts
<s
es
>'"5 -=5
es
q
q
e q
e q
»
r
-j
.?
q ¿
© "r "r
-jS -< «r
? s £
é
q q
R J
q
q
5
q
q
H
es
q
—v~
-
§ I
R
y
^r
q
p
p
"* 1
q
<q»
q
2
q^
R
q
T
a q
>'
e
q
R
>'
e
fl>
rt
etc.
ío q
q^ >
R 2
q
q
p
R
2
1
R
PERFECT TENSES.—ACTIVE.
Tabt.IÎ V.
EIKST PfiREJäCT
Greek C. F. |
Increased Forms. '
Enalish.
I O
-t! .
fà H
fü >■
ëH
55 W
B ^
Ä H
ei s
<! M
ík V
\v-
loosen.
S. \i-\v-Ka
\E-\v-Kà'Ç
D. 2. Xe-Xu-zctt-rov
\s-\v-Ka-Tov
P. \i-\v-Kà-fxtv
\e-\v-Ka-Te
\B-\v-Kà(fi(y)
S. £-\i'\v-Kr} or -KHV
e'Xe-\v-K7]ç or -ksic
e-Xe'Xv-Kst
D.2. e-Xf-Xu-fcet-rov
f-Xe-Xv- K€l-TïjV
P. e-Xe-Xv-KSL-fisv
t-XS'Xv-KH'TS
s-Xs-Xv-Ke-aav
Xe-Xv-Kiû
Xe-Xv'Kyç
etc.
as in tlie Imperfect.
S.
Xe-Xv'K'Oi-r}v j
Xs-XV'K'Ol-TJC
XS'XV'K-Ol-TJ )
D.2. Xe-Xv-K-OL-Tov
Xs-Xv-K-OL'TÏJV
p. Xe-Xv-K-OL-jxav
Xs-Xv-K-Ol'TS
Xe-Xv'K'OL-ev
'K-Ot-fXl
•K'OL-Ç
-K'Ot
{Xs-Xv'K-e
Xe-Xv-K-ercû)
etc.
Xe-Xv'K-svai
Xé-Xif^K-^ir-^
rvTT-, Trpây-, épàd-, ayyeX-
TVTrr-, TTpacTff-, ^pa^-, ayyeXX-
strike, do,
teil,
TÍTV(¡>'á,
TTETTpâx-a,
TTE^paK-à,
T^yyfXic-a,
-aç, -£(v), etc.
eT£TV(p-r], I
-eiv, I
eTreirpäx-Vf I
'€LV, l
tite^poLK-ri,
-HVf
riyyi\K-t¡,
-UV, j
-Tjç or -€iç, -£1, etc.
ripa-, aire-, ôovXo-
honour, ash, enslave.
r£ripr¡K-a,
■^T7]K-à,
oedovXojK'à,
'àç, -£(v), etc.
ersTiprjK-Tj,
-HV,
yT7}K'7],-
-siv,
edeSovXwK'T],
•7JÇ or -fie, -El, etc.
Second Peri-ect.
XÏTT-,
Xéitt-,
leave.
Trpay-
Trpaaa-
do.
Xe-XotTT-ä,
TTE-TTpäy-ä,
-dç, -¿(v), etc.
e-Xe-XoiTT-rj, ]
-ELV, (
e-TTE-TTpày-ij, Í
-av, )
-7}ç or -f<ç, -fi, etc.
Thî Subjunctive Tenses of the Perfect are also often made by combining the Perfect Participle
with the corresponding forms of sa-, be : thus—
Pres.'Perf. XeXvkwç ta, yç, y
XEXVKOTEÇ wpEV, t}T£, (jùoXÇv)
Past-Perf. XeXvkiùç eiyv, e*3]ç, eit]
XeXvkoteç et7]pEv, eirjrs, eiev
The Imperative of the Perfect is very seldom used in the Active Voice ; see § 301.
rervipEvai, TreTTpäx^vai,
7r£(}>paK£vai, fjyyeXKEvai
r£ru0or-, TTfTTpâxor-,
TTEippaKOT', tiyyeXKOT-
TETl ptJKEVat, yT7]K£Vai,
dedovXu)K£vai
•^eripijKor-, yrvpzoT-,
bEbovXiOROT'
\E-Xonr-Evai, irE-irpáy -svai
\E-\oi7r-Or-, TTE-TTpdy-OT-
VRRBS
97
before otlier coDSonant-sufl&xes : C. F. irpáy-, (to ; Tipa-, honour :
1 aor. T. F, irpax^^-, Ttpr)$€- ; whence enpax^Vy done ; crTprj-
6% he was honoured. As in the perfect passive, o- is sometimes
inserted before 6 in this tense, most freqnently after short
vowels, more rarely after long vowels or diphthongs. See, how¬
ever, § 307.
327. The 2 aor. pass, is of much less frequent occurrence than
the 1 aor. ; it is not found in derivative verbs, or in vowel-verbs,
nor, with very few exceptions, is it found in verbs which have a
2 aor. in the active voice.
328. The person-endings of both passive aorists are the same
as those of the 2 aor. active, except that in the 3 p. plur. indie.
-erat/ is used : they are added to the tense-form without any con¬
necting vowel, € of the T. F. being lengthened into rj before those
endings which begin with a single consonant ; in the 3 p. sing,
indie. € becomes rj, and v is never added. In the indie, the
augment is, of course, prefixed. In the 2 p. sing, imperative the
old ending, -Ôï, is retained, and in the 1 aor. -Ôrjôï becomes -Ôtjti
(§ 44).
329. In the present tenses of the subj, € of the T. F. is con¬
tracted with the long vowels of the sulGSxes. In the past tenses
this € forms a diphthong with the mood-vowel i : in the sing, of
these tenses, and sometimes even in the dual and plur., the
endings -rjv, -rjs, etc., are used instead of -¡m, -s, etc. (§ 245).
330. The termination of the infin. is -vat, from the earlier
-p€vai* : of the participle, -vr : 2 aor. T. F. rvire-^ infin. rvnrjvai,
part. C. F. TvTTetrr- (m. and n.; riÍTrettra-, f.). (§ 152.)
331. Futures Indef, Passive (1st and 2nd).—In addition to the
simple future pass. (fut. imperf.) a future indef. is formed by
adding o- to the unaugmented T. F. of the aorist ; € of course
becomes r¡. There are two forms of this tense, corresponding to
the two forms of the aorist : C. F. tvtt-, strike, 2 fut. pass. T. F.
rvurjcr-; C. F. TTpäy-, do, 1 fiit. pass. T. F. wpaxOr)^-' The person-
endings are the same as those of the simple future. The fut.-
indef. differs in meaning from the fut.-imperf. as the aorist
(past-indef.) differs from the past-imperf.
332. It has been said (§ 316) that verbs ending in a vowel
have no 2 aor. active. There are, however, a few verbs of this
class, almost all of which are made in the imperfect tenses from
* The fuller form is seen in the Epic ^avT)p(vai, etc.
H
98 V£RL>9.
é
an increased form ending in a consonant^ wliicli have a 2 aor.
active formed by addition of the several sufi&xes without a con¬
necting vowel. The vowel of the root, if short, is lengthened in
those forms in which a single consonant follows, but remains
unchanged before i in the past tenses of the subj., and before vt
in the partie, and 3 p. plur. imperat., as in these forms the
syllable is already long ; -o-âf is the ending of the 3 p. pi. indie.;
-öt of the 2 p. sing, imper.; -vai of the infin.; and the nom. mase,
of the partie, is made by adding y. These aorists, therefore,
agree in inflection with the 2 aor. passive, and it will be observed
that they are all, with the doubtful exception of eyvcov, in¬
transitive.
If the C. F. end in o, this vowel becomes a in the present
tenses subj., and absorbs the vowel of the sufflx.
333. Some of these verbs have also a 1 aor. of the ordinary
formation : in this case the 1 aor. is regularly transitive : e. g.
C.F. ßa-, go; yvto-, have an opinion; Ôv-, enter; o-ra-, stand; <^v-,
le lorn: 2 aor. cßrjv, I went; €yva>p, I had an opinion^ knew;
(dvv, I entered ; ca-rrjvy I stood; €(f>vv, I was lorn: 1 aor. cßrjaa, I
caused to go ; av-^yv<ùfTa^ I caused change of opinion, persuaded ;
Kar-fdûo'a, I caused to sink; fCTi/ca, I caused to stand ; «^Ocra, 1
produced, legat. Of Su-, ora-, and the imperfect tenses, pres.
and past, and the simple future are, like the 1 aor., transitive,
the perfect tenses, like the 2 aor., intransitive.
334. In the following tables a type of each of the leading
varieties of inflection found under the First Conjugation is pre¬
sented at one view. The verb Xu-, loosen, has been adopted for
a standard, as its crude form undergoes no change in the im¬
perfect tenses, and as it, ending in the weak vowel v (§ 32),
everywhere exhibits the various suffixes unaffected by any col¬
lision either of consonants or of vowels, so that the suffix and
root are always seen distinct and entire. It has not, however,
been thought necessary to conjugate every verb with equal ful¬
ness in every tense ; the contract verbs, for instance, which are
given each at full length in the imperfect tenses, are thrown
into one column in the future, as their endings are now the
same as those of the standard, Xu- ; while the liquid verb ayycX-,
which in the former tenses was ranged with the mute verbs,
receives in the future a column to itself, since its endings are
here peculiar.
PEEFECT TENSE.—ÍDDLE AND PASSIVE. Table VI.
Greek C. F.
Increased Forms
English.
Xu-
loosen.
j TVTT-
rVTTT'
strike.
Trp^'
Tzpto-
ù.
ópad'
(ppa'C-
tell.
ayyaX"
ayyaXX-
announce.
ripa-, aiTE-j oovXo-
honour^ ask^ enslave.
»
/
1 .
K ÎJ
¿¡'S
S. Xe-Xv-fiai
Xs'Xîi-ffai
Xe-Xv-Tai
D. Xs-Xv'fieOov
Xs-Xv-ff9ov
Xe-Xv-a9ov
P. Xe-Xv-fj.e9à
Xe-Xv-a9e
Xe-Xv-vrai
T£7^fi-fiat
TETV^pai
TETUTT-rat
T£TV¡1~¡X£9OV
T£TV(¡>-9OV
T£TV(p-9oV
T£rvfi'fj,£9à
T£rV(j)-9£
T£rUfjL-fX£VOl gt(TÏ(v)
TTgTrpay-jUi
7rg7rpa|[ai
TTgTTpCtK-rfl
TTEirpay^lÀov
7rg7rpa;^-09»
TTEirpax^i»
rzEirpay-pèa.
7rg7rpa;^-0{
TrgTrpay'/iiKoi £t(TÏ(i')
TVEcppacf-p.aL
7r£^p£Ï-(Tf££
TC£(ppaG-rai
7rt(ppa(T-p.E9ov
TTEcppa-adov
7ri(ppa-<j9ov
TTEippac-pEdà
7rE<ppa-G9E
7rE(ppaa-¡XEV0i gUTÏ(v)
rjyyEX-fiai
r¡yyEX-cai
VyysX-raL
ï)yyEX-pE9ov
7]yyEX-9ov
7jyyEX-9ov
TjyyeX-fiEOa
rjyyEX-9E
rjyyEX'fiEvoi Ei&i(y)
OEOovXúj-pai, 3
O
s
1
"ici
S. €-Xe-Xu-fiT]v
e-Xe-Xv-co
e-Xa-Xv-To
D. e~Xe-Xv-fit9ov
€~Xe-Xv'<t9ov
É-Xg-Xv- (T9Í]V
P. g-\£-Xl/-/Lt£Öa
e-Xe'Xv-(79e
e-Xa-Xv-vro
ETETVjl flTjV
ETETVtpO
ETETVTT'TO
ETETVfX-¡X£90V
Er£TV(p-90V
£TETV(¡>'9r¡V
ET£TVfl'fl£9ä
£TETV(p~9s
TETVfjL~¡i£voi rjíTav
g7rg7rpay-jUi|v
ETTETTpa^O
£7r£7rpa/c-rci
£7r£7rpay-/i£9oî'
ETZETZpaX'^fiV
ETTE-Kpax-^"^
ETTE-Kpay-pêa
ETTE-KpaX'^l
■TTETTpay-pivoi ijeäv
E7rE^pa(T-p.ijv
ETTE^pä-ao
gTTfÇjpac-ro
£7rE<ppa<j-fiE9ov
ETTEíppa-aOov
E7rE<¡)pa-<T9r]v
E7rE(ppa<T'p.E9à
£7r£0pa-£r0£
TTEíppaG'fXEVOl 7¡<7áv
TjyyEX-fxrjv
tjyyEX'Uo
^jyyaX-TO
>]yyEX'iiE9ov
t]yy£X'9ov
r¡yyEX-97]v
7]yyEX'pt9à
ï/yygX-Ôg
yyytX-fiEvoi r¡aáv
V^YT' \ (likeXu-).
EOEOOVXU)-pr]V, J ^ '
fe-Q.
XE'Xv-ff'O-fxaif etc.
like Future Imperfect.
TETVipOfiaiy
etc.
TTETTpa^Opaïf
etc.
TETÏpTjfTopai, yrijaopait
ÔECovXwaopai, etc.
g
/-;v
Í9
^ M
et Ö
S. XE'Xv'fiEVoç w, yÇj y
P. Xa-XV'fXEVÖt <x)fiEVf 7]TE, U)&í(v)
TETVfl-flEVOg 0),
etc.
7rg7rpay-/i£voc (o,
etc.
7rE(ppa<T-flEV0Q w,
etc.
xiyyÈX-pEvoQ w,
etc.
TET¡pr)pEVOQ f
yrypEvoç > íii, yç^ y^ etc.
otdovX(opEvoQ J
H
§
0
g
CO
TS
1 g
H
■<
s. XE-Xv-flEVOÇ ElT}Vy E17]Ç, ElTJ
P. XE-Xv-flEI^Ol ElTJflEV, EITJTE, ElEV
T£TV¡l-¡l£VOQ EirjVf
etc.
^ETTpay-flEVOÇ EtyVf
etc.
7ri(ppa<7-flEV0Ç EITJV,
etc.
riyyÈX'fiEvoç Eirjv,
etc.
r£r7unjU£voc ^
^ ( Etrjv, eirig. eití,
vtjipevog
^ ^ \ \ Ci/O.
OgOOUAWjUgVOÇ }
PS S
XE-Xv'ff-oi'fitjv, etc.
like Future Imperfect.
tetvypolfxtlv,
etc.
TTETrpaXoipriv,
etc.
TETÎpyaolprjv, yTr¡aoipr¡v,
éE^ovXiú(JoipY¡Vf etc.
Impebative.
S. 2. Xg-Xu-co
XE-Xv-<T9(t}
D.2. Xe-Xv-(t9ov
X£'Xv'(x9<jjjf
P. 2. Xg-Xn-(r0g
X£-Xv-<t9o)v or
Xg-Xu-crÖwiraj/
rETV\pO
T£TV^-9(ú
T£rv(p-9ov
t£TV(p-9ü}v
Terv(p-9E
t£tv(}>-9iov or
TETV^-9(jù(Tàv
TTETrpa^o
7rE7rpax-9<a
TTETTpax-Oov
7rg7rpa;^-0wi/
TTETTpax-Qí
7r£7rpiz;^-0wj; or
7r£7rpu;^-0a> xv
■JTEíppá'ffO
7rE(ppa-(j9o}
7rE.(¡)pa-a9ov
'jvE(ppa'a9(j}V
TTgj&pa-íTÓg
7rg0pa-o-0wv or
TTg^pa-crötüträv
yyyaX'ffo
7]yyEX'9(t}
r}yyEX'9ov
í]yyEX-9ü)v
7}yyEX-9E
r]yyEX'9u}v or
j]yy£X-9<i)ffàv
rm^U-iro, ) etc.
uoz-ao. í
Infin¬
itive.
Xg-X?»-cr0at
Xg-Xü-c-g-iröat
TETV<P~9ai
TETvil/£<j9ai
TTETrpax-Oai
7rg7rpa^£(T0at
7rg0pa-(r0at
jjyygX-öat
TET'ipr)a9ai^ yrriaQat, ^E5ovX(i)(T9ax
TETLp7¡(JE(j9aiy -etc.
Parti¬
ciple.
Xg-Xu-/igvo-
XE-XÔ-C- O-flEVO'
rETVfi-flEVO'
TErVIpOflEVO-
TTETrpay-pEvo-
'TTETTpa^OIXEVO-
7rE(¡)pa<T-pevO'
riyy^'fLEvO'
TETÏpypEvo-f yrrjpEvo-j dedovXíO'
TETÏpyaOpEVO-^ etc. [ßEVO*
rARTI-
CIPLE,
Ikfin-
ITITE.
a<
"R
Ri
a
Impekativb.
Subjunctive.
Past-Indef.
(Optative.)
HÖ Ü CO
Si -Si <Si <Si «1 <Si «Si
^ 3 q 9 q q
q( s< Re Re q< o
•Í ^ :3 -Í 3 A
I g " I § e
'S o
"r'
«Si
£
q
•O^ Sí 3
"S ¿
fit a
9 -rr« A
Ri a •©•
Tí ^
«£i->f 'S
R<
•i
e
ê'E-?'
e 9 q
q o ¿
¿.^:s
Sc
£
hd Ö
«I <Si <Si <Si
§§l§§§lg
<0 "R
a "5 3
R R
7^
CÎI «Si
9
:§■ a
^ "3 J_
9^ 9
o 9
n >r
Pres.-Indef,
(Subjunctive.)
Indicative.
^ Ü ?o
jo
qqqqqqqq
¿JS ¿.s-äsöiö é
q -1 -¿ 4
2^ m ^ a o
■R -5 3
ftc Ö
q ¿
es-
NS
e ? <í
-O TD J
R{ a
? "^ac
ac Rí^
.3 qä a
"r^ t
«Si*-«: *3
¿<H<
** Re
C -5"^
>' 9 «a
S ¿<?
¿c
Hí
cr? £4 <g
Sí ^
03»^
Fä Q
pu •
hí>TÍ
O •
53. a
>M
>-§-
o-d-â
a Ri
B -5 4
g-:í-:í
I
S-S'-S'
sí.í.
o
I—I
CQ
H
H
>-
O
<
H
=í
OoOOOoOO
s "R 3
fti i»i qí
ees ¿¿.¿-*¿«3 ¿
q ¿ -¿ 4 ¿
«.( «x £ o o
O R ^ ^
R 5 «?<
S ^
§
U
í>
O
»
H
t>
»
>"
Cl
V
Cl
q
R<
q
R
Ts
q
'i
o
Impekative.
Sdbjunctive.
Fast-lvdeJ.
(Optative.)
Pres.-Indef.
(SCEJUNOTIVE.)
Indicative.
çii ^1 'S! Çi <Si "Si
C» Q 9 «í 3 q 9
R R » a a a a
Q Q q ci q q
<£> CD CD ^ ^
I I " I § s
I'S
«i cl «si «il <si «il «si «si «si
qqqqqqqqq
q -ft q q ■?:
-t cd 2l «d «d pd
O m o
ac!- ^ ®
r
ô "S
I $1 <Si $1
q q q q q
¿¿¿•44
« q T¿ q q
H CD S CD <D
3 ?>2 S
Í- Rc 'S ^
«' «si «si «si
? 4 ? 4
e ¿ ¿ ¿
4 ¿ "¿
R j5
I Cíi Ci «1 «I Ci <Si <Si <íi
iqqqqqqqq
R Re a a ac R< S a«
^ 'S i 9.'S ¿
<D: <D 'D o q DS
*S o
> CDC¡
Ri ^
'^il
tn » ~
=r c Ä
• 2 O
P- •
>si hj
O •
§
3
Rf ^
I ?
3
r
q
-©. «X!
"D a
at?*
q
q N
CD"D
a a
•ê' "
cil'
5 s
§=-;á
-Ô- 5» -í
*2 "S ^
a< R "Ct-
9
aar
Rt a -o-
Te -a
««--«i ■?
■D -3 J
at a -Ç-
? r á
a a -c
"£•3 5
a -©.
Ts -«í DS
C-|-¿ ^
? 5.^ è
"sea
S "s -
r a
. 3 ^
«C -<5.-©.
5" ft »t
s h «*
a a a
a --Í
s
Ç?^^a<
%
u
Ö
f
-S'
&# g
o 2
e ^
£ -
o a
e CD
>-3.
5 S
a -t: -a
-5 as -a
2
fti a 1.
i J -à
1^9
9 s s
£ ^ Ts
t: s r
r - r
OOOOOOOOO
'SqTsq'q-p-io'S:
■iCDjicDCDrt^o as
o f*i o Si
Rc^ *S o ^
o 3 r"
a "9 Ts
>' 9 as
S Rt a
?l i.
Ts
R
«5** >' V
R 2 i^c
« q ^
!>
Participle.
í¿
us
s
h
h
SUBJ.
(Optât.)
INBIC.
First Future Passive. FUTURE INDEFINITE PASSIVE, serond Future Passive.
Participle.
m
¡5í
2
5
h
<
fel
Imperative.
Subjunctive.
PastJndef. | Fres.-Indef,
(Optative.) j (Subjunctive.)
Indicative.
Greek C. F.
increased Forms.
English.
hj
5
y.
>
c
w
h
«c
i
q
o
~¿
?
o
■
S
q
q
CD
q
w
XXX
fee fef fe<
<35 CD' <35
es es es
<^ q q
<5 0 0 0
P A ¿-¿
0 es
fe
GC
>-'>'>'
■fee fee fee
Ôi <¿
es es -S
Ci q q
fD *CS 0
p 2 i:r'^
g s a
X
fee
fe
•1
X
fe:
A
es
fe
a
^ ^
je> |o i«5
X X X X X X X
fee fee fee Çf <Se fee fee
<3D CD 35 CD <I> <I3 <35
es 2 -q
£ a ^ £ 1 £
§.i ^
•C 0
^ Ö w
to
X X X XX X X X
fee çr «Sc fee fee fee fee fee
^<D,^CD®^CD^
•^¿.S^-s-S-S-S
q à "fe a a tq fe
a< <*' e« .3 a
fe fe fe fe
0
a
X X X X X
fee «fee c< fee fee
^ ^ ^ Ô) ^
l^iài
fe fe fe
a
xxxxxxxx
fee fee fee ç< çc fee fee fee
^ ® ^ ® ® ^ ^ <¿
ges Scses-ss-ej £
=> á"¿ 3 3 '^'
r-f e*. fv, C 0
fe fe fe
^ P Í»
|o
XXXXXXXX
«e ae fee <Sc fee fee fee fee
<i «D ^ «i ® CD <D <D
e:c2e:esese;e!es
q á "T: à a «q fe
P( en er es O
fe fe fe fe
i «
P '
•0. V
If
§1
t ^
2 ?
o ?
5 ii
§1
"K ^
^ S
o ®
-©■ i''
"o 2
a -0.
3.3^
S
f S
a =î
"D
a
1®
1 "
a
a S
a -©■ a V
*a "D S
9 s -®-
>/ 9.,x <35
cDes
? ¿ ? ¿
2 .£ 2 -£
fe "
1
0
0
0
A
0
C
f?
a -©■ ïi >'
"s -3 5
-sj a a -©•
® q
q ? ? ¿
' ® 0 ^
•2 "a -fe a
1 s s --
•ö
1
m
a
fD
p
■©■ v
"O 2
a -©.
ir
5;
a a
':¿ s
-0. V
"a 2
a •0.
9L ^
si
"Í a
5.;^
1®
g 1
a -o- a X
"a -3 2
-■^ a a -o-
4>
Si
1
CD
es
a
£
(i
fi
a -©. 2| X
*■<5 "a -3 2
9 Sí
i
® ® s=s
2 2 e" "5
•§ 1 fe -
tq
0
p
a -o ÏÎ X
-n! ~a -3 2
--e; a p -0.
>-'?^ i
E - í
<35
*S
¡q
«35
Vi
«rr>
p
5:0. ^ X
*■<: ^ fe5 2
ex a 0 .Ä
i®
í
35
?
<D
f»
p
a 2 5'
« a 7
7 -
® "D "D
a ai
q •'<
? '
-^a Qc
a a a-
as -'i
§-S-;S
X
n r •
H
-£
CD
CS
q
2 ^
e m
>' g
£ ?
<c>--
CS
§ a
2 CS
1 'S
q
o
•R
o
•fe
es
'55
® Q
^ a
£ r
CD
es
2 a
9. ^
CD es
a 55
"q
q
CD
a
:a,
« a "R
E 5^55
cD^ "a
es 1 a
q 0 0
0 "fe
-s ^
.3 •''i
;s
®
0
fi
p 2
0
® ;3i
^•3 3
E ?
J"??
q 0 0
■III
a - -
•«s
n
p *
H
a
■i'
ei
CD
<>> fe
i 7
X'
8
CD
^ S
7 1
es
05
fe
H
■E'
es
■35
es
'X fe
0 a
X-
£
0:
es r.
fe 2
a. 3
"fe
a
§•5 3.,
«a a Ts
^es es
£ «D <35
<35
es
a
£
0
p
S* S 3,
Mí
£ CD «D.
S^.5 J
fe
Î?
.5
«q
SP
fî>
p
rp'
>>es .3
£ CD <D
Qi £ £
£
1
«CD
<35
■Ci
fB
p
Oí"^ a
® 7 -2'
X c^-a
H s>
J=- ?
fe
<35
es
«q
<35
ei
ft)
p
»- a,
C,
s ^
2 a
3 "
9 a
C«5 e»
i"" 2
s q*
t 3
q 9
p
«c
es
q
o
•fe
?
o
-1
cit
es
q
q
CD
a
*i 1 -s
C( fee fee
^ ^ 1
es es es
q q q
¿00
S ® "à
rt ® es
fe
-i 1 -Í
fee fee fee
^ ^
.S es .S
? ? ?
<SCS 0
1= 3 "fe"»
e'» a 2 2
p^Cy
fee
a
fe
•1
a
fee
es
fe
a
a a a a a a a
fee fee fee fee fee fee fee
^ q SI ^
es A es A es "3 ¿3
à fe a á a á <D
£ 2 m g 0 e .-e
q £ fe ^
ae fe
'S 0
>-í
aaaaaaaa
Ce çjc ae fee fee fee «c fee
S a "fe à A «q fe
fee en er. es O
fe fe fe fe
0
a
a a a a a
fee fee fee fee fee
q ^ ^ q ^
Ç â -fe A à
fe fe fe
aaaaaaaa
fee fee fee fee fee fee fee fee
Í 7 7 ? 7
¿CS ¿¿CS^S-CS ¿
¿ a -t a a
3( <*• 5 0 0
X. 5 fe fe
fe ^
V /
á à à a á à à à
fee fee fei fe' fe' fee fee cie
cs-àescsescscs^
^ A A A <q 4
2 -2 V
fe fe fe fe
6î a a
2- fe fee
p 7 '
V.
C
c
z
c
>
c
fe
en
Taele X
"Gù
a
fe
a
"Gfc
es
fe
a
'Cù'Cù'Cib'Géj'Gù'Go'Gô
.3 a es -s es es CS
a fe a a à a CD
1 n i ® "
a
*5J"CCI "Gö "Ge "Cw "Gö "Gt, "Cö
aqqqssaa
'S¿¿.3.2.3>3.S
5 á "fe ¿ á fe
0( .•>» er. es 0
fe fe fe fe
0
"Cù "Cj *Gö "Gt, "GQ
a a a a a
¿ á -fe á á
V V.
*GDGÎ>"GÔGD"CÔG£i"GÎ:GÔ
ees e-s-ävivi e
Q a T: á a
3« en S <5 0
^ fe fe fe
v»-'
"Gj'GwGLGû'CôGLGiG'Gb
e:eresesese5cs,.3
q a "fe A A iq fe
Sc rv) 2 -3 ®
fe fe fe fe
^ Gö-Cö
? a a
fe '
10
Î>
0
C>
0
H
C
'<
w
2
•aAissvd—'sasMüix xsiauv
IjIl'EIlATIVE.
-)
«<
^ O
Subjunctive.
Past.
(Optative).
^ Ö
q q q q q q q
-i 1 1 ^ -I -i
Rc R Rc R< R< Rc>Ä
-Í 'i -í -Î 3
s 3 s 2 s
q 2 " ^
Rc ^
f( «~C <"C >~C r«c '"C
^ ^ et ^
1 ^
e
q £
R< ^
Oo Cl? Cl? O? Cl?
qqqqqqqq
•H -1 H 'S 'i ""l *1
aSftRiRRRR
■S.SCîqâ-â-SCi-3
*1 H q q -1 H, "i, ~i,
r^C ?«c »■< P»C e»C ^C fC
: CS .s
*A -k
JScs-scs^"S-s^
o? Cl? ©? q? o? o? Cl?
©^ ^ ^
fn
»
Ä S
S R S S ^
^ ^ R
^ Si
4 se 4 Si s»
S- se Si
e
ec
Ce C
Ce ©c Ce ce Cl
«2
A ^
■13 3 3
© o ©
■i
R
S 3
q s
Rc^
^ O
-j
'*'8 2 2
Si ^
»0 -R
Present.
(Subjunctive).
qqqqqqqq
;:!•? ;3 2
Indicative.
Past-
Imperfect
q q q q q q
-î ^ H ^
Rc R< Rc R< RcS •
?«C <^C **c «"< «~C «"C «"Í <^c
q Tî
ïr ir,
t"C fC «"C
Ç «
i ¿
Present-
Imperfect.
hj b
hÛ
q q q q q q
H H 1 -i 'i
1 Rc Rc Rc Rt"S -S
. 3
. o ©
*S ^ rs
'Î
.^r
i»c
<Il C©
T'ÎT'T^^TT
©? ©? Ó? ©? ©? ©? Cl?
"<■ C «r« C 'T« fC
'S. s,
5'a"£ 3 3 3,"-¥,
o? ©? ©? C^
epc r.c ij-C »J*«
©? ©? ©?
Ô? Cl? ©? ©? ^ ^ ^ ^
Ri 1 ^
3 C« 5
i
¡
Parti¬
ciple.
Infin¬
itive.
Imperative.
Subjunctive.
Indicative.
Greek C. F, j ara-
Increased Forms.! ï-ara-
English. stand.
Past.
(Optative).
Premt.
(SüBJÜKCnVE).
Past-
Imperfect.
Present-
Jmperfect,
q
p<
"¿
'S
o
p
q
CB
P
^ Ö M
^ b9
NI 0
.d p λ
^ p Ç»
d ü
q q q q q q q
1 "i M -i -í -i
p P P P p P) Pe
q ¿ p q q q q
^ ^ CD ^ <B o
e S £ O £
q 'S C ^
O
qqqqqqqqq
ppppppppp
'Sq'pqq'S-íoT:
o <*> ^CS o ^ V
öe 'S 'S §
qqqqqqqqq
£CS £>aC£CS<!CS £
'S i 3
'i ?" 5v ® R
}5ivii^OcCC<" i»
5= Re's s 0
qqqqqqqqq
R R Pc P R R< R< Rc Pc
Aq^qq"sAqS:
B>ft) BBft)0 Ces
o íft B-a o B f.
ßc^ <= °
qqqqqqqqq
P P Pc P P p< P< Pc Pc
Gq~¿qq-g-Íq"TS
3 S^cfBB^^P p P
pft)BGOBc-f«-
R< 'S 'S q
<¿>
ft)
•¿
?
o
q
CÖ
p
•1 H -i -1 S -i 1
r»< í«< í"< t-C í-C «"C fC
^ ^ ^ es ^
¿ q ¿ q^ q q q
<B 05 ^ cb ^ o
£ £ m e o g
q C C 'S
|<o
~ n
3, *1 S M -1 ^ 1, S f
^ 7 7 7 7 7^ 7 7^ ^
^<BSD<BCBSB^<B^
j_ 1 1 7 7 7 <77
S ¿-S q q -s 3 ¿ -g
, 3<B2^Q5eB2)0 5
O ft) Bes O B w
R' 'S 'S O ^
^c í-c «•< ^c ft »j-e *-c «"C
B B B B q B ^ B B
ees e-S-SS-S*« £
^ q -4 q ci«¿ 3 -¿
^BmBPSR Q
Q ft* "Bs O 0 cK *• C
s s< i; < r
à, i i á< i i 3< ác i
BB'BBBB'BBB
ft)ftiftiftift)ft)ft)ft)ft)
Aq'pqq'pAq'S
-í <^ft»BBft> q qcá
C fti B.S OB G
fie c 'S q
-ï -í, -1, H -î H s s
f»C «J'C (^C »»c f»C »»C fC «-C i»c
B>BBB^BBBB
A q A ^ ¿ ® 'S
s Bft)Bl>ft' R P p
amBoq'®"'-«".
S Rc G 'S o
G <B7
G
í?
?
"é
o
¿í
o
q
CD
P
^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^
o o o o o o o
q q q q q q q
^ ^ ® ci5 ^ o
e £ ■" £ 2 £
q c 'S
p< -,
« s
T' 7^ T' 7* 7^ 7^ 7^ ?c 2c
¿ ¿ ¿ 1 ¿ ¿ ¿ 1 1
'Sq'gqq'pAó'B
3<t>2^cc,Bft)q es
o ft) Bes o w
PCG 'S ® ^
3 3_"B q q-5 A "é
1Bft;LB®')-P p
pftiBooB»- rí
R< g <5 0
777777777
G^ Gí G? G^ G» Gj o.» G» G>
f»C <^C ej>C <^í »>.< <^C
Aq'pqq'^Aq'R
-í Bn^BBÄsO ®«ä
O ft) ^CS O 55
Rc 'S C ^
G^GíGíGíGíGíG^GíGí
ooooooooo
Aq-gqq-pAq-R
3 Bftll5'B|5.,P p p
pftiBOO^C"«"«"
fit 'S G 1
tí..
7^ a»
G Gl» q
G O '
&»
'S
Ce
"á
9
1
C
C
q
CB
P
^ ^ ^ o# Gí Gí
« Ä ^ ft
'S C 'S 'S 'S c c
C c G C C C C<
q q q q q q q
CB <Bi <B 15 C5 <I> o
£ £ "» £ ® £
q c 'S 'í
-
^ o
^ -í
^ ^ ^
ft ft ft
^ 'S 'S
fl. 7 ? 7
p 7 7 7
A q "Ts
q CS
'S
^ ^ ^
ft ft ft
A 'S A
t» ? ? ?
S-a« e
8 "¿
8
ftftftftftftftftft
AAAAAA'sAA
G C C( G C Gf q< ce Ge
Aq*gqq~¿3q-¿
Bft) BBft) O qes
o ft) Bes OB fi
Pc 'S 'S q
ftftftftftftftftS
AG'SA'SAAAA
G G G< G q GC Oc q< Gf
G q q A-g A q -g
•i BftLBlSftiR p q
qcnBoOCBffS
R Rcg g q
a»
S's
1"? A
Mr
s-/
g
TJ
O
H
H
C/2
Sí
c»
■|
s
■H
d
Ö
si
t>
íz|
Ü
hj
Sí
H
second aorist tense. taiîlh xiii.
Active.
Middle.
Greek c. f.
English.
(Tra-
stajid.
BE-
place.
So-
give.
ara-
stand.
9e-
place.
So-
give.
Indicative.
S. í'CrTT}'V
€'<rrr)'Ç
I'Orr}
D.2.é-ot^-rov
s-arrj-Trjv
P. S-aTT]-fX(.V
e-ar/j-re
e-CTq-aav
Í sinijnlar (
j not found |
e-Be-tov
e-0e-7tjv
E-9E-pev
e-9e-te
E-Be-aav
i singular )
r not found 1
E'do-rov
E'^O-TTfV
E-èO'fliV
E-do-TE
E-do-aav
c3
o
ís
<u
%
o
.s
M
•c
o
<î
ts
a
o
o
o
cq
0
tí
9i
Ci
.tí
1
d
b
s. E-BE-prjv
e-9ov
E-9E'T0
D. E-Be-peBov
e-Be-ctBov
e-9e-<tBtjv
p. E-BE-p¿Ba
e-Be-ítOe
e-Be-vto
E-èo-pgv
E-èov
E-^O-TO
E-do-psBov
E-do-aBov
s-do-aBgv
E-So-pEBà
E-do-ffBs
E-do-VTO
m
h
ü
p
g
m
so
^ ?
S. otü»
0t7;c
etc., as in Imperfect.
9(0
9yg
etc., as in Imperf.
diO
âi^g
etc., as in Imperf.
s. B(o-pai
Bg
etr- as in Imperf.
êio'pat
etc., as in Imperf,
1 ..• h
1 «0 <
1 î3 ^
K a
S. ara-iTf'V
(fra-vq-ç
etc., as in Imperfect,
Be-iïj-v
9E'IT]'Ç
etc., as in Imperf.
^o-irj-v
âo-ifjç
etc., as in Imperf.
s. BE-i-pr\v
Be-i-o
etc., as in Imperf.
Bo't-pyjy
êO'fv
etc., as in Imperf.
p
>
h
<
»
3
í—f
S. 2. otï/Ot
(TTTI-TO)
D.2.(Trr}-Tov
CTr)'Tii)V
P. 2.0t7j re
OTU'VTdiV or
(Trrj-Tuiaau
9e-ç
Be-TÜJ
Be-tov
Be-tíov
9e-te
Be-vtíov or
Bs'Tioaav
âo-g
ëo-T(o
êo-Tov
do'TlOV
êo'TE
ëo-VT(ov or
So-T(oaäv
s. 2. Bov
BE'<jB(O
T).2.BE-(JBov
BE-<yB(ov
p. 2. QE-CBE
Be'<sB(ov or
BE-<jB(oaäv
dov
êo-aBio
5o-<tBov
êo-<jB<jjv
So~<tBe
do-oBiov or
io-cröwcrav
Infinitive
C77¡ tat
BEi-vai
dov-vai
Bi-aBai
So'aBai
Participle.
ara-vT'
Be-vt'
SO'VT'
Be'Pevo-
do-pEvo-
conjugation of these verbs in the future, first aorist, and perfect.
Future.
<Tn]<T'0), 'SIÇ, "€1, etc.
9¡j(t-(o, -Eig, -€i, etc.
iwc-tü, 'ElÇi 'Elf etc.
atr}(j-ofiai, etc.
Brja-opaïf -y, etc.
diocT'opatf -y, etc.
1 Aorist.
tartjff'ä, -âçt -«(p), etc.
eBtjk-o^ -àg, -e(v')
in Indicative Active o
in the Plural, especial
e^(ok-âf -ac, 'e(v)
nly; very rarely found
y in the 1 and 2 Pers.
Mid. EíTrrjaaprjv
e(tr7¡(t(of etc.
Pas. e(tta9-i]vf -rjçf etc.
eteB-tiv, -rjçf -rjf etc.
EdoB-rjv, 'ijçf 'i}f elf.
;
Indio.
Imper.
Infin.
Part.
S. effnjka
¿arijKag
¿<tn/ice(v)
d.2. èarriKarov j í lardrov
SGTTjicärov 1 i ¿ararov
p. iarrjKafiEV V or % kara^iv
EffrrjKare 1 j icrrars
é<7ri]Kíi<JÍ(v) ) (. £(rrä(ti(v)
etc. etc.
s. 2. iarïjKé ) ^ iiJTaOt
¿(TTTjKerù) > or ^ iardroj
etc. ) ( etc.
€<ttt}kivai or èaravai
¿fTTtiKOT" or ¿(rrmT-
teBeiko.
TtBEiKag
etc.
TlBElKEVat
teOeikot-
SeSioKa
diddJKag
etc.
Se^ioKsrai
dtêioko—
Eardfiai
kcfràaat
etc.
ÈaraaBai
kctâpevo'
TEOttpai
rtBtKTai
etc.
TiBEiaBai
TEBitpevo'
ëEdopat
êecoaat
etc.
SeêoffBai
SEÖopEVO"
General View of the Conjugation of \v-, loosen, s.rá-¡pá<p-, write, In the several Voices, Moods and Tenses. Table XIV.
Indicative.
Subjunctive.
Imperative.
Infinitive.
Participle.
Act.
Mid. and Pass.
Act.
Mid. and Pass.
A-ct.
Mid. and Pass.
Act. *
Mid. and Pass.
Act.
Mid. and Pass.
h
Present,
Xvú>
ypàipiû
Xvofiai
ypä(pop,at
Xutü
ypá(p(ú
XvùJiiat
ypä(p<jjjj.ai
Xw
ypa^i
Xuot;
ypapov
XvElV
ypäipEiv
XvEaOai
ypäcpEffOat
Xvfüi'
ypà<p(ûv
XvopEvoç
ypa^OfiEvoç
»
(m
ti
Ed
g
Past.
{Kvov
eypá(¡)Ov
eXvotofjí
typatpoiirjv
XvoipX
ypä(f>oijxt
XvOlflTJV
ypatpoifitjv
XvElV
ypà(pEtv
XvEaOai
ypä<pE(T9at
Xv(ûv
ypä(p(i)v
XvOflEVOÇ
ypa<pOfiEVOç
M
Future.
[XVÍTW
ypai/zw]
Xvaopai (Pass.)
ypa\¡/o¡Áai (Pass.)
P. Xvaotfitjv
ypaxpoiptjv
P. XvfficrÖat
ypaxpiaOat
P. XvaofiEvoç
ypaxj/ofiEvoç
H
Present.
\e\vKa
yiypà<pà
XeXvpai
ytypa/xfiai
XeXvKO)
yeypä^io
XeXvfiEvoç Ù)
yeypafifiEVOQ w
[XfXiÍKÉ
ytypífí']
XeXvíto
yEypa\l/o
XeXvKEvai
yeypàipEvai
XeXvaOai
yEypa<p9ai
XeXvkojç
yEypâ<pu)Ç
XEXVIIEVOÇ
yEypaptptEVOç
1 Perfec
Past.
Future.
eXeXvKT)
eytypä(pi}
[XfXvKwc eaofiai
y£ypâ(pioç eaop-ai]
eXeXvprjv
iy£ypa¡i¡ir¡v
XeXvaofiaí
yeypaipofiat.
XeXvKoiT)v
y£ypä(potJ}v
XeXvpivoç (iT]v
ytypapfiEvoç eii)v
XEXv<yoi}i7]v
yEypa-ipoifitjp
XeXvKEvat
y£ypä(pEvai.
XEXva9ai
yEypa<p9at
XeXüfffcröat
yEypa^E(f9ai
XEXvk(j)ç
yEypà^wç
XEXi'ipEVOÇ
yEypapfiEvoç
XEXvffOflEVOÇ
yEypail/OfiEVOi
Present.
Xv(t(j}
ypaipùj
M. Xvaiopat
ypaypüjpai
P. Xü0w
ypa^ia
Xvaov
ypa\l/ov
M. Xvaai
ypa\pai
P. XvOrjTL
ypá<pr¡9L
Xvffai
ypa\pai
M. Xv(Taff9ai
ypatpaaöat
P. Xv9rjvaL
ypa^r)vat
Indefinite.
Past.
eXvaa
eyparpa
M. eXvaafirjv
eypa-^äfirjv
P. eXvQyjv
eypa^T]v
Xvaatfu
yparpaifiX
M. Xvaaijxrjv
ypaipaifirjv
P. XvOeitjv
ypàipEirjv
Xvtrai
ypaipai
M. Xvaaa9ai
ypa\l/a(T9at
P. Xv97jvai
ypä<pTjvai
Xvaàç
ypaipàç
M.XvffafiEvoç
ypa^apEVOÇ
P. Xï;0Etç
ypâ(pEiç
Future.
Xvtrd)
ypaypof
M. Xvaofiat
ypa^ofiai
P. Xv0r¡<TOfiai
ypà^Tjaofiat
XvaotpX
ypa'^oiju
M. XvaoifiTjv
ypaypoifiTjv
P. XvOrjffotfitjv
ypa<l>rj(Toifirjv
Xvaeiv
ypa^Eiv
M. Xvi7E<T9ai
ypa\pEtT9ai
P. Xv9TjaE(79at
ypä(})tj<tt<j9ai
Xvawv
ypa\p<i)V
M. XvffOflEVO^
ypa^opiEVOç
P. Xv9tJ(T0p.EV0Ç
ypà(pi]ffOfi£VOS
33
SECOND, OR OLDER, CONJUGATION (VERBS IN MI).
335. Hio second conjugation differs from the first in the in¬
flexion of the imperfect tenses, present and past, and of the
2 aorist.
336. All the endings of the imperfect and 2 aor. tenses are
added to the C. F. without oonnecting vowel except in the subj.,
where the long vowels » and if, and the vowel i, must be regarded
as the sign of mood.
337. The endings peculiar to this conjugation are as follows.
In the Active :—
Indie. Pres. imperf, 1 p. sing, -fu ; 3 p. sing. for -Tr(v) ;
3 p. pi. -â<n(y) for -avTÍ(i'),*
Past-imperf. and 2 aor. ; 3 p. pi. -<ra» (but see § 332).
Those verbs of this conjugation whose C. F. ends in a vowel, have
that vowel lengthened before the endings of the sing, in the
india act.
Siibj. The endings of the singular in the past tenses (opt.)
are, -jjv, -rfs, -i; (§ 245), instead of the ordinary forms. In
the plural both forms are used.
Imper. The 2 p. sing, retains the ending ; in Attic, how¬
ever, this is generally rejected and the final vowel length¬
ened. In the 2 aor. a final s represents this ÚT.
Inñn. The suffix is -vat, from the earlier In the
2 aor. the root-vowel is lengthened.
Partie. The nominative sing, of the active participle is
formed by addition of y to the C. F.
338. In the Middle and Passive :—
The pres. and past imperf. indie, and the pres. imperat.
retain in the 2 p. sing, the old endings, -o-ot, -<ro, -<ro, with¬
out elision or contraction.
t
* Or, perhaps, origmally, -travñ, a disappearing, as so often happens,
between two vowels of which the first is short (§ 48) : thus, TiBe-daÍ,
they are placing^ would be deduced, through ri^e-avn, from rXQi'VavTi ;
and -<rav, the ending of the 3 pi. in the past tenses» would be related to
-aavrt of the present, exactly as o-v (o-vr) of the 1st conj. to -ow«
(o-vri). Hence also may, perhaps, be explained the i^parently ano¬
malous éi^â&Î and ieä<H (L e. êuc-vâvi, iJ-^á^t)« Attic forms of the 3 pL
present-perfect of pK^ and p$', for eoucdat, they seem^ and oi^a^c, they
know. See § 298, n., and Buttmann, Irreg. Verhs, p. 82.
100
VERBS
339. Some verbs of this conjugation have an increased form
in the imperfect tenses made from the C. F. by a reduplication
consisting of the repetition of the initial consonant followed by
i: thus, ora-, stand; öc-, place; í-, let go, send; Ôo-, give: in¬
creased forms tora- (for triara')) rXêe-y Í€-, dtôo-,
340. Another class.consists of verbs which make their increased
form by adding the syllable w : as, 3««- (Ôt*-) shew, increased
form Óftjc-i/u-, Many verbs of this class apparently add pw to
the C. F., but in these words the first p probably represents a
lost final consonant : as, C. F. e-o-- {fto-), clothe ; (w-o--, gird ;
a߀-<r-, quench : increased forms, ív-w-, a'ßip-w-. Com¬
pare €a-drjT-, f. clothing, Lat. vesti- ; ¿úxr-riyp-, m. girdle ; and the
1 aör. eo-ß^a-a, I quenched (§§ 48, 265, c.)-
Words of this class belong to the conjugation of words in
only in the imperfect tenses : o-ßt-o-- alone has a 2 aor, (intrans.).
Even in the imperfect tenses many forms occur made from the
C. F, in pv after the analogy of verbs in <■>. The subj. is formed
almost eiclusively after that type.
341. The following tables contain those parts of these verbs
in which they differ from verbs of the 1st conjugation.
Bemarhs,
342. In the imperfect tenses of Be- and Ôo- single forms occur,
deduced from the 0. F. riôe-, Ôiôo-, according to the rules of the
1st conjugation. It is not possible to decide, in some cases, on
the claims of such forms to be admitted, as they are but of rare
occurrence, and the MSS. are far from unanimous.
343. Three verbs of this conjugation—ôe-, place; è-, send;
and 5o-, give—have an anomalous 1 aor. indie, in -ko, eßrjkä, I
placed; qm, I sent; ebtùKa, Igavc^: this form is exclusively used
in the singular for the 2 aor., sometimes in the 3 p. plur., and
yet more rarely in the dual and the other persons of the plur.
In the other moods and the participle the 2 aor. alone is used in
• Attic Greek,
344. In the 2 aor. indie, of ara-, stand, the vowel of the root is
lengthened throughout the tense. This tense is intransitive,
• These forms in -ica, -k&q, -«(v), should perhaps be viewed as forms
of the 2 aor, tense with the person-endings a, àç, e (§ 298), k being
then inserted to prevent the concurrence of vowels as in the perf. act.
(§ 298). See Ahrens, p. 97.
/
YERBÂli ADJECTIVES.
101
like the tenses of the same form noticed in § 332. On the sig¬
nification of the different tenses of ora-, see § 333.
345. In the perfect of ora- an aspirate remains as a trace of
the reduplication, iarriKo. for tretxn^Ka, In the past-perfect the
forms without the augment are more common, éa-rrjkrf (or -kuv),
€<rrTfKrjs (or etc. ; but eia-TrfKtjf etc., also occur. Of these
tenses many forms are often syncopated, or, rather, are made
without the insertion of k (§ 290) : as, ia-räfxevy cVrarf, etc., for
€0"n)KafjL€Vj etc., in the present-perf. ; iaràaâv for k(Trr¡Kfmtv in the
3 p. pi. of the past-perf. ; €<rT<ûfX€Uy €aTaiTjv, etc., for
f<mjKOíT)Vf etc., in the subjunctive ; íarávaiy for i<TTr¡K€vaiy in the
infin. ; «otöt-, for cotíj/cot-, in the part. (N, S, ecrrör, ecrrwo-o,
íOTor). In like manner are made many fonns of the perfect
tenses of dai/-, die, and ßa-, go,
346. As the perfect of ora-, íoTr¡Ka, I stand, has the force of a
new present (intrans.), a future is formed from it, I shall
stand,
347. In the perfect of ôe- and e-, the vowel is irregularly
lengthened into €t, not rj. The vowel of o-ra-, and 3o-, remains
short in the perf. and 1 aor. passive, and the vowel of öc- and
in the 1 aor. pass.
348. In the present tenses subj. of So-, the vowel o, instead of
undergoing contraction with the termination, is lengthened, and
then absorbs the following vowel, (imperf.), d<ús (indef.)
not Bïàois, 8oiç, etc.
Yerbal Adjectives,
349. The verbal adjectives are a kind of participles.
350. The first class of verbal adjectives is formed by adding
the syllable to the C. F. of the verb. In meaning they either
correspond to the Latin participles in -to, or convey the idea of
possibility : thus from C. F. Xu-, loosm, is formed the verbal
adjective Xüto- (m. n. ; Xvra-, f.), loosened, or able to be loosened
(in Latin soluto- or solubili-),
351. The second class of verbal adjectives is formed by adding
-TÍO to the C. F. of the verb. These have the signification of
necessity, corresponding to the Latin participle in -ndo: as,
Xureo- (XuTía-, f.), solvendo-, Xutíou ecriu, one must loosen,
352. Final consonants undergo the usual modifications before
these endings : final vowels are, generally, lengthened as before
other endings beginning with a consonant.
102
CONJUGATION OF AN ACTIVE VERB, WITH THE
ENGLISH TRANSLATION.*
353. CJP, ypà<l>-, write.
Principal parts : ypaijr-, ycypa^-, c-ypa^a-.
Indicative Mood.
Present-Imperfect Tense, ypa^.
As a present-imperfect, am inp :
rpap/iara ttpoy top nar^pa /lou I am writing to my father.
ypa<f><o,
ypafißara vpos top rrarepa <rov Ycuf are writing to your father*
ypa<f>€is,
ypofifiara npos top Trarepa iavTov Me is writing to his father.
ypa<t>€t,
ypafifMira irpos tovs irarepaç ^/x<op We are writing to our fathers.
yp<t<f>ofi€p,
ypappwa rrpos tovç 7raT€pas*€pap You are writing to your fathers.
ypa<f>€T€,
ypafifjLora npos tovs iraTcpas iav- They are writing to their fathers.
Tap ypaipovaip,
i
354. as a present, including past time, have been ing:
TToXui» lyôi; xpoí'oi' ypa<l>a, I have been writing now a long time.
TToXw i)br¡ xpoFov ypa<p€is, You have been rvriting now a long time.
etc. eta
355. as a present of custom :
€ya ÍP bi<f>6(pa ypa<f>a, IX write on parchment.
<rv €p ßvß\a ypa<f>€iç, You write on papyrus,
^Ktipot €P nïpaKÏ ypa<l>€i, Me wrxtcs on a tablet.
etc, etc.
* It has not been thonght necessary to include the persons of the
Dual in the following sections The translation will always be the
same as that of the corresponding persons of the Plural, with the sub¬
stitution of You two. They two, and (in the Middle and Passive) We
two, for You, They, We.
t Or, thou art writing to thy father.
{ With an emphasis on the pronouns, I, you, he, etc. In Greek, as in
Latin, the nominatives of the personal pronouns are not generally nsed^
unless by way of emphasis or contrast.
COIïJUOATlON. 103
^6. in a dependent claiise after a present :
ép^s 6rï Tovra <rot yoa<^c0 ; Do ym see that I am rvritmg this
for y out
opas orí rauT epoi ypa<f>€is ; Do you see that you are writing
this for met
etc. etc.
357. in a dependent clause after a past, translated by a
past ;
cXcyov ort paTr^v ypa<j><ûj% They said that I was writing in rain.
«Xcyov oTi parrjtf ypa<j>tis. They Said that you were writing in vain.
etc. etc. '
358. in an indirect question after a present :
ovK otS* ó Ti ypa(j><û, I do not know what I am writing.
ovK oia-B* 6 Ti ypa<l>€is, You do not know what you are writing.
etc. etc.
359. in an indirect question after a past, translated by
a past :
rpropovp tX ypacfxa,^ They were in douM what I was writing,
rjiropet ti ypa(¡>€is, He was in doubt what you were writing.
etc. etc.
360. Past-Imperfect Tense, typaff}-.
As a past-imperfect, was ing:
€ypa<f>ov oBt 6 nais €i<rr)\Ô€v, I was writing when the hoy came in.
.€ypafp€s off 6 nais €t<njKôcv, Youwerewritingwhenpiehoycamein.
eypa^ev 6Ô* 6 nais eioTjXÔev, He was rvriting wken the hoy came in.
€ypa<f>op€v off ó nais €to7jkÓ€v,WewerewrítÍ7igw?ienthehoycamein.
(ypa<f>€T€ off Ô Trat? ftcn/Xdfv, Youwerewritingwhenthehoycamein.
éypa<l>oy éô* o nais eiariXBcv, They were writing wken the hoy came
in.
361. as a past tense, including time preceding, had
heen ing :
noXijv tj^Tj xpopov fypaipov, I had heen then writing a long time.
noKvv i/Si; xpo^'ov €ypa<^es, You had heen then rvriting a long time.
etc. etc.
§ The past subjunctive is also frequent in this construction; §§379,
380.
104 CONJUGATION OF
*
I
362. 83 a past tense of custom :
cyo) cv àt(l>ê€pç a€t €ypa<f>op, I always wroté^ on parchment,
try €v ßvßXtp aei €ypa<f>€Sy . You always Tvrote on papyrus,
etc. etc.
363. in hypotheses known to be unreal ;
a, of present time :
it prj fôit, ovK av (ypa(j>ov, If it were not necessaiy^ I should not
he writing,
ft pt) iSft; OVK av €ypa(j)€Sf If it were not necessary^ you would not
he writing,
etc. etc.
h. of past time, and implying duration or repetition :
it êepXç rjVf eypa<f)ov av ava frâcr- Sad it been lawful^ I should have
av ^pfpàv, written every day,
etc. etc.
364. Future Tense, ypayjr-.
Translated by shall, willy and by a present after « :
it TTOvra KaXfùs i^ci, avpiov ypa^a, If all is well, I shall write
to-morrow,
it navra koKcís f^ít> avpiov ypayj^ds. If all is well, you ivill wrxte
to-morrow.
it ncvra k(iK(ûç íl'it, avpiov ypayj/ei, If all is well, he will Torxte
to-morrow.
it navra kclKîùs i^tt, avpiov ypayj/opev, If all is well, we shall write
to-morrow.
it navra KaXas c^ft, avptof ypayj/ere, If all is well, y&U will write
to-morrow.
it navra KaXcas c^ftj avpiov ypayjrovaiv, If all is well, they will write
to-morrow.
365. by should, would, in a dependent clause after a
past :
»?7ritXî;<ra ort avrÏKa ypay¡rú>,'\' I threatened that I should write at
once,
rjnfiXrjo-a on aunxa ypayfrcis, I threatened that you would rvrite
nt once.
etc. etc.
* Or, used to write.
t TJie future subjunctive is also used in this construction: § 386,
AK XCnVM VERB. 105
366. by a present after ÔTrm :
fifXi/trcc Ty Ttarpï ànaç ypa\¡ra>, My father will See to it that I write*
etc. etc.
!
367. Present'Perfect Tense^ yeypä(f>-.
Translated by have en :
iravra aKpTBm yfypâ<f>àf I have written everything accurately,
navra axpißm ycypa^aj-, You have written everything accurately,
navra aKpißas yfypacjxv. He has written everything accurately.
navra aKptßas y€ypa<f>ap€Vf We have written everything accurately,
navra aKpißois y€ypa<]>är€, You have written everything accurately,
navra avpißats y€ypa<f>âa-ïvjThey have written everything accurately.
368. Past-Perfect Tense^ tyeypáíjx-.
Translated by had en :
ore ravr eyiyvero, rov Xoyov eye- When this happened, I had
ypa<f>rj, written the speech,
ore ravT e'yiyvero, rov Xoyov eye- When this happened, you had
ypa<f>i]ç, written the speech,
ore ravr eytyveTO, rov Xoyov eye- When this happened, he had
ypa<f>ei, written the speech.
ore ravr eyiyvero, rovr Xoyovy eye- When this happened, we had
ypatpeipev, written the speeches,
ore ravr eytyvero, Touy Xoyous eye- When this happened, yoU had
ypa(f>eir€, written the speeches,
ore ravr eytyvero, rovs Xoyouy eye- When this happened, they had
ypa<f>ea-av, written the speeches.
369. Aorist Tense, e-ypa^a-.
Translated by an English past :
xdes npos rov fpnopov typayf/-ä, Yesterday I wrote to the merchant.
XÔes npos rov epnopov eypayfras. Yesterday you wrote to the mer¬
chant.
xßes npos rov epnopov eypayftev, Yesterday he wrote to the merchant.
ff npos rov €pnopov eyparjrafiev. Yesterday we Tvrote to the merchant.
X^ts npos rov fpnopov eypa>/raTf, Yesterday you wrote to the mer¬
chant.
xd^s npos rov €pnopov eypaij/^av, Yesterday they wrote to the mer-
chant»
106 OOKJDGATION OF
370. ^ Än English past-perfect (after tirft, ennbrj, etc.) :
eirtidtj navT àptTravoufirjVy When I had written ally I resteéU
€ir€ibr¡ navT £yp<^i^oç, ixveiravtra. When you had written ally you
rested,
eTTfiôiy navT eypo^lrev, av^iravtrâroy Whenhehadwritten all,he rested,
etc. etc.
371. — io hypotheses known to be unreal, of past time :
€i €K€\fv<ras, eypayj/ äv, If you had ordered, I should have written,
€i eK(\ev<T€y, «ypa^aç av, If he had ordered, you would have written,
€i fKfktvoa, €ypa^€v av, IJ I had ordered, he would have rvritten.
etc, etc.
372. in an indirect question, by had en (after a
past) :
Optdrà Ti irpos rov epiropov rypa^a,* He ashed what I had written
to the merchant,
etc. etc.
373. Subjunctive Mood.
Present'Imperfect Tense, ypä<l>-.
Translated by may (object) ;
ypa<f>ida pot dïàoxrïy, 'ïvà paov He gives me a style, that I may
ypàifxû, write more easily,
ypa<f>iàa aot àiàtoatv, iva paov He gives you a Style, that you
ypa(l>7js, may write more easily,
ypa(l>iàa avT<ù àib<ùaiv, iva pi^ov He gives him a style, that he
ypa(j>rf, may write more easily,
ypa<f>iààs did<ùa-tv, Iva paov He gives US styles, that we may
ypa(f>tí)p€v, write more easily,
ypa<f>iàas ^vpïv didaxriv, iva paov He gives y OU Styles, that you
ypa<f>TjT€, may nrrite more easily,
ypa(fiiàas aurotí Stdúxriv, iva paov He gives them styles, that they
ypa<l><i>trïv, may write more easily.
374 by might (object), after a past :
ypa(l>iàa poi cà<ûK€v, iva paov He gave me a style, that I
ypa<^<ù,^: might write more easily,
etc. etc.
* The past subjunctive of the same tense is (very rarely) found in
this construction,
t The past subjunctive is also frequent in this construction: § 381.
AN ACnTfi VERB. 107
375. - by ft present indie, (offer cav, etc.) :
edp fffpc iroXKiûv V ^ things,
QW€tfnjKuts ctToficu, -f shdïl sooft bs tivcd*
¿rdv irept ttoXXöv yp<^<l>Vh Whenever gou write about many
âirayopcvetç, things, you soon grow tired,
6<TTÏsâpir€pt-jr6KK<avypaffti3,raj^ Whoever writes about many
airayop€V€i, things, soon grows tired,
fas av ypa<fMûfi€v, iTTyap€v, As long as we are writing, we
are silent.
etc. etc.
376. by a present indie, (after prf) :
<f>oßovpat prj pdrrjv ypa(f>a>, Ifear that I am writing* in vam.
eta etc.
377. by am to or to (deliberative) :
iras nept rovrav ypa<l>a ; Sow am I to write about this t
ovdev ^ yp^^V^f You have nothing to write.
Tras ovp Tiff Ttfpi rovrav ypa(f>r¡ ;+ How, then, is any one to write
about this f
eta etc.
378. by let me or us (hortative), in the 1st pers. only :
<f>€p€ brj, Travra Trpos avTov ypa<pa, Come, then, let me write every¬
thing to him.
prj ypa<l)ap€v, Let US not write {be writing).
379. Past-Imperfect Tense, ypâ(f>-.
Translated by a past indie, (conversion of indie. §§ 356,357) :
€iiroir ori pa-njv ypdipoipX, They said that I was writing in vain,
tiirov ort paTT¡v ypa<pois, They said that you were writing in vain.
ciTroi* ort parrjv ypa^ot, They said that he was writing in vain.
^trrov ort parrjp ypaiftoipcv. They said that we were writing in vain.
ttTTop ¿TI parrjp ypa<j>otT€, They said that you were writing in vain,
ftnop ort parrjv ypa(l>oi€v, They said that they were writing in vain,
* Or, less commonly, shall be writing.
t This use of the pres. subj. lo express deliberation, is confined to the
Ist and 3rd persons, except in a dependent sentence. As an interroga*
tive, it is more frequent in the 1st than in the 3rd person.
I
108 CONJUGATION OF
%
I
380. by a past indie, in an indirect question (conver¬
sion of indie. §§ 358,359) :
rjpovTO €i irpos rov yepovra ypa<f>- . They ttshed if I fOüS WTttitig* to
oipiy the old man*
etc. etc.
381. by might (object), (conversion of pres. subj. § 373) :
.ypa(l>iàa got, ^biùKevy iva paov He gave me a style^ that I might
ypa<f>oipiy write more easily.
etc. etc.
382. by a past indie, (conversion of pres. subj. § 375) :
7rpo€i7rtv oTiy €t irepi woWav ypa<p- He foretold thatyif I wrote about
oifiiy ra)¿ a7r€tpY¡K<ús eaoiprjVy many things, I should soon be
tired.
etTref ort oaris irfpi ttoWodv ypa<}>- He said that whoever wrote about
ot, rax urrayopevoi, many things, soou grew tired.
etc. etc.
383. —— by a past indie., to express repetition (in a se¬
condary clause) :
ojToTf ypa(f>oipi, ó îTots eireaKo- Whenever J was writing, the
TTcijt l>oy looked on,
etc. etc.
384. by were to, would (hypothesis) :
« KfXíuoíí, ijÔfû)? av ypa<f)oipi, If you were to order, I would
gladly write.
€i KiXevoi, rj8f<ùs av ypa<j>oiç, If he were to order, you would
gladly write.
etc. etc.
385. by Tnay, to express a wish :
'âii TO jcaXa ypai^oipi ! 3fay I always write good news !
etc. etc.
386. Future Tense, ypayfr-.
Translated by should, would (conversion of indie., §§ 364, 365) ;
ijir€i\rj<ra ort avrtKa ypa^p'Olpï, I threatened that I should wrxte
at once,
* Or, was to write (conversion of pres. subj. § 377).
t As far as the relative clause is concerned, this is virtually a parti¬
cular case of the preceding usage. Compare the construction so com-
nion in Livy, e. g. xxi. 11 : laiius quam qua caderetur ruebat.
AN ACTIVE fERR 109
ij7r€iXij(7"âç ¿Ti avTiKci ypoyj^oiíj I'íWí thTCdt^fíiCái tJldt ywh TVOuld
Tvrite at once.
ort QVTíKci ypoyj^otf He tliTeatencd that he wcnld
write at once.
ijiT€i\ri<Tapi€p oTi avTiKd ypayf/otpePf Tf^e threatened that we should
write at once.
fprtCKrjoart on avriKa ypayf^om. You threatened that you would
write at once.
Tfrntkr^oav ori axrriKa ypayfroiçVf They threatened thai they would
write at once.
387. Present-Perfect Tense, yeypäif)-.
After ear, etc,, to express a completed action :
ëâv y€ypa<f><û avairavopLat, If I have finished writing, I rest.
oTav yfypa<t>r)s avarravrjj When you havefinished writing, you
rest.
Off av y(yp^<j>j} avanaveTaij Whoever hasfinished writing, rests.
eàv y€ypa<f><úp€u avawavofxçôa, If we have finished writing, we rest.
oTay y(ypa<j)TjT€ ai'aîravfo'Ôf, When you havefinished writing, you
rest.
ol av y€ypa<l>ù}iTÏv avaTravovrai, Whoever havefinished writing, rest.
388. Past-Perfect Tense, y€ypa(j)-.
Translated by had en (conversion of a perf. indie., § 367) :
rjyyeîKàv on navra y^ypa^oir^v, They hrought word that I had
finished writing.
r¡yyi¿Kav on Traîna y^ypa^otijff, They brought word that you had
finished writing.
r\yy^CKav on Travra y^ypn<f)oiTj, They brought word that he had
finished writing.
i)Yi^CKav on navra y^yp^^oip-tUj They brought word that we had
finished writing.
rjyy€i\av on navra ycypn<fioir€j They brought wmd that you had
finished writing.
f^yyeiKav on navra y^ypQfpoiev, They brought word that they
hadfinished writing.
389. by had (conversion of a pres.-perf. subj.,
§ 387):
einev on, €i navra y€yp<^^oirjv, ava- He said that, if (when) I had
navotpjjv, finished nrriting, I rested.
etc. etc.
110
CONJUGATION OF
390.
Present-Indefinite Tense (A or. Subj.), ypayfra-.
'^^''ÄQslated by ma^ (object) :
yp^i>iba poi bïb<û<rtv, 'tea irpos
TOP y^povra ypayjratf
ypa<f}iba <roi bibao'tPy ipa trpos top
y^povra ypa^i/ç,
ypatfnba avrtú btbaxripf ipa npos
TOP yepoiTa ypayjrijj
ypa<f)i^aç ^pij, ôtSûXTii', ¡pa irpoç
TOP ytpoPTa ypayjrœptp,
ypaffïtbaç vpip bib<û<riPf ipa irpoç
TOP yçpotrra ypo'^i)T€,
ypa(l>tbas avrois btb<ù<riPy îpa npos
TOP y€poPTa ypayj^iûiTÏPy
391.
He is gwing me a style^ that I
may rvrite to the old man.
He w giving you a style, that yoií
may rvrite to the old man.
He is giving him a style, that he
may rvrite to the old man.
He is giving us styles, that rve
may rvrite to the old man.
He is giving you styles, that you
may rvrite to the old man.
He is giving them styles, that
they may rvrite to the old man.
by might (object), after a past :
ypa<l>ida pot tbtaKep, ipa irpos oe He gave me a style, that I might
ypa^lra, write to you.
etc. etc.
392. by have en (after relative pronouns and con¬
junctions with ap) :
€ir€ibäp ravrà ypa^ta, a7r€ipi,
eiretbap Tavra ypo^hfs, airei,
€7r€í8ap ravTa ypoyl^y, airfitrtp.
etc.
When I have rvritten this, 1
shall go away.
When you have rvritten this, you
will go away.
When he has rvritten this, he
will go anvay.
etc.
393.
by a present indie., in a conditional clause with a»'.*
€0p TTpos TOP pov ypa^ú>, If I write to my brother, he
aVTiKa wapiorat,
€ap npos TOP ab€\<pop trov ypayjrjjs,
avTiKa TrapfoTot,
etc.
rvill come at once.
If you write to your brother, he
will come at once.
etc.
394.
by shall, will (after prj) :
<f>o߀iTai prj pa-njp ypa^w, He is afraid that I shall rvrite in vain*
(fyoßeiTOi ptf pa-njp ypa^yr, He is afraid that you rvill rvrite in vain.
etc. etc.
• This is a particular case of the preceding use, though the English
translation differs : the Latin would employ the future-perfect, scripsero,
etc.. in both cases.
AN Acnvs VfiRB
111
395. ——— by am to ox to (deliberative) :
âfroptt ¿TTtoí ypa^ö 'a yo®,* I am at a loss horn to rvrite
what I think
ovK óíTOff ypoi^s à vofií, You do not know how to Tvrxte
what you think.
etc. etc.
396. —— by let me ox us (hortative), in the 1 pers. only :
3i7, trpos rov ycpovra ypa^p-a, Come, thm, let me write to the
old man.
4>tp€ àrjf wpos TOP ycpovra ypaylr- Come, then, let us write to the
ap€p, old man.
397. as an imperative (only with prj, § 407) :
prj ypa^ltrfs npos top ytpovra, Do not write to the old man.
irpo^ TOP y^povra ypaifr^. Let no one write to the old man,
pt) ypayjrrjTe npos top yepopva, ^ Do not write to the old man.
M *ypa^®<rí npos top ytpopra. Let them not write to the old mm.
398. Past-Iiidefinite Tense (Aor. Opt.), ypœ^a-.
Translated by a past-perfect indie, (conversion of aor. indie.,
§ 369):
uiT€p on pa-njp yptx^aipX, He Said that I had written in vain.
ttTTcti on parrfp ypayjrfiaç, You said that you had written in vain.
ctTTOp on pa-njp ypa^€t€p, J said that he had written in vain.
ítTTop ort parqv ypayjfaiptp, They said that we had written in vain.
€ tirare ért parrjp ypayj/aire. You said that you had written in vain
etiropep on partjv ypa^jr€lâp, We said that they had written in vain.
399. by was to, to (conversion of pres.-indef. subj.,
§ 395):
r]iropow ó n npos top epiropop I was at a loss what to write to
ypa^atpt, the merchant.
i\popro €t TTpos TOP epiropop ypa^- They asked if he was to write\
eiep, to the merchant.
etc. etc.
* Compare § 377: and on the difícrcnce between the aorist and the
imperfect in this and similar cases, see the Syntax. The introduction
of ¿Trop®, etc., as they are in the present, has no effect on either mood
or tense.
f Or, very rarely, if he had written ; but the aor. indie, is almost
invariably used in such a case* see § 372.
112
COKJUGATIOIT OF
400. by might (object), (conversion of pres,-mdef. subj.,
§ 390):
ypa<fn^a /XOÍ €B<ûk€v, iva vpos rov He gave me a style, that I might
yfpovra ypay¡taipi, write to the old man.
*
etc. etc.'
401. by had en (conversion of pres.-indef. subj.,
§392);
'iíírca^€To ort, eTretôiy ravra ypayff He promised that, when I had
amoiTjv, written this, I should go away.
virça-)^iETo on, €7r€ibr) ravra ypa>/^- He promised that, when you had
€tas, amois, written this, you should go
away.
etc. etc.
402. by a past indie., to express repetition in a se¬
condary clause :
(irrore nept epavrov ypayfratpi, If ever I wrote (had writtefi)
€daupa¿ci', about my self,he wa^ surprised.
etc. etc.
403. by were to,... would (hypothesis) :
ft Trpoi rov ad€\(l>ov pov ypayjrai- If I were to write (ox,If I WTOté)
pi, avTiK av TrapàyçvoiTo, to my brother, he would come
at once.
€i irpos rov aÓ€\(¡>ov <rov ypa^j/etai, If you were to wr%te to your bro-
avTiK av 7rapay€voiTo, ther, he would come at once.
etc. etc.
404. by may (expressing a wish) ;
Taxa aoi ra KoXa ypayj/aipt ! JUay I soon write you good news !
pTjTTore ra KUKoi ypa^€ias ! May you never write bad news I
etc. etc.
«
40t\ Imperative Mood.
Imperfect Tense, ypâ<^.
Of a present, or continuous, or repeated action :
ypa<f>€, Write I or, go on writing f
ypâ<f>€rœ, Let him Write, etc.
ypa<fi€T€^ Write! eto.
ypâ<f>ovr<ûv, Let them write, etc.
ak active verb.
113
\
406. with fxrf :
fxrj ypä(f)€, Bon't be vrriting,
firj ypa(pcTa}j DofCt Ict hwt 00 OU W7*itifig* ^
407. Âiyrist Tense, ypa^|ra'.
Of a single act ;
ypa-^lrop ravra, Write this !
ypayfAara ravra, Let hiîïl write this.
ypayfAare ravra, Write tMs !
ypayjravr<ùv ravra, Let them wnte this.
For prohibitions ih the Aorist, see ^ 397.*
408. Infinitive Mood.
Iinperfect Tense, ypa(¡>-.
Translated by to :
aiaxóropai irakiv ypa<p€ip, I am ashamed to write again.
409. With the article, translated by to , or ing :
Nom. ro Ka\m ypa<p€iv ox^eXi/xov To write well (or, writing well)
€arXv, is useful.
Acc, ot TToXXot ôavpa^ovaX ro kœ- Most men admire writing well.
Xa)î ypa(j>€ip,
Gen. €K rov Kd\<ùs ypa<j>€iv ttoXX' He derives much advantage from
a><j>€X€irai, ' writing well.
Hat, r<p Ka\<ûç ypa<f>Hp iravrav He excels all men in writing
*V7r€p€\€l, well.
410. ' by an English indie. :
otfiai KaK<ùs ypa(})€tp, I think {that) I write well (i. e. am a good
writer).
oict Kokiùs ypa<j>€tp, You think you write well.
»
œprjp koKcds ypa(j)€ip, I thought I wrote well,
iùero Kokm ypa<f>€ip, He thought he wrote well.
411. or with a pronoun in the accusative :
ofioXoyoucrtf epe koKcûs ypa(f>€ip. They Own that I write well.
¿/loXoyoui' ae /caXiay ypaipeip, I Owned that you wrote well.
* The perfect imperative is seldom wanted in the active voice, § 301.
la the passive it is regularly used when, not the performance, but the
completion of an act is contemplated: as, ravra yeypa^Bu), let this be
^ writteti, let me find this written (e. g. when I return).
i
114 coxjugal ion of
412. — by from ing (after words of hindering, etc.) :
ouSei' K<^viT€i ypa<j>uVf KotJiing shüll liinä&r ms from writing*
413. Future TensCy ypa^.
Translated by will (would) :
^ vTn<Tj(yovpai rj prjv ypa^|^€tVf I promise tJiüt I wtllreolly write.
ijattííov avTOp TToWaKis ypayj^eip, I hoped that he would often write*
414. Perfect Tense, yeypaKfr,
Translated by has {had) en :
TTovra y€ypa(j>€vai, Se says that he has written (i. e. has
fnished writing) all.
iravra y€ypa(f)€vat, He Said that he had written all.
415. Aorist Tense, ypayjra-.
Of a single act (in contrast with § 409) :
a.<rxpoy e<rrc ravra ypafcu, or ) ^ disgraceful to write this.
TO ravra ypayai ai<rxpov eariv, j ^
416. Of an act anterior to the time of the goreming verb (in
contrast with § 410) :
<f>7ja'iv €p€ ravra ypayfrai, He says that I wrote this.
c<p7} €p€ ravra ypc^jrai, He Said that I had written this.
417. Participles.
Impej^eet Tense, ypa<f>ovr-.
"With the article, translated by the er :
Nom. 6 ypacfxûv (^ ypa(l>ova'a), The writer (i. e. The man who w
writing, or who habitually writei^
Gen. rov ypa(f)ovros, Of the writer.
etc. etc.
418. Translated by ing :
ravra ypa<f><i>v €<rïyâ, He was Silent while writing this.
419. by an English indie, (after verbs of knowing, see¬
ing, etc.) ;
otôa parrjv ypa<f><ùp, I know that I am writing in vain.
ovK r¡h€<rav parTjp ypa(f>ovT€s, They did not know that they were
writing in vain.
or with a pronoun in the accus. :
opa} <r€ parrjv ypa^opra, I see that you are writing in vain.
an aciivb verb.
115
420. Future Tense, ypai/^ovr-.
Translated by to ^ intending to :
vapr¡K6ovrQvroro'^r¡<¡n.<TiMypa->^ / came forward to wnifi (i. e.
iùv, propose) this decree,
421. Perfect Tense, yeypaiftor-,
iravra y€ypa<l>m ^^€<as aTTcipi, Now that I have written all, 1
will gladly go away,
422. Aorist Tense, ypa^avr-.
With the article :
Nom, 6 ypa^ài, The writer (i. e. the man who wrote).
Gen, Tou ypayf^auToç, OJ the wrtter,
etc. etc.
423. Translated by having en, or after ing :
TTpov TOP abcX<f>op ypayjras ottjjx- j^ter writing to his brother, he
Ô€v, went away; or, He wrote to
his brother, and then went
away.
424. by an indie, (after verbs of hnorving, etc.) :
ovK oiàa ravrâ ypayjraç, I do not hnow that 1 wrote that,
€i^pp <r€ TToXXa parrjp ypayfrapra, I Saw that you had written much
in vain,
425. ' Verbal Abjective, ypa-rrr^o-,
ypaiTT^ov «OTÍ poL ravra ra '^rj' ^ must write (proposi) these de-
(f>ia'paTa, crees,
ypairreov cort croi ravra ra yjrrj' You must write these decrees.
(ßiaparä,
ypairreov eariv fjpiv ravra ra yj/rj- We must write these decrees.
, (piapara,
etc. etc.
CONJUGATION, IN THE FIRST PERSON, OF A REFLEC¬
TIVE, OF A DEPONENT, AND OF A PASSIVE VERB»
WITH THE ENGLISH TRANSLATION.
426. TpeiT' (m.), turn oneself, tahe to fight.
hex- (m.), receive,
X*;- (p.), he loosened, he released,
%
lie
, reflective, deponent,
Indicative Mood.
Present-Imperfect
rpeirofiai, I am twming myself,
d€xofiaij I am receiving.
\vofjLaif I am Jfeing released,
427. Past-Imperfect,
€Tp€7rofirfp, I was turning myself,
fàexoprjv, I was receiving,
fXvoprjVy I was being released,
428. Future,
rp^^opaij I sJtall turn myself,
Ô€|o^at, I shall receive,
XviTopai, 1 shall be (once and again) released.* (Fut.-Imperfl)
\vÓr¡a-opaiy I shall be released, (rut.-Indef.)
429. Present-Perfect.
T€Tpappaiy I have turned myself {am infullfight),
èeàeypai, I have received {am in possession of),
\e\vpat, I have been released {am free),
430. Past-Perfect.
€r€Tpappr}^, I had tumed myself {was in full flight).
€à€8€ypTjy, I had received {was in possession of),
€\€Kvpr]v, I had been released {was free).
431. Future-Perfect,
T€Tpa^opaiy I shall have turned myself {shall be in fullßight),
beàe^opcu, I shall have received {shall be in possession of),
\c\va-opai, I shall have been released {shall be free).
432. Aorist.
cTpäTtoprjVy I turned myself {tooh toßight),\
ebe^aprjVj I received,
€\vÔ7)Vj I was released.
* Oq the distinction between these two forms of the future passive,
see § 281. It has not been thought necessary to give the fut.-imperf.
and fut.-perf. in the other moods.
■f This veib also possesses a 1st aor. mid., tTprtpaprjUt etc, which is
used to mean, I caused to tum from me, I put to flight.
and passive verbs. 117
433. Subjunctive Mood.*
Present-ImperfeeL
^oßciTai fXTj TpeTTcùftcu, He is afraid that I am turning viysef
<l>oßHTat fiT] Tt dex^ofiaiy He is afraid that I am receiving something.
<f>o߀tTai pTj 'Kvoij.ttty He is afraid that I am 'being released.
434. Fast-Imperfect
^tirov otX tpfttoífxrjv, They said that 1 was turning myself
fiTToy «S ovStv 8€xoipr)v, They said that 1 was receiving nothing.
tiTTov ÓTÍ XvoiprjVy They said that I was being released.
435. Future.
TTpocLirov oTi TpeyfroLprjUy I gave out that I should tum mysef.
TTpoetTTov û>ç ovBev Se^otjui;!', I gave out that I should receive nothing.
TTpofiTTov on XvOrfO'oiprjv, I gave out that 1 should be released.
436. Present-Perfect.
€av t€tpapp€voi Ú) 8i(ûkov<tïv, If'\' I have turned mysef {am in
fullßight\ they pursue.
iflv Tt Bçàeypcffos o âavpa^ovaïvy If I have received (am in posses¬
sion of) anything y they wonder,
^av XeXvfievos w Xvirovuraiy If I have been released (am free),
they are grieved.
437. Past-Perfect.
fiuov on r€Tpapfà.€voç ttrjv. They said that I had turned my- •
self (was in full flight).
çiffov ¿S ouSfï' àeàeypevoç cirjVy They said that I had received
(was in possession of) nothing.
€ifrov oTi XfXvpevos eirjv. They said that I had been re-
»
leased (was free).
438. Aorist (Pres.-lndef).
oi'K €x<n oTTot TpaTTtapaiy I know not whither to tum myself,
ovàev (OTLv 6 Ti de^oipaiy There is nothing for meto receive.
«TTopù) OTTO)? Xvöü), I am at a loss how I am to be released.
* For the various modes of translating the subjunctive, see §§ 373—
404.
S
fue. Jf evert whenever.
118
reflective, 1>¿p0^'ent,
439. Aorist {Past-Indef.).
ov* €i)(ov ÓTToi TpairoifXT)p, I knew not rvliitker to tum myself.
ovhev r)v 6 Tt à€^aifiT)Py
rjTTOpovp OTvas Xvô^irfPf
440.
ITiere was nothing for me to receive.
1 was at a loss how I was to he released.
Imperative Mood.
Tp€7rOV,
hcxov,
Xvov,
441.
XcXvo"©,*
442.
TpOTTOV,
XvôrjTi,
Imperfect,
Tum yourself /
Beceive !
Be released !
Perfect.
Be free I
Aorist.
Tum yourself !^
Beceive !
Be released !
443.
Infinitive Mood.
Imperfect.
Tpt7r€<r6aL, To tum oneself.
Ö€;(€iröat, To receive.
\v€fT6aiy To he released.
444.
eXTTtç eoT«* ai^ouf Tpe\¡reaúai,
€\ms (OTiP axrrovs tí,
fXTTtff coTiP avTovs XvôrjireaOai,
Future.
There is hope that they will turn
thernselces.
There is hope that they will receive
something.
There is hope that they will he re¬
leased.
445.
TfTpaÔôai,
XeXvaôoi,
Perfect,
To have turned oneself {be in fullJlight\
To have received {be in possession).
To have been released {be free).
* Middle verbs, like active verbs, can seldom have a perfect impera¬
tive ; SedtKo occurs in a peculiar signification.
-t" See note page 119.
AND PASSIVE VERBS,
119
44e.
Aorist,
447,
448.
449.
450.
451.
TpaTr^aÛai,
be^aaûaty
Xvûrjvatf
To turn oneself*
To receive.
To 1)6 releiised.
Tp€irOfi€PO-y
Xvo/iefo-,
Tpeylropevo-,
Se^opevo-,
Xvûrjcroptpo-y
T€Tpapp€l'0-,
ôcôfy/ievo-,
\€\vp€PO-f
TpaTTopevo-y
ôi^a/xevo-,
XijêiVT'y
Participles.
Imperfect
Turning 07ieself.
Eeceiving.
Being released.
Future.
About to turn oneself.
About to receive.
About to be released.
Perfect.
Having turned oneself.
Having received.
Having been released.
Aorist.
Having turned oneself
Having received.
Having been released.f
Verbal Adjective,
XvTfOî €<rTt pot o BeapcùTTjç,
Xvrcot €i<rXv rjpiu at 8€<rpa)Taiy
XvTfâ €<m <roi r¡ yvvrj.
XvT€ai €i<riv vpiv at yvvaíK€Sy
etc.
I must release the prisoner.%
We must release the prisoners.
You must release the woman.
You must release the women.
etc.
* For the distinction between the aorist and imperfect of the impera¬
tive and infínitive, see the corresponding parts of
t For the distinction between the perf. and aor. participles, compare
the following sentences: \tKvptvoq iravra To\p<^ vouiv. Now that he is
freCy he dares to do everything; Xí0éíc àrrnKQtv oiKà^tj On being re-
Uasedy he went away home.
Literally, The prisoner is to he released by me. For the active con¬
struction of verbals in río-, see § 425.
120
SOME IRREGULAR AND DEFEOTIATE VERBS
CONJUGATED.
452.
Pres.-Imperf.
€trrX{v)
D. 2. tfTTOV
€(TTOV
p. €(rfx€y
(are
€t(ri{v)
s.
€<r-f he.
Indicative.
Past-Imperf,
,X ^ U rvas.
(also ijfiT)p) )
Tjirêâ
rjv
D, 2. rjOTOV or r)TOv
TJOTtJV or TJTTJV
P, rffiev
rjcrre or r¡T€
r)(räv
SüBJUNOTITE.
Fvtîire,
S, €<rofíaíf I shall he,
evr, (-ft)
ccrat
D. €<rofi€6op
€<r€<rôov
caeaOov
P, eaofifêa
€<r€aê€
€<rovTat
Pres. S. <t>f rjSy rj, J). TjTOPj rfjop. P. (ûfX€P, rjTfj a>a-i(p).
Past. S. €iTfpy €ir}Sj €í7]. D. €ir}TOPf eiJirrjp. P. eirj^cp, eitfcrap
or €i€P. Also, but less commonly, €itop, eipep, etc.
Put. eiroifirjPf e(ro£0, etc.
Imp£R« S. i(r6if eíTTú). P. fcrrof, €<rrcop. P. ecrre, ecrroxrav or oi^-
Tû)j', less commonly €<tt(ùp,
Inpin. Imperf. €ipai. Fut. €<T€a-6ai, Part. Iritperf. oir- (N. S, wp,
outra, op). Fut. etrou€uo-.
453.
t- (1. F. 6t-), go.
Indicative.
Pres.-Jmp. S. cifiXj ft, €i(rX(p)* D. XroPj Xrop, P. Xp€P, tre, iäcrX{p).
This tense is generally used as a future in the
indicative.
Past-Imp. S. rjeip or i;a, t)€is or rjçKrêâ^ ^€i{p), D. rjarop or r)TOP, rf€iTT)P
or T}rT)p, P, r¡€iyi€P or or r¡T(, n^trav.
The shorter forms are more common.
SuBJ. Pres. tû>, ii/r, etc. Past. toipX or tot^v, loty, tot, etc.
ImPER. S. tdi, tTO). D. ITOU, tTítíU. P, Xt€, lOPXtùP or trCDO'âu.
Inpin. teuat. Part, tour- (N.S. iwu, touira, lou).
* Thus accented—€7|ii, tZ, d(Tiv\ and so distinguished from the iden¬
tical tbrms of «a-, he, which are enclitic (tt¡AÍ, tíaiv), except the 2 p.
thou art.
I
t
IRREatJ^B AND DEFECTIVE VERBS CONJUGATED, 121
454 €- (I. F. •«-), let ffOf send.
This verb is conjugated like ôe- (rWe-), place, save that the t of
the reduplication in the imperf. tenses is generally long in Attic ;
ItjfjtX, Tcrai, 'ïei/T-, etc. ; and that the 3 plur. indie, pres. is Îâ<TÏ{v),
not í€áírí(v). In the 2 aor. act. and mid. and the 1 aor. pass,
the augment, which, however, is often neglected, is made in ft,
not rj (§ 251) ; av-eipev, we sent up; a(l)€i6i]v (or without augment
a(p€6tjv), I was let go. The simple verb is comparatively rare,
and many parts occur only in compounds.
455. fïè-, see, know.
This root, in the sense of see, only appears in the 2 aor. tense,
which is regularly formed; on the syllabic augment ftôov (i.e.
f^tÔoi/), see § 251.
With the signification know, the perfect and future tenses are
formed : they are as follows :—
Indicative.
Present-Perfect. Past-Perfect. Future.
S, otóíí, I know, r¡dr¡ or I knew. (iaofiat
oitr^a rjbrjcrôâ or i/ôfitrôa etc.
otôc(i') 7)àrj or
P.2.t(rTov rjàiiTov also rforov
lOrOV rjhfíTT^V T)<TTTJV
P. l<Tfl€V rfd€tfJL€V'\' Tja-fiev
tare
ï(râ(rï{v)^ jjèea-av Tj<Tav
SüBJ. Pres. ft8ú>, ciSijr, etc. Past. €ib€irjv, €ià€ir}s, etc.
Imper. i(t6Ï, icrrù), etc. Infin. etSei/at. Part, eibor- (N. S. ftSw?,
€lBviâ, €ldos).
456. fiK-, ke like.
Indic. Pres.-Perf eotKa, I am like, etc. 3 pi. foiKâirt(i') or €t|d-
o'ti', Past-Perf «úmiv.
Infin. foi/cerat. Part, çoikot- or etKor-.
457. say,
is conjugated like a-ra-, stand, except that it is without redupli¬
cation in the imperf. tenses, and that the 2 sing. pres. has an
anomalous t subsc.
* The regularly formed oiÎaç, otíáftev, otíarf, otiâ<rt(i/) are rare in
classical (ireek.
t Also ydepev, ySere, § 298; and in 2 p. sing, yêrjç or ySsiç,
1 :::s irregular and dej-'eciive verbs conjugated
Pr€S,-Imperf. <}>rj9f <¡>'i<rX{v)y fpäpev, etc.
Pmt-Imperf, €<¡>ijvy eiprjaOa (rarely €<^17^), €<}>7jy etc. : this tense is
also used as an aorist.
The future <f>r}(T<a and 1 aor. e<f>i]<Ta are only found with the
signification assert,
458. From a C. F. a-, sapj supposed by some to be (¡>a- with
the consonant thrown ofiF, are formed tjfu, say I; rju, said /; and
y}y said he. These forms are used parenthetically, like the Latin
inquam, and only occur in a few phrases.
459. From the root xp^~ formed an impersonal verb signi¬
fying necessity :—
ÏNDIC. Pres, xp% oportet. Past, ^xprjv or XPV^' XP^o'^^-
SuBJ. Pres, xpîJ' Post, XP^^V*
INFIN. xP^^ot, PART, (TO) xpewf.
460. Sometimes two or more verbs, which are conjugated in
part only, are used to supply each other's deficiencies. Thus
are conjugated
alpe- and éX- (ffX-), tahe. Pres. alpea ; fut. alprja-o» ; perf. ¿prjKa ;
2 aqr. eíXof ; 1 aor. pass. ^peÔrjv,
eô- and <f>äy-, eat. Pres. eadna (earlier €§0) and eo-Bca) ; fut. eèopai ;
perf, eÔijôoKu ; 2 aor, €<f>äyov ; 1 aor. pass. rjàeaÔTjv.
epx' (m.), t-, and cXiiÖ-, come. Pres. epxop-ai ; past-imperf. 17a ;
fut. eXeva-opaif oftener eipï ; perf. eXrjXvBä ; 2 aor. rjXOov. In
»
the other moods the forms of i- are used in the imperf.
instead of those of epx--
fa- and ßio-y live. Pres. fao) ; fut. ¿tjo-w and ßioxropat ; perf. ße-
ßiaKo. ; 2 aor. eßia>v,
ôpex' and dpàp- (or Spf/^-), Tnin, Pres. rp€x<o ; fut. Bpapovpai
(rarely úpe^opai) ; perf, deBpäprjKa ; 2 aor. eàpàpov (1 aor.
eêpe^à rare).
opa-, OTT-, and tô- (5'^")» ^oe. Pres. opa<o ; fut. oyjropaí ; perf. €<»-
pÜKa ; 2 aor. eiàov ; pass. perf. ¿cùpâpai and appai ; 1 aor.
ù)<p6t]v,
<pa-, ep- (pe-), aud etn- (fcTT-), say. Pres. (¡irjpï ; fut. epâ ; perf.
eiprjKa ; 2 aor. eiirov ; 1 aor. pass. €ppTjÔr)v. Some forms of
the 1 aor. act. eitra also frequently occur.
ip€p-y 01-, and €V€K- (eyic-), carry. Pres. ^epa> ; fut. ohtû) ; perf.
evr)voxà ; 2 aor. rjveyKov ; 1 aor. jjveyKa. For the variation of
usage between the two aorists, consult the Dictionary.
TENSES Oí- rERBS
153 '
461. Li liko manner the passive of ktcv-, killy does not occur
in Attic prose, the tenses of Oav- or âTroôap- being used instead—
a7ro6vr)a'Kov<Tif, they are heing put to death / rçÙvr}K€v, he is hilled ¡
ajTtóávovy they were hilled. So the fut. and 2 aor. mid. of aTro-ôo-,
aiTobcoirofxai and aTreSofirjVy are found in connection with wpa-, sell
(pres. irtTTpaaKio ; perf. ircTrpaKa) : and a 1 aor. cirpiaprjv in con¬
nection with <ûv€- (m.), buy.
PRINCIPAL TENSES OF VERBS.
462. In the following Tables of the Principal Tenses of Verbs,
the tenses are arranged in the following order,—present-imper¬
fect, future, present-perfect, aorist.* The tenses of the passive
are divided from those of the active by a colon (:). The letter
M signifies that the middle voice is in use. From the pres.-
Lmperf. act. may be deduced the past-imperf. act., and the pres.
and past-imperf. mid. and pass. : from the fut. act. the fut. mid.
(and fut.-imperf, pass.); from the pres.-perfect the past-perfect;
from the aor. act. the aor. mid. (generally) ; and from the aor.
pass, the fut.-indef. pass. When a middle form is cited among
the tenses of the active, or a passive form among the tenses of
the middle, etc., it is to be understood as ranging with them in
meaning. The verbs are divided into the classes distinguished
in §§ 262—270.
A verbal root is often strengthened in two' ways, i. e. has two
increased forms, some tenses being derived from one, some from
the other: as, C.F. Xäß- {cXaßop), 1. F. Xa/i/3av- (Kapßävtü) and
Xrjß' (\7j\lropa1). In this case the word is classified according to
the form appearing in the present, and the other form is gene¬
rally given after the pure 0. F, : thus, Xäß- (Xr/ß-) ; but when the
secondary increased form is made by an affixed f, as, C. F. /aoÖ-
(epaûop), I. F. pavÔâv- (jiav6áv<i))y and pâÔ€' {p€pâÔrjKa)y the C. F. is
written pââ-c,
* When the 1st and 2nd aorists (or perfects) are both in use, they are
both given, without a comma interposed. They are not distinguished
by (1) or (2) prefixed, as the learner should recognise them by the
formation. They are to be regarded as identical in meaning unless the
contrary is stated: but that form is generally placed first which occurs
most frequently.
124
TENSES OF VERBS*
A small stroke prefixed to a form {-bi^paa-KG}, etc.) signifies
that that form is only, or at least principally, found in com¬
pounds.*
I. The crude form is not increased : § 262,
463.
írX€#c-, plait
TjK', come
Ôtctf/c-, pursue
¿Xk- and cXicu-,
draw
hfpKr (m.), see
ay-, lead
Xey-, lay, collect
, tell
^Xcy-, scorch
opey-, stretch
K, r, X.
7r\€K0i>, îrXefû),- îrcTrXep^a, (irXf^a : ireTrXeypat,
€7rXaKtjv and €7rX€x$t]^. M.
f)K<ù (I am come), ^^<0.
àia>K<ù, ài<ù^<ù and -^opat, M.
ÍXkúj, íX^ot) and €XKV(rci>, ciXKVKOy dXKvtra : eíX-
Kvcpai, elXKvaôïjp. M.
àepKopaiy èep^opai, ôcÔopfca (= J)res.), eBpaKOv
fàepxêrjv and €SpaKT)v.
âyû), a^o), Tjxa, -qyâyop and r¡^a (very rare) :
Tjypaiy i]x$T)v. M.
XiycD, Xf ¿0), -€tXo;^a, cXe^a : XeXçypai and -etXey-
pat, iX€xór¡v and €X€yrjv. M.
Xcyû), Xf^cù, €X€^a: XeXeypat, (Xexßrjv, M. with
a perf. ôt-etXcypat.
<j>X€y(ú, <f)X€^<ú, €<l)X€^a : 7r€(f>Xçypaiy €(f>X€xßriv
and €<f)X€yTjv,
opeyû) and op€yvvpi, ope^cD, (opc^a : opù>p€ypai,
úupcxO^v. M. .
<j>Ô€yy (m.), Speak (jiôeyyopai, <f>ê€y^opai, cipôeypat, €<j>6€y^âpi]v.
oiy-, open, and oty<û and oiyvvpi, oi^a, : also in the com-
âv-oiy- pound ai'-€ö;^a and âv~€<ùya (intr.), âv-€<ù^a :
äp-€(oypai, äu-€<oxß^P'
<rr€py-, love crrepyo), o-rep^oi, foropya, earep^a.
€tpy-&€ipy-(pepy-), etpyû) and dpypvpi, eip^û) (ci-), cip^a (fl-): ctpy-
shut {out or î?l)t pat (et-), fipX^^P
fiaX-f-X paxopat, paxovpat and pax^copat (Ion.), pepa-
Xnpat-, cpàxeo-aprjv.
àex" (m.), receive dexopai, àe^opai, àedeypai, ebf^aprjui €B€xOo^'
♦ It is not, however, attempted to distinj^uish all those forms which
are only so found — a task proper to Dictionaries and special treatises,
such as those of Buttmann and Veitch, works from which, and from
Ahrens* Greek Acci¿lence, great assistance has been derived in drawing
up these lists.
f The aspirated forms signify sh.ut in, the nnaspirated shut out: but
the distinction is not observed in Homer.
X To be read ' pax- and paxf'
TENSES OF VERBS, 125
y
®X" ^X<® i<rx<«) (§ 485), é¿a> and <r-xr¡(T<úy eírx»?íca,
Äav^ : e(T\rifiai, eaxfBijp, M.
êpex") TUii Tpçx<ï>j úpc^op.ai, €$p€¿a. Fut. and aor, rare ;
see § 460.
otx^i" (m.), dß gotlß oixopaty otx'JO'opaif oix<t>ica»
apX'f Jirst^ rule apx^y ijp^a : VPX^V*
apxopaif ap^opaif ijpypaiy ijp^aprjv,
464. T, A, e.
ttct- and Trera- (m.), ircTopai (Att.) and mrapai, Trerijiropai and ttti;-
Jlg aopaif 7r€7roTTjpai (§ 269), eirrop-qv enräpijv
and (poet.) cttti^v. Late authors have an
anomalous present ínrapai.
aiw-T-, ÜCCOTíiplish àvvTiù and àvv<t)y avvacDy tfpVKay T)PV(ra : T)PV<Tpai,
r]Pvo-dr)P. M.
çô- (aeiÔ-), sing, aba, aa-opai and acro), r¡(ra : rjapai, DaBrjp, Also
a€($ci>, aeiaopaiy etc. in the poets.
€0-, eat €0(0 (poet.) ; see €0-, § 460.
ffà-{th.), be pleased fibopai, r¡<TÓr¡<Topaí, í¡(tót)v. See aÔ-, § 477.
icXft-d-and /cXeto), kX^ktü), ice/cX^tica, €/cXe£cra : K«X«<o'/iae and
shut K€K\€ipai, €k\€1(tÔi]p, Also lu oldcT Attíc
k\ij<û, KKrjcrcû, etc.
yj^fvÔ', deceive -^evo-ú), ei/^€v<ra: eyj^evcrpai, eyl/evaôrjp* M«
<nr€pb-, pour cirepèa), aTTdcco, «rTreiaa : eaTreiapai. M.
n€pô-, destroy nepOco, Trepo-©, cTrepo-a and enpaßop (Epic). Tho
common form is Tropee-, § 269.
cix^- (m.), be vexed axôopai, ax^etropai, rix'ô^fTÔriv.
465, n, B, 4>.
eV- (o-fTT-), be busy -eV©, -ei^©, -eoTTOf. More frequently in
about the middle
follow inopai, iy¡ropai, io'Troprjp.'t
ÔXcTr-, see jSXfTr©, ßXfyjrKü and -yjropat, /SeßXe^a, eßXeyj/^a.
* Also be the first to—, and so begin, with reference to others fol¬
lowing,
f The aspirate on this 2 aor. is anomalous, as e is of course augment,
and tr represents the * of the root Jtt- : we should therefore have expected
iüiropr¡v—t-atir-opií}V'. (compare f-OTrov in the active, and ioxov,
tiTTopriv, 2 aorists of oix- and wEr-). Accordingly in the unaugmented
forms k disappears, at least in the ordinary language, airwpai, trTre-
<r9at, etc.
. 126 ' TEXbES OF VERBS.
«
àpcTT-f pluck àpfira and (late) èp€iTTa>y dpc^ct>, ^Bpeyfra. M.
rpfîT-, tUTVl TOfTTW. T€Tpo(t>a Rud TfTpa^o, €rp€^a
aau cTparrov (poet.) : rerpappai, €Tpe<l>Ojjv and
€Tpa7njv, M.
TTfpTT-f send TTc/iTTo), TTffti/rWj 7r€wop<f>a, fTTepAf/^a TTeweppoi
(-fi^aí), €ir€p(f>ÔTjv, M,
TfpTT-, gladden rcpTTw, Tcpyjra}, ercpyp-a : €Tep<f>ûrfv and erapTrrju
(Ep.). M,
o-fß- (m.), revere o-eßofiai (rarely aeßcn), €<r€<f>ßrjv (very rare).
ypä(l)-j write ypa<l><û, ypayfro), y€ypà<pa, eypayfra : yeypafipai,
€ypa(j>i]v. M.
ôp€<f>-y nourish rpe*/»», Ûpeyfra>, T€Tpo</)a (trans. and intr.),
eâpeyjea : reOpappai^ €Tpâ<l>rfv and fOp€(l>êi]p. M.
<rrp€(f)-y twist a-Tpecjxú, orpe^w, €(rrpo<^a, carpera : tcrrpap-
pat, €OTpä(j>riv and ea-rpeôûrjv, M.
pfp0- (m.), Marne p^p^opat, pep^opat, epcpyfraprjv and epepipôrfv.
466. P, A, N, M.
ôfp-, Jîay ôfpw, ôepcû,* cBeipa : àedappai, ^dàprjp,
<pcp-, bear, carry <l>€pa> ; see § 460.
€Ö€X-€- and Ö€X-€-, edeX©, €0€Ki]<ra>, rjôeXrjKa, r¡6iKr¡(ra, Also d(Xa>,
mZZ, choose etc.
piK-e-, be a care peXw, piKrfO'üi, peprjXa, €p€\i]o'a,'Y
€7rt-/i€X-e- (ni.), eTTtpeXopat and -Xeopat, -peXi^cropai, -p^pcXi^pat,
care for -tpeXr^Or^v. The poets also use the simple
peXopac, etc.
pçXk'ç-fe going{tó) peXX©, peXkijao), epeWrjcra (and »yp-).
/3ovX-€-, ßovXopai, ßovXTj(ropai, ßfßovXijpai, €ßov\r)OTfv
(iß-). _
pçp-e-, 1 emaxn petita, pçpS), pcpçprjKa, €peipa.
p€p-€~, allot ffpo, yçpû), peveprjKa, eveipa : pepcprjpai, €f€-
pjjßrjv, M.
467. A.
rXa-, Svfer, dare , rXrja-opai, T€T\T}Ka, erXijc.
§pa-, do Bpacù, bpäo-cD, àeBpâKO, fhpäaa : àebpàpai, «ôpa-
aßr^v.
* In these contract futures the circumflex accent over the w is printed,
to indicate the inflection.
+ The tenses of the active are chiefly used impersonally, p€Att,
ptXjjfTft, etc.
TEN3ES 01^ VERBS.
127
¿pa-f see
Xpa-j ^tve {an
oracle)
xpa- (m.), nse (fur¬
nish oneself)
Kra- (m.), acquire
àijva- (m.), be able
67r«rra- (m.), know
TÏpa-f honour
irtipor, try
Ô€a- (m.), behold
468.
8f-, bind
want, lack
— (m.), want, ask
aiv€', praise
alp€', take
6pa<ù, ifùpàKa : see § 460.
X/Jaíü,
expqoBqv, M. {cousult an oracle). See xp«-»
§485.
Xpaopai (inf. xPV^^^h XPV^^^P^'h
K€xptjpai, €xpq(raprfu,
Kraopai, KTrjoopat, K€Krqpcii and cKrrjpai, tKrr¡-
cäpqv : €KTtj6rjv,
Bvvapai, àvvrj(ropai, deSvvqpai, €Bvprj6t)v (ïj8-)
^bvpaaOr^v and eàvvqo'âprjv (Ep.).
€iriaTapai, emoTfja'opai, qiTí(TTr¡Br¡v,
Other verbs in a (ca, la, pa) are conjugated like
ripaa>, ripqa-o), rçTÏpqKO, eTtprja-a : rerlpripai,
€TÏpqBqv, M,
7reipa<ù, 7r€ipä<ra>, TTfireipäKa, fireipaíra : Trerrçip-
äpai, €7r€ipö$rjv. M. (= act.) with 1 aor. pass,
and mid.
êeaopat, Beaaopai, redcäpai, côeàcràprjv,
E.
Ô€û), Bqaci, b€b€Ka, e8?;cra : àeàepai, càeôqp.
d€a>, ^€T](r<$>, BeècqKo, edcrfoa. Also impersonally
del, deq<T€i, etc.
deopai, derja-opai, Bedeijpai, edeqOrjv,
aiueo), aiveotí) (-t/cû) poet.), rjveKa, rjvecra {-qoa
poet.) : rjvrjpai, rjpeêqv. Chiefly used in the
compound cTraive-, (fut. eiraipeirico and -aopai).
aipeo, alpq(T(ù, yprjKa : r¡pr)pai, ¿peOqv, M. See
§ 460.
Other verbs in € are conjugated like
aiTeoD, aiTTjacù, rjrtjKa, rjTqira : rjTT}pai, J¡Tr¡6r¡v. ÄL
qyeopai, r¡yT¡<Topai, qyrjpcii, r)yr)(rápr¡v,
I.
KOvTcù, KOVL(r(ú, €KOvT<ra : K€KOVÏpai. M.
Tiù), Ttiro), ertíra : TíTÍpat.*
Xp"tci), XP^^^y explíTa : Kexpicrpat, expicB^v. M.
ctTf-, ask
(m.), lead
469.
Kovi-, make dusty
TI-, honour
Xpi-, rub, anoint
* This word IS confîned to the poets: in prose rîpa- is nsed instead
See also rt-, § 478.
128 ^ TENfetaS OP VERBS.
nai'f stiruie ?raia>, ?raicra> and 7ra(i7(rci>, miraïKay (iraKra. lu
pass. 7r\ày- is more used, § 474.
<rei-, sJuÛiC <r€<â), (r«((ra>, aeceiKay €<T€i<ra : a-€(r€t(rfiaiy €aw
trdr^v* M.
àf€t' (hFir)yfear deia-ofiai (Ep.), ÔeÔotKa and ÔfÔia {IJear\
€Ôec(ra. Homer bas also a pres. dctda> (in
] p. only).
oi-€' (m.), think oiofiai and otfxai (so <úo¡xr¡v and afxijv), oiy)fToixaty
iúrjdrjv,
KCl' (m.), lie Kctfiai, KCKTOfiau
470. O.
ßio-y live ßioa, ßiüxrofiaiy ßcßiajKo, cßiav and cßi<üaa (rare).
avâXo- {avä-foKo'), ai/a\o(o and audXiCKiOy àuàXuxriùy àraXœKa (or
use up avrj\')y äväXüxra (í?X-) : âvak<ùfiat (»?X-), avà*
Xiùôrju (»/X-).
äpo-, plough apocùy apoírioy rjpoíra : aprjpopaiy ijpoOnv.
Other verbs in o are conjugated like
ôouXo-, enslßve ôovXoo), BovXaxray ôcbovXaKOy cl^ovXoxra: àcàovX'
(ûpaiy càovXfûôrjv, M.
(m.), suhdue ;^eipoo/iat, xcipacopaiy cx^ipoxràprjv: Kcxcipapaiy
cx^f'pdiOrfv,
471. V.
àv'y cause to enter -SiT<o, -SÍJítú), -éSvo-a : -SeÔVjitai, -c^vôrfv,
, entcTy and Ôv^opai and ôv»'© (IV.)> ôûcro/iat, dcdvKOy càvp
(tr.) put on and (rarer) cdvo-äpi^p.
êv-y sacri/íce OtTû), dúo*©, rcûvKay côvaa : rcÚvpaiy ctvÛtjp, M.
Xu-, loosen XîT©, Xvo*©, XcXvKOy eXvira: XcXvpaiy cXvOtjp. M.
#c©Xu-, hinder *©Xv©, #c©Xûfr©,/ceK©XvKa, €/c©Xvo'a: KCKODXvptaiy
€K(ùXvôr)^' ^
pv (m.), rescue piTopaiy pvaopaiy cppvaâpTjp.
cpv and eipv-y cpvcù and cipva>y cpvcro) epv© and etpvo*©, cipv'
draw aa : cipvpai and cipvapaiy cipv<TÓr¡p, M.
<f>v-y {tr,} produce ^û''©, <f>v<rcby c<f)va'a.
—y (intr.) be bom ^tTopat, <^iraopaiy 7r€<pvKay €<pvp,
Trav-(iraf'l)yniake navo), irava-tù, TrcnavKOy cnavaa: ircnavpaiy cnav
ta cease Orjp and cnavo-êTjp. M.
ópav'f break dpav©, dpavo*©, edpavcro : rcBpavaai and rcOpav
apaiy cOpavo'êrjp»
TENSES OF VERBS.
129
«ccXeu-, order iceXevci), <ceX€va'6>. iccKcXfv/ca, c/ccXevcra : K€K(\(v^
(Tfjeaiy eK€\€vaêrjv, M.
Other verbs in ev are conjugated like
ÔovXet^>, deliberate ßovXevcüy ßovXevcray ßfßovXevKOj eßovXevaa :
߀ßov\€viJLaif fßovXevSrjv, M.
aKOv- {aKof-1), aKovcùy aKovcrofxai, aKrjKoOf r¡KOV(ra : rfKovafxai.
hear rjKovcßrjv»
472.
Ta/c-, 7ll€lt (tr.)
(intr.)
^vy-yßce
Tv^-, prepare
nXÔ-y persuade
o-aff-, TOt (tr.)
(intr.)
XtTT-, leave
TpXß-, rub
â\X(f)-, anoint
473.
a p- {afp-\ raise
KaÔâp-, cleanse
xap~t rejoice
€p~€» (in.)j O/Sh
àyep-y collect
cyep-, rouse
t
<f>Ô€p-, spoily de¬
stroy
Kep-, shear
II. The root-vowel is strengthened : § 263.
a. Verbs ending in a mute.
Tr¡K(úy €Tr)^a,
TTjKopaiy TerrjKay eraKrju,
<j)€vya>, <f>€v^opaL and -^ovpaiy Tre^cvya, cipvyov.
T€vx<a>f T€v^ci>, T€T€vxaf €T€v^a : rervypai, ervx"
6r)v* M.
Treiöü), flTficio, ireTTÇiKa and nenoiOa (intr.), cTrctcra
and ritXôov (poet.) : TreneccpaL, (ireio-dr^v* M.
<rr)ira)y (rrjyj/ayy earjylra,
cnjTTopait <r€(r7j7raf ecaTnjp.
XetTTci), Xeiyj/'cOf XeXotTra, eXwrov and eXeiy/ra (rare):
XeXeippaiy cXettpBrjv, M.
rpXßiüy rpi\l/^<û, TfTpXcpOy erpiyfra : rerpippaiy erpi-
ßrjv and €Tpi<j>êr}p, M.
âXet(^a>, aXeiyfro}, aXrjXX<[>a, ijXeiyIra : äXrfXippai,
rjXfKpÔrjv, M.
5. P, N.
*
aip<û (a€ip(ù)j a'pcù (aepw), rjpKOy r)pa : rjpputi,
rjpÔTjp. M. with 1 and 2 aor.
Kaßaipco, KaÔapoiy cKaÔrjpa : K€Kaûappaiy €Kaôap-
Ôrjp, M.
XaipoDy x<uprj<ray K^X^PV^^^ ^X"P7*'-
fipopai (Ion.), €pr¡<Topaiy rjpop-qp.
ayetpû), âyrfyçpKa, ijyeipa : àyrjyeppaty rjycpêqp. M.
€y€ip<úy eyepSty cyprjyopa (intr.), rjyeipa : ^yvy^P'
paiy T)y€pôr)p, M.
<f>$€ipci>y (jiôep&f €(f>dapKa and €(¡>Óopa (tr. and
intr.), f(l>Ô€ipa : €(l>6appat, €(l)Ôâpr)p, M,
K(tpû>, K€pS>, €K€lpa (KfpCTû) SUd CXCpaO, pOOt.) :
KfKOppaiy €Kaprjp,
130
TENSEB OF VSBBS.
irep-, pierce
tnrep-y SOnf
oSi/p- (m.), lament
(¡iäv-, (tr.) shew
-, (intr.) appear
fitap^t stain
Kpav~9 accomplish
Tc-v-, stretch
KTÍ-V-, hill
dXt-i/-, hend
KpX-Vy separate,
decide
awo-KpiP- (m.),
answer
apiju-y ward ojf
o^vp-y sharpen
o(p€\-y* owe
mipiOf tnetpa t nftrappaty ^Traprjp,
<r7r€ip<ûy trti €pô, 9<rTî^i,pa : €<mapp€Uy eanaptjv,
obvpopaty obvpovpaiy <»>bvpapt)v.
<l>aiv(Oy <f>âvS>, TTC^ayjca, €<f>rjpa : w€(f>a<rpaty
€<l>apêT}P.
(¡íaipopaiy (¡>âpovpaty 7r€(¡>Tjpay €^äpi)P»
piaipcùy piapS>y epiäpa : pepiao-paiy ^ptavêrjv,
Kpaiv<ûy Kpapa>y €Kpàpa : cKpapÛtjp, Like these
three are conjugated many words in âp
{tapy pap),
reii'd), T€P&y TfTaKGy €TÇipa : rerapai, €Ta6r¡p. ÄL
KTcipo), KT€pa>y €KTopa aod (later) €KraKa, €KTetpa
cKTUPop and ( poet. ) cKrai^. In prose
a7ro-KT€v- is used. For the passive, êâp-
(airo-êap-) was commonly employed, § 461.
KXïpîù, KXIPS», K€K\XKay €KkXpa : KeickXpaty €K\X0rip
(-pôrjp poet.) and €K\Xprfp. M.
Kpïpiûy KpXPO), K€KpXKay €Kpïpa I KCKpXpai, €KpX'
6rjp, M.
airoKpXpopaiy -KpXpovpat, -KCKpXpcUy aTtfKpXpaprjp
and (late) -€KpXÔt)p,
äpvpa, âpvpS>, rjpvpa. ]
u. f. f. I And hke these many
oivP<o, 0>ivyKa. o^ivppai V
or (o^vcpaiy a>^vp$r)p, )
o(j)eL\ci> and o^eXXo) (Fp.), 0(f>€i\rja'<0y a^ttkrjKa,
<»>(j>€L\rj(ra and (in a peculiar sense) a><f>€\op,
III. I cons, is added : § 264,
474.
<j)v\aK-, watch
íXXkt, roll
a. K, r, X (T).
(jyvXacfTO) (-TTû)), <f>vXa^(ùy 7re(j>vXâ)(ay €(¡>v\aia :
7re<^vXaypat, €<¡>v\ax0rj^' M.
eXtcríTú) and €tXi(r<r<û, (tí-), €ÏKi^a : et-
\iypaty €Í\ix6riP, M.
(l)pÏK-,bristle,shiver <j>pi<T<ra>, (j>pi^o>, 7r€(f>pXKa, e^pt¿a
KrfpvK", proclaim Krjpva-<r<ù, Ktjpv^o, KCKrjpvxOy efcrjpv^a', KCKrjpvy-
pat, €KT}pVX07}P,
a\Xày-, exchange aXXaco-o), aXXa^o), r¡XKax<h rjXKa^a : ijXKaypat,
ijWaxôrjp and rjXKâyrjp, M
• For other verhs in X sec § 476.
TENSES OF VERBS.
131
trXay- (frXrjy-),
strike
npay-f do
ray-, arrange
Ttaray-, Strike
a-(f>äy-, slag
rapax", Stir up,
confound
opvx-y dig
iràr-, ^rinkle .
îrXâr-, mould
íreTT-, cook
n\r}(ra(ù, nkrj^ci, írcTrXí^ya, €'jr\rj^a : ir€n\r¡ypai,
enkrjyrjv and (Att,) -(TrkayrfV. XÍ,
irpa<r<r(i), irpa^cj, mirpaxa and irenpaya (intr.)
eñpa^a : Trenpctypai, eirpaxOrjv, M»
Ta(ra'Ci,Ta^<ù,T€Tâxay^Ta^a:T€Taypai,€Tax3T)v, M.
Traraa-acú, varado), cirära^a. Eare in pass. : see
TrXay-.
cr^arro) ar^ (r(f>ai<ú, o-(j>a^<û, rcr^a^a ; ea^aypat,
€a'<l>ayr)v and €(T(Pax^^v (rare).
rapaocro), rapaba), T€rpJ/x® (iûtr.), crapa^a : re-
rapaypai, cràpaxÔrjv,
opvooiùy opv^oi, opopvxoy <úpv¡a:' optùpvypai
and (later) (opvypai, cDpvxOrjv.
7ra(r(r<ù, Traoto, eiracra : ireirao-pai, cTrao-Ôrjv,
rr\a<rcr(û, 7r\ä(r<o, eîrXaca : ireirkairpat, cttXo-
aôrjv, M.
Trecrtrú) and (later) Treîrro), Trcyj/ci), : neirep-
pat, €7r€(j)êi]v. Compare nepir-, § 465.
475.
k. A.
fepyàà- (m.), work €pya(opai, epyaoopat, eipyaopai, eipyaaapijv :
€ipya<r6rfv,
èap'àb-, tame Bapaia> and àapvi}pi (§ 481, n.), 8apacr<a and
èapC), ebapaíra : dedprjpai, ebâpaoêrjv and
€hàpi)v.
Other verbs in aÔ are conjugated like
ôavpah-, wonder 6avpa^<ù, Oavpaaopai, reÔavpaKa, eOavpaoa : Tf-
Bavpa^rpai, eôavpaaÛTjv.
<f>pàà-, tell (jypaio), (l>pa(r(û, ;re<^paKa, €<f)pàcra and (Ep.) ttî-
<f)pâdop: Ti^ppaapai, e(f>pa(T6r)v.
éô- (<re8-),* sit chiefly occurring in composition with Kara
Kadeb- \seatySit /câ^tfû), Kàôià, CKaÖXoa and Kaôifra.
and KaôXh-) (m.) sit Kadi^opai, KaôeBovpai, €KaÓe^opr]v.
* The simple word is rare. . On the connection between the forms
ñS' and iê-, and the existence of a present iZopai, see atS-, § 485, and
Buttmann, Irreg, Verbs, p. 129, etc. Erom the same root are regularly
made (§ 251) a 1 aor. act. and mid., flrra and elaapov, and a fut. éaopai
there is also a perfect kp^h I sit.
132
TENSES OF TERES.
Verbs in ïb are conjugated like
yofjiib'f deCMf thilik vofxt^cùy vofiX(r<ú (Ait. PoixiS>\ vevofiiKay €voyX<ra •
vtvofiKTfxaiy ^VOUUTÔTIP.
Xapi^OfAat, K€xapia-fiai, exápi(ráfir¡v.
XopXb' (m.), do u
favour
äppOT'yßt
4
0*0)5- and o*«»-, save
apnab' and ápiray-,
seize
iraià- and îraiy-,
sport
Kpay, scream
pey- (Fpey-) and
epy- ifcpy), work
(TTiy, prick
oipúiy-, cry otjLtoi
VÏ3-, wash
476.
'aX- (m.), leap
ßaX-, throw
<r^äX-, trip up
ayyeX-, report
'eX-, raise, rise
o-TfX-, equip
rïX-, pluck
apposa and âppOTT<a, áppoao), r¡ppoKa, Tjppo(ra :
^ppoapat, ^ppoaOqv. See (r(f>ay-, § 474.
o*a)¿o) and (toxo (Sp*)> croxro), crco'oxica, ftroxra :
trea-ciXTpai and ir€(T<i»pai, (aaOrjv»
âpna^o), àpTra<T<ù and -a-opat, TipnaKO, fipira<ra :
^p7ra<rpai, ^pTraaßrj^, Also (but not Attic)
âpTTa^a, ^/wra|a, etc. occur, and a late 2 aor.
pass. qpTrayrjv.
Tratad}, nai^ovpai and ^^opai, ireTraiKa, ciraiaai
irfiraitrpaL Later encu^a, etc.
Kpa^eù, K€Kpa^opai, KfKpäya, -cKpayov.
pe¿á> and epbcû, p€^<û and cplo), eopya (f^fopya),
eppe^a and ep^a (Ion.).
trrtfû), oTt^û), écrira : etrrtypai.
oip(ù(ù>, oip(o^opat, (ùpay^a : apcrypai.
vi^(û (late vitttùb), viy¡r(ú, eviyfra : vevippni, €Vi<f>'
ûrjV' M.
(?. A.
áXXopai, 'ä'Kovpai, rjXäpijv and ffKop-qv.^
ßaXXct), ßäXS>, ßeßhrfKa, eßaXov : ßeßXtjpat,
cß\ri07)p. M.
o'^oXXci), (T(f>â\S>, €(r<f>a\Ka, f<T(}>i)\a : €a'(f)a\.pai,
€<r(f>ä\i]y.
ayycXXû), ayyeXÄ, j;yy€XKa, ?/yyeiXa : ijyyiKpat,
TjyyikOrjp» M.
TfXXö), reraXKO, creiXa : reroXpat. M. (Chieflj
in compounds.)
OTcXXci), oreXô, eoroXxo, eorciXa : etrrakpat
€crTa\i]p, M.
TtXXo), TiXû), €TÏ\a : T€Ti\pai. M.
IV. A consonantal affix is added : § 265.
477. «. df orí' is added,
öiy-, touch ^iyyaf®, Bi^opai, e^iyoy.
TENSES OP VERBS.
133
XaX" (X»7X->
get ly lot
Tvx-€- (rtvx-), hity
happen
*a/iapT-€-, miss the
marky err
jSXatrT-e-, grow
aÔ-ç- {faB-)y please
Xph- hold
Xaö- (Xi;Ö-), lie hid
(m,),forget
X.ayxàv(ùy Xi;^o/wn, ciXrjxa and XeXoyxö (Ion.),
eXaxov : €t\Tjypai, íKtixOt^v.
Toyx^^fày r€v^onaiy rtrvx^'^'h tru^ov. '
'apapravwy 'áfi,apTr¡<ro¡xaiy fjpapTTjKay ^paprou :
'^papTTjpaiy rjpapTTjôrjv,
ßkaa-räudy ßXaanjo'coy (ßkaarrfKa (߀ß\-)y
eßXaaTov,
âvbavcùy *aàij(Tû>y «âÔa (fffâôa), caöoi/.
XavBavcDy x^^<ropaiy K€X<^vday cxabov.
XavêàiKo and \rj6<a (II«)> Xj/ctg), XcXi/öa, eXâêov :
XeXrja-pai,
Xavôavopai and Xrjôopaiy Xr)<ropaiy XeXrjapaiy
cXadoprjv. (Chiefly in the compound eîrtXaô-.)
pavôàvùHy pàÔi](ropaij pepaOrjKOy epaOov.
iTvvÔavopai and (poet.) Trevöopat (IL), mvaopaiy
7r€7rv<rpaiy eirvôoprjv.
aiŒÔâvopai and (rare) ai&6opai (L), úi<TÓr¡<Topaiy
T¡(T6l]paiy rjÎTÔopTJU,
« *
oXKTÔavù), oXiaôrjfTcùy ciXiaÔov.
Xapßava>y XTjijropaty eiXrjtfxiy eXäßov: €iXT]ppaiy
eXrjcfiÔTjv. M.
av^âpa and av^w, av^r)<T<ûy Tjv^rjKOy i)V^r)<ra :
paiy rjv^TjOrjp, M.
ocfyX-KrK'aPiûy o(^Xi;<ra), <úC¡)XrjKay (ú<j>Xop,
'íKáva and *Tkcù (II.), see § 479.
Kixàpiù and Kiyxàpco, Kix^fropaty €kïxoP'
aXlraivcHy t)XtTov*
doKPCùy àrj^opaiy ebaKOV : b€br]ypatf €Bi]X^r¡p.
Kappa>y Kapovpaij KeKprjKOy ÇKapov*
T€pp(û, T€p(û, T€Tpt]Ka, €TapOP and CTCpOP T€-
rprjpaiy çTprjOrjv, M.
ßaipcü, ßr^aopaiy ߀ßr)Ka, eßrjp. The fut. /3í;(ro>
and 1 a. eßr)<ra are transitive.
(f>ôa'v<ûy (j>6r}<ropai) €(j)$aKay €(f>ûr]P and €<l>úaora,
eXavpo) and cXao) (rare), eXacrci) and eXa> (for
eXaú)), eXrjXoKay rjXacra : cXrjXapaiy r)Xâôr}p,
* AvK- from avy-ffK- ? Compare âXfÎ- for aX£«-(w:-, § 484, and the
Latin aug-e-.
paÔ-€-, learn
irvô-(jTçvÔ-) (m.),
inquirOy learn
aiiTÔ-e- {pa.)y per¬
ceive
oXtirÖ-e-, slip
Xäß- (Xr]ß-)y take
increase
(tr.)
o(^X-e-, OTve
*ÏK-, come
«tx-«-, ß7id
àXÏT-y sin
478.
ÔoAc- {àrjx')i kite
Kap-y toil
T€p-y cut
ßa-, go
<¡)óa-y outstrip
çXa-y drive
134
TENSES OF VERBS.
decay ^û'ïvo) and <¡>éta> (Ep.), <f>Ô^<rofiai, f<}>ôïfiat,
€<f>&tfxrjv, The fut. and 1 a. <l)û'to'<û (<l>SiS>)
and €<l}ô'ïîra are trans.
m- and tto-, drink mv<ù, mofiai and (rare) iriov/iai, 7r€7ra>Kay ejriop ,
TTiTTOßaif eiroêriv,
T'ïu<ûf TÏaùi, TerÏKa^ €TÏ<ra : TfTi<r/Aat, €Ti<rOr)p, M.
n-, pay
479.
'ÏK' (m.), coTne
*ijirO'(\- (m.),
promise
480.
bfiK-f shem
fày-, break
trày {nriy-),ßx
pay (prjy), break,
burst (tr.)
(intr.)
pXy, mix
Cvy (Cfvy-)jJoin
àp- (m.), win
op'y rouse
oX- (tr.), destroy
— (intr.),^m5Ä
o/i-o-, swear
481.
(TKeô-acr-, SCattcr
h Vf is added.
ÍKPeopai, i^opai, lypai, *ÏKOpr)p, (Chiefly â^tic-.)
*v7n<rxP€opai, 'vTTOo'x^a'opai* *v'tr€<Tx^pai, 'vtt«-
a-xoprjv^
c. w is added,
àeiKPvpL and è€iKPv<û* cdet^a : Bcbciypat,
cbcixOqv. M.
ayvvpi, a|û), €äya (intr.), ca^a : eô^yrjv.'t
iroyvvpi, 7rT)^<ú, Trcirqya (intr.), einj^a : eirayijp. M.
pijypvpi and (poet.) prfa-(T<û, pi]^<o, eppo^a : ep-
pijypai. M.
prjypvpai, cppaya, eppäyrjv.
piypvpi and piaya, epi^a : pepiypai, ^/ii-
yr)P and epix^rfv, M.
¿evypvpt, ; €¿€t*ypai, (C^yrjp and
e^fvxOrjp. M.
apvvpai, äpovpai, ripoprjr»
oppvpi, opacù, opcùpa (intr.), (opaa and (redup.
2 a.) (ùpopop, M. opiùpepai, aypoprjp,
oWvpi, oX6(ra> and (Att.) o\œ, oXc^Xe^a, cúX^cra.
oWvpat, oXovpai, oXci>Xa, tííkoprjp.
oppvpi, opovpai, opcapoKo, a>po(ra : op<i>popai
and -apai, cípo6r]v and -aÔrjv»
0-K€baVPVpl,X (TK^bäiTO) and (Att ) O-KcSw, €<rK€-
bäaa : €a'K€ba(rpai, ffrKebaaOTjv.
* As this double form of the present tense is common to almost all
the verbs of this class, the second form is not given in the verbs which
follow.
t So fäXft»!' from 'aXo-. Ahrens explains ä by the supposition of
a double augment, as in iutpcjv.
Í Some of these presents in wvpX coexist with forms in vripX (from
a C. F. in vd), which are for the most part poeticaL The syllable ao
TENSSS OF VEHBS.
135
#c/j€jLt-a<r-, svspend
#c6p-â<7-, inirtßle
TTCT-ao"-, spreud
(<T- (f^o*-), clothe
<rße-(T-^ quench
(intr.), go out
Kop^tr-y satiate
arop-ca-' and
aTp<û'<r-, strew
¿"cü-tr-, gird
pû)-o--, strengthen
;^o-or- and x<à-(r'y
heap up
482.
<rK€7r- (na.), looh
at y examine
icXtTT-, steal
KOTV-y cut
rvTT'y heat
ß\äß-y hurt
Kä\vß-y cover
touch
ßa<f>-, dip
Kpepavvvph icpepairo} and Kp^pSiy fKp€paaa :
€Kp€pa<TârjP. M. pres. Kpe/xapat.
K€pavvvpt and (poet.) K€paa>, Kfpaatüf €K€pa<ra :
KfKpäpaif (KpäOijv and €K€pa<rór¡v,
7r€Tavtnjpiy neraco} and ttct«, €7rrracra r «-«rra-
pai and 7re7rera(rpat,
ipvvpi and (Ion.) eívvpty €(<r)<rû), €((r)a'a :
ct/iai. M. Prose writers use the compound
apfpifpvvpiy ap<f>t«r(û and ap<pic^, Tjp<pi€a-a : i}p-
<l>t€tTpai. M, (On the augment see § 256.)
aßeppvpiy a'߀o-<Oy fc/Seca : eaßffrpaiy «rßeaOrjv.
cßcvpvpai) o-ßqiropaiy efrßrjKay ea-ßqp.
KOp€PPVpiy KOp€(r<ûy €KOpf<ra : K€KOp€(rpaiy €KOp€-
o-ßrjv, M.
oToppvpi and (TTpùivpvpty oTopecíú cTopoi and
(TTpûXTû), eoTopeíra and ^arpuxra : eorptûpaiy
€tTTp<ùdr]P>
(cùpvvpiy e^tíxra : (^axrpai, M.
piûppvpiy €pp(û(ra : €ppa>paiy €pp<ù(rût]P,
Xoo) and later x<^ppvph €x<à<ra.
Kcxoxrpaiy cxoxrOrjp.
d. T is added to p- sounds.
crK€7rTopai^y (TKcyj/opaiy €<rK€ppat,y eo'Keyj/'äpijv.
KXeTTTOy K\e^<ù and -yjropai, /cexXo^a, eKXeyj/a :
KCK^cppaiy €KXa7rr}v and (rare) €KXç(l>êrjp,
KOTrraty Ko>/ra>, KCKOCpOy cKoyfra : KfKoppaiyÇKomjp, M.
TV7TTú>y TV7rT7](r(ùy €Tv^a and (rare) ervTrop : t€-
Tvppai, ervTTTjp, M.
ßXawTiüy ßXayjr(üy ßcßXäipOy eßXayjra : ßfßXappaiy
fßXäßrjp and (rare) €ßXa(j)6Tjv.
KaXvTTTik), KäXv^|/<ûy eKaXvyl^a : KeKaXvppai, €KäX-
v(l)Ûr)P* M.
âTTTiOy âyj/cùy ^yj/^a : ^<f)âj]P. M.
ßaTTTCüy ßayjrcjy eßa^a : ßeßappaty €ßa<f>r}P. M.
is wanting, and the root-vowel undergoes a change. Thus are found
(TKiôvTfpiy Kpupvrjpiy Kipvnpty and niTviipf-
* In the pres. and past imperf, the Attics generally use aKoirsot or
aicowovpai (§ 269): the 1 aor. of this form, eoKonrjaay is late.
136
TEÎTSES OF VERBS.
hiry
<rKa<l>'f dig
pàip'y sew
pXffy- (ptTT-?), Mirl
KV(p'j stoop
Kpv(f>'f hide
483.
<(>\€y-, scorch
TcX-, nse, he
eat
TrXa-, he full
TTpa-t hum (tr.)
v€-, spin
êaiTTiùf eâarj^a : reâappai, €Ta<f>rfv, M.
crKaTTTú), (TKa^o), €<rKä(f)a, eaKayjra : €<rKappait
€crKá<¡>r¡v.
paTTTCDf payjrcùf €ppay¡ra : eppappai, €ppa(f>T¡v. M. •
piTTTo) and pi'jrT€(ù, eppiyjra : cppippai, ep-
pï<f>r)v and €ppi(l>Or)v,
KimTû), KV\lr<o and -^opat, K€Kv<¡>ay CKVxjra»
KpxfTTTG), Kpvy¡r<úy K€Kpv(¡)ay fKpy^a : K€Kpvp,paty
€Kpv<f>Ôrjv and (rare) €Kpv<prjv. M. ,
e. fô is added.
tpXcyo} and (fiKeyida (poet.), ^X€¿ú>, etc. See
<^Xey-, § 463. ^
r€\€Ôù> (poet.) = reXXû), whicli however is
chiefly trans. See t^X-, § 476.
€<TÔa) (i. e. eS-öw) and more commonly eaOia,
(also €Ôû> poet.), etc. See § 460.
ttXïj^û), 7r€7r\r)ôa (chiefly poet.). See ttXo-, § 485.
mpirpTjpi and (very rare) -7rpr)0a>» See irpa-,
§485.
v€(ú and prjÔdi, VT¡<ra>y evrjaa : v€vrjpaí and vemjo'ftcu.
484.
aXe/c-, ward of
ôtôa;^-, teach
V, i<TK {çîtk) or (TK is added : § 266.
cXe^û) (i. e. aXfK-cTK-©), aXf^i;cra), r/Xe^rfca and
(very rare) i;Xe|a, also (Ep. redup. 2 a.)
r¡\a\Kov, M.
8t8ao"/cû),* 8¿áa¿ú), Ô€Ôt8a;^a, edïàa^a: ôeStÔaypai,
€àïàa)(Sr)V. M.
Trad- (TT(vê')f suffer Tracrx® (i.O- Trado-Ko)), TTiio-opai, TrfTroyda, erradov.
ap€(TK<ù^ àp€(r<ùy rjpeaa ; rjpco-pai, rfpeaôrjv, M.
oreptcTKú) and «rT^pea), (rrepTjo'iûf ecTepr^KO^ €<rTe-
pr,(ra : €OTcp?;pai, earçprjÔrjv, In prose aTro-
trrfpeci) is the ordinary form. A pass, j^res.
<TT€popai means I am deprived (orbatus sum).
6p<ù(TK(ù (§ 46), dopoupat, edopov.
ap-y please
(rT€p~€-y depmve
ôop-y leap
* Ai-ia-ffjcw is evidently formed, after the analogy of the verbs given
in § 486, from the poet, root da-, teach, learn, whence tdarfv, I learnt ;
but that didax,' was practically viewed as a new verbal root is plain not
only from the tenses of the verb, but from the derived substantive
didaxa'p f. instruction*
TENSES OF VERBS. 137
I
€Vpl(TK<ùy €Vprj<r<û, €VprjKa, €VpOV: €Vpr¡paif €Vp€-
Br\v. M.
ß\(ü<TK<üy'^ pdKovpaiy ptpßXiüKay €po\ov,
$ui)(TK<úy äävovpai, T€ÔvTjKay fûapov. In Attic
prose the compound aTroôav- is usual, ex¬
cept in the perf.
^aaKiJi>f ^xavov. The pres.
Xciiva> is very late.
rjßa<TK<ü, I grow 7nanlg, and ^ßaa}, I mti at my
priinCy ^ßrjcii, ffßrjKay ^ßr)(ra.
TXa-(in.), appease *Z^Xao-Ko/iaí (also íX€0/tat),T'Xao-ojuat/tAaíraftj;i'.
yrjpa-j grow old yrjpacTKCù and yrjpao), yr¡pá<rtí> and -cropaiy yeyrf-
paKo, €yrjpd{Ta and (in some forms) eyijpäv.
0a-, say, affirm (paa-Ko» and 0íj/xí, past-imperf. €<pa(rKov, (prfo-o),
€<j>7]a-a. For the usage in the simple sense
of saying, see § 460.
'aX-o- (faX-o-), 'aXia-Kopai, 'aXcoaopai, ¿a\a>Ka (fffaX-) and
be captured ijXojica, cti^'Xai/t and r¡\títv. See avoKo-, § 470.
485. VI. Reduplication is used ; § 267.
T<x-, bring forth tikt<ù (for titko)), T^^opai and -^<0, T€TOKa,
(T€KOV, M.
(«X")j (Txoao), etc. See ix~-> §
1TfT-,fall TTITTTO), TTeO-OVpai, TT^TTrCÛHCO, €7reo'oi/.§
o-ed- (éS-), seat (¿Û), etc. See €Ô-, § 475,
y€P' (m.), become, yiyvopiai (and yîpopai), yeptja-opai, y€y€PT}pat
be and yeyopa, €y€Popr}v,
p(p-, remain pipp<û\\ (poet.). See pep-, § 466.
opa-y benffit OPiPr)pi (for OPOPTjpt), 0P7](r(i>, tí>PTj(Ta : (ùPTjÔrjp. M.
2 aor. iûprjp^p (but inf. opacrOai).
itXa-yJill TnpTiXrjpiy 7rXT)(r<ùy7re7rXrjKa, eTrXrjaa: TreifKricpaiy
€7rXi]crôrjp. M,
• i.e. pX(i)(TK(M>y or, rather, pß\<jj<TKu). Compare the perfect pepßXoina^
and see § 42,
t In the indie, d, in the other moods d. See § 480,7i.f
J The presents iffxo), iffrrjpt. are, of course, for aiaxw,
<n(TTr¡pt, initial <r being softened into \ § 47, b: in iffxoi even the aspirate
is lost in obedience to the well known rule, § 44.
§ In Doric Eirerov ; in the common forms svetyov and ireaovpai, r is
softened into a. § 47, a.
II On the loss of c in this and the fíve words preceding, see § 49.
I
€vp-e-yßnd
^oX-, go
ûai^, die
xap^y yawn
rjßa-j be at onês
prime
138
TENSES Oí VERBS.
TTpa-, hum
Ißud
o-ra-, stand (tr.)
— (intr.).
€-, let gOj send
Of, place
ào-, give
486.
ap-,ßt
pva-, remind
èpa-, run amay
TTpít'f sell
yviù'y examiney
think
Qpiù'y eat
rp(a-j wound
487.
hoK'y seem
Trar- (m.)yjeed
yrjO-j rejoice
fùB-y push
Kvp-y chance
TTipnprfpiy* 7rprj<T<0y eTTprjira : 7rftrp>;^at, tíTpV^^'Jv»
'Ct;i(pi;jut,xp'î0"û>,f;^pïyi7-a: Kcxprjp*^'" M,(=^ö7Ton;).
la-TTfpiy aTT}(rù>f t<rrr)va : iarapah ^o-raBri^'* M.
laräpaiy arrjaopaiy ¿o-TtjKay €(Trr}$<ù^ eorrjV'
Trjpiy T)(rcúy cIko, r)Kay etc. Seo § 454.
TÏÔîjpiy $T]<Ta>j reôçiKa, (eÛepcv, etc. § 343) :
T€$€ipaiy CTcBrfp. M.
àïè<ùpiy ôoxTû), 3cÔû)#ca, cÔcoKa (eSojnei/, etc.) : ô«-
èopai, eboûrju, M.
(TK is added to the reduplicated root,
apâpL(rK<ùf äpäpa (intr.), rjpaa and (redup. 2 a.)
Tjpapov, See ap-y wiUy and ap-y please^ §§ 480
and 484.
fii/xi/?;<7ACû), ppr)<r(ùy €pvr¡<ra ; p€pvr]paí (2 reniCTnr
her)y €pin](rÔT)p»
'BibpacTKiùy 'dpäcropai, 'tbpäp,
TTiTTpao-Kíúy TTenpäKa: TreTTpäpat, €7rpà6r}P* See
§461.
yiypdXTKiûy yptíxropaiy eyyû)#ca, typcDpf : eypc^epaïf
€yp(ù(r3r]p,
ßißpaxTKiüy ßfßpQüKai ߀ßpu)pai, fßpioOrjp.
TLTpüXTKCDy TpùXTCùy €TpOi><Ta l T€Tp<ûpaiy €Tp^dl]P'
VIL € is added : § 268.
6ok€ú), 6o¿ú), €Óo¿a : àeàoypai, Tlie poets also
use àoKi)o-(Oy etc.
irareopaiy iraaopaiy ciràcraprjp : Trenairpai*
yrjôecùy yrjOrjao), yeyrjday eyTjOrjea.
<ù6€(ùy (ùfKo (and a)0r)(ra> poet.), ewo-a : ecocr/xat,
€(ùa6r]P'
Kvpçiù and Kvp<ù (IL), Kvp<ra>f €/cvp<r«. Also kv-
prjciùy etc.
♦ The p before Trp, ttX, in these words is euphonie : compare psanP'
8'pia-i mid-day (§ 42). and pfp-ß-XwKay perf. of poX- in the last §,
where ß is inserted between p and p, etc. The compounds with ev are
ep7ri7rX;/pi, (piri'rrpijpiy but again tviTTipTrXrjPf etc., in the augmented
tense.
s
f A 1 aor. active, of course with a causative meaning, exists in the
Ionic compound av-syvuxra, I versuaded.
TENSES OF VERBS.
139
488.
icaf-, burn
iCrtX-, Cttïl KaXcû>, KokeoTía End (Att.) KaXu, K€k\i)KCí} cko-
Xetra : /ccxXiy^at, €i¿kr¡Ór)v. XI. Compaxe ßaX-,
§ 476.
ya/i-, tuhe to wife yàfjLC(ûf ya/xô, ytyafXTjKa, €yr¡fia, M. Late yâ-
fxrjŒiûf etc.
VIII. Verbs in / or o- : § 270.
F.
Kaiú> and KÔofy fcavcro) and -irofxaiy K€KavKa, eKavaa
and CKTja (Ep.) e/cea (Trag.) : KCKavfxai, cKav
6rjv and cKarjv (lon.).
fcXa¿ú> and kXöci), K\av(To¡xai and KKatrjcray (a),
€KKav(ra : K€K\avfiai» XI.
â«û, ôçviToixau
TrXeü), 7r\€v<rofiai and -aovfxaiy TrcTrXevica, eTrXfu-
(ra: TTíTrXevcr/xai.
P€<i>y vevtrofxaL and -(xovfjLai, vevevKa, epevo-a,
TTpecùf 7rP€V(ro^ai and -(rovftaiy TjeTTPevKa, ewpevca.
pcû), pevcro/xat and pv7¡<T0¡iaiy eppuijfca, eppvrjp and
(rare) eppevcra,
p^eo), exP^^'
K\af-, weep
êcF'y run
TrXcf-, set sail
ptf-y swim
îTVff-, breathe
X^ hi pour
489.
áya<T-, wonder at
X^aa-y slaclien
2.*
ayapaiy ayaaopaif r¡ya<T6r]v and r¡ya(Tapr¡p»
XàXacùf p^aXao-û), xep^aXaKO, e;^aXa<ra : Kf;(aXa-
<rpaiy ep^aXacröiji'.
yeXaú), yeXaco/xat, eyeXa<ra : yeyeXatrpai, eye-
\a<T6r¡v,
#cXa<o, e/cXaaa : KCKkaçrpaiy €K\acrôrjp.
(TTracD, (TTrao-û), ccTraxa, fCTrao-a : ecTracpat,
€(T7Ta(r6r)v. XI.
epacD and cpapai, €pa(r0rj<Topaiy rjpaaôrjp and
rjpäaäprju,
aià€opai and aiàopaiy aideaopai, rj^eirpaïf rjBeaôrjv
and T)d€(TäfXTjp.
¿Vú), ¿ecTú), €¿€(ra : efetrpat.
aKeopaij ijKccapijp,
apK€a'-y aidy suffice apKecDj apKea-w, rjpKeora : ijpKfaOrjv,
TcXecr-, complete t^Xcú), reXco-o) and .(Att.) TfXw, rereXeKo, €T€-
X€<ra : TCTeXearpaiy €T€\€<r0r)p. Xí.
feo*-, polish : e^eapai,
»
* For other verbs in <r see § 481
ycXao*-, laugh
kXoo--, break
airaa-f draw
cpacr-,
aiÔ-€<r- (m.),jr<?é;/
shame, respect
feo--, JoiZ
a/cco-- (m.),
140
ADVERBS
490. Many active verbs have a future middle. The most im¬
portant of these will be found in the Tables : others are airavrato,
Imeet^ anavrrjo'Ofiat (-tro)); a?roXaua>, Icnjoy^ anoXavcrofxai', /Sadifo),
I Tvalhf ßädiovfiai; ßoaa>, I shout, ßorjo-ofxai; emopK€<o, J swear
falsely, €TnopKr¡<rofíaí (-(tw) ; icoXa^'co, I chastise, Ko\a<ropat (Att.
KoXS>pai; also KoXatra); Trrfdaa, I leap, mjbrjaopai; trTyaai, I am
silent, alyijaopai I aidTra^, J am silent, cicúTrijíropai', ckcottto}, J
mock, aKúnyjropaí', airovda^ù), T am eager, owou^acro/iai (-crco); x<ùp^<ù,
I Tvithdraw, x<ùprj(ropai (-co)).
491. Many middle verbs have an aorist passive (deponents
passive). Some of these have already been given in the Tables :
others are ^apiWaopai, I compte, ^ptXXtjßrjv; apv€opai, I deny,
ripV7)dT)v (Ep. r¡pvr)<Tapr¡v) ', ôtaXcyo/nat, 1 discuss, biiktxÔriv (Ep. bi€~
X€^apijv); àiâvo€opai, I purpose, hiçvoriêriv (also atrov-, €vv-, Trpov-);
€i/avTioopai, I oppose, rjvavTKûôijv ; evôvpeopai, I lay to heart, €V€'
êvprjBrjp (also TTpoß') ; €v\a߀opai, I am cautious, evXaßrjßrjv ; iro--
pevopat, 1 travel, €7rop€vôrjp ; <f>ï\oTÏp€opai, I am ambitions, €(f>ÏXo-
TÏprjôrjv, Some of these have also a fut.-indef. derived from the
aorist root.
ADVERBS.
492. On adverbs derived from adjectives and pronouns, see
§ 175, etc., § 204, etc., and § 210.
493. Adverbs are formed from substantives by means of the
suffix 8ov (adov, rjbov) : as, from
«
ßoTpv-, bunch of grapes, ßoTpv-bov like a bunch of grapes.
ÏKa-, troop, rX-aSov, in troops, abundantly.
Kvv, dog, Kvv-t}bov, like a dog.
tTTTTo-, horse, Í7nr-r)bov, like a horse.
494. Adverbs are formed from verbs by means of the suffixes
fiof, àa, lirjv (âôïji/): as, from
avä(f>av-, shCTV forth {up), âvà(f>av~bov and ava<f>av-da, openly.
trx-(^X')ï hold, hold on by, trx-e-bov, hardly, nigh, nearly.
Kpv(¡)-, hide, Kpvß-briP and Kpvß-ba (also Kpv<j>-a),
secretly.
ypa(f)-, scratchf write, ypaß-hriv, in a scraping manner, by
writing^
anep-, SOW, scatter, <nTop-àbr)v, scattcredly.
PREPOSITIOKö. 141
495. Adverbs in €i or ï (rarely i), are formed from adjectives,
mostly compounds : as, Travbijfi-ci or navbrjix-if with the whole
pea/fle; äfxax-^h without a battle; aicKavT-ïf without weepinp. These
are probably modifications of the dative case.
496. Adverbs are formed from verbs by means of the suffix
TÏ : as, from
oj/o/iaô-, narne, ovopaaTi) by name,
UepaXb'yhold with the PersianSy lí€p<n<T-Tiy in Persian fashion,
speak Persian, in the Persian tongue.
497. A few adverbs in ¿ or are formed principally from
substantives signifying some part of the body : as, from
oSovr-, tooth, o8af, with the teeth.
'jTvy-pa-fJist, TTv^, with theJist.
yow-, knee, t>n the knee.
\a^, with the heel,
also povyo-, alone, powa^, singly,
aWày-, change, oKXa^, by turns.
498. Adverbs in {(r)6ev or (ir)öe are formed from prepositions :
as, 7rpo-(TÚ€{v), before, from n-po, before; *v'iT€p-Be{v), from above,
above, from 'vn^p, over ; oTTKrBeiy) or oirWeiv), behind ; çv€p-6€{y)
or v€p-6€(y),from beneath, beneath, connected with evçpoi—inferi.
From CK, out from, are derived €K-ror, without, and €KToar-6t{v),
■ from without: from cr, in, are derived within, and
€VTocr-6e{v), from within; also epbov and evboÔX, within, at home,
and evàoÔev. Some of these words are also employed as prepo¬
sitions. Compare the table of pronominal adverbs, § 204.
PKEPOSITIONS.
499. The prepositions of the Greek language, with the pri¬
mary significations of each, are as follows :—
a. Followed by the accusative only :
eis or es, info, to (Lat. in, with acc,).
b. Followed by the genitive only :
avTi, over against, instead of, e¡, €k. out of, from,
ano, from (away from). ffpo, befm^e,
c. Followed by the dative only :
ev (Ep. evi, €tv), in (Lat. in with abL).
aijv or ^vv, with.
142
PREPOSITIONS.
d. Foliowed by the accusative or genitive :
àiàj through (between). 'vinp (Ep/v7re*p)> over,
Kara, dOTVn.
e. Followed by the accusative or dative :
ava, up,
f. Followed by the accusative, genitive, or dative :
about (on both sides of). around,
iiii, upon. irpos (Ep. nporXy îtoti), up to
߀Tä, amidst. 'viro (Ep. *v7rat), under,
«
Trapa (Ep. Trapat), by (by the side of).
The use of ap^i, ava, and /i€ra with the dative is confined to the
poets.
500. The prepositions were aU originally adverbs of place :
many of them are often so employed by the poets, and irpos is
so used even in Attic prose. In general usage, they either stand
in connection with some case of a noun, in order to define the
relation between the several words of a sentence more closely
than could be done by means of the cases alone ; or they are
compounded with verbs, to express the direction of the action
of the verb. They are also used in the formation of compound
adjectives.
501. In connection with the cases of nouns prepositions un
dergo some change of their original signification, yet rather in
appearance than reality; as the widely different translations
which one preposition must often receive are due solely to the
case which accompanies it. Thus, Trapa meaning by the side of,
nlpa Tov ßaaXXeä is to (the side of) the king ; Trapa tov /SâaiXecix-,
from (the side of) the king ; and Trapa ßaaTKei, by (the side
of), or near, the king : the difference of meaning in each instance
being catised by the proper force of the accus., gen., and dat. cases
respectively (§ 61, b.).
502. In composition with verbs the prepositions retain their
adverbial character : hence the place of the augment and the redu¬
plication is between the preposition and the verbal root, and in
the earlier language the preposition was readily separated from
the verb by one or more words—a process commonly, but in¬
correctly, treated as a violent license under the name of Tmesis
(rpijiriy, cutting).
503. All the prepositions given in § 499 are used in composi¬
tion with verbs : the following, some of which are rather adverbs,
CONJUNCTIONS.
143
are not so used; aptv (and poet, arcp), without, apart from;
axpï{s) and ti€xpx{s), until ; ipeKo {€P€K€v, eiPCKa), for the sake of,
all of which are followed by the genitive ; and 'ofta, together with,
which takes the dativa The particle m is sometimes used with
the accus, to express motion to, for the most part with pemons
only.
504. The usual place of the preposition, as the name implies,
is immediately before the noun which it accompanies ; it is,
however, sometimes separated from the case by the particles
be, yap, etc. Ilipi and iveKa even in prose, the others in the
poets, occasionally follow their noun.
505. The prepositions sometimes seem to be used as verbs,
with an ellipsis of cort or «tai;—napa for napeorï or napeiaï,
€Pi for €P€OTi, etc.
CONJUNCTIONS.'
506. The conjunctive particles be (—5«) are used to
contrast two or more words or clauses which are either opposed
to, or merely distinguished from, each other. They are regularly
placed after the contrasted words, or the first words of the con¬
trasted clauses. Their force may be rendered by on the one
hand—on the other; but generally pep may be passed over in
the English sentence, and be be rendered by and, or (if the con¬
trast is one of opposition) but ; as, eXeye pep to ttoXv, toir be
ßovXopepois €^r¡^ oKoveip, he usually spohe, and those who lilted
might listen ; Xeyei^ pep ev, TTpaTTeis b*ovbep, you Speak well, but do
, nothing.
507. The copulative conjunctions are koi, and; re (end.), and ;
r¡, either, or ; ofß« Çpobe),'^ and not, not even; ovre {pnre), neither,
nor. These may be used in pairs : as, #cat Kara yr\v koi Kara Ôa-
Xatra-âp, both by land and by sea ; tya> re Kai av, both I and you ;
apbptap re ôetûP re, both of men and of gods ; rj Tts ovbeis, either
one or no one ; ovre raura ovre raXXa, neither this nor the other.
508. Particles of emphasis are ye (end.), at least ; nep (end.),
just; % verily; pr\p, assuredly ; br¡, certainly, of course; peproi,
however, eta
* Apparently weaker forms of pi)v and di],
t On the distinction between the negative partidos ov and ptjy and
their compounds, see the Syntax.
Í44 DERIVATION AÑD COMPOSITION.
t
#
509. For the interrogative and conditional particles, and for
those conjunctions which serve to attach subordinate to princi- ^
pal clauses, see the Syntax.
DERIVATION AND COMPOSITION.
510. Words are either simple—i.e. derived from a single root,
as fiax-ofiaif I from ypâ(})-ù>, I write, from
ypaip'f* write; Xoyo-, m. speech^ from Xey-, speak—or compound,
i. e. formed from two or more roots, as \oyo-ypa^o-, m. a writer
of narratives.^
511. Simple words are either jrrimarpderivatives—i.e.formed
immediately from the root, as, <f>vy-a-, i.ßight, from <f>vy-,ßee;
apx-or, f. beginning, from apx~, begin — or secondary derivatives,
i. e. formed through some simpler derivative, as apx-a-io-, ancient,
from apx-a-, beginning. The term derivative is, however, usually
restricted to words of the latter class.
512. Nouns, whether primary (primary derivatives), or derived
(secondary derivatives), are usually formed by the addition of a
syllable, called the suffix, which serves to determine the precise
relation in which the word stands to the root. Thus, from
yp^<j>-f write, are formed ypa<^fu-, m. writer ; ypa</>-iÔ-, f. writing
instrument; ypap-fiâT~,n. a writing; ypapL-pa-, f. line : from bÏKa-,
f. equivalent, right, are formed bÏKa-io-, righteous; and from this
again, àÏKa-io-ovva-, f. righteousness.
513. Many primary verbs, and a few substantives, are made
without any suffix : as, (m.),^^Äi ; Xey, speak; ay, lead ;
'aX-, m. f. salt, sea : or with a slight change of vowel, as <p\oy-, f.
ßame, from <l>\ey-, burn. Such substantives, of course, belong to
the inseparable declension.
514. For the changes to which consonants and vowels are
subject in the derivation and composition of words, consult the
sections on letter-changes.
* Such words as ypa^-, write; apX'j begin, are classed among pri¬
mary roots, as not admitting of any farther analysis within the limits
of the Greek language. They are probably not pure roots, but made
by the addition of some affix.
•f Care must be taken not to confound compound words and deriva¬
tives from compounds ; ôpo^pov-, of one mind, is a compound adjective;
ofioippovi', be of one mind, is a verb derived from the compound adjec*
tive.
derivation of substantives. 145
* ^
515 OJ the Dertvatwn of Nouns.
The following Tables exhibit the most important sufíixes of substantives
and adjectives.
Masculine Suffixes.
Suffix
Added
to
Gives a
substantive
meaning
Thus, from
English
Is derived
EngUsh
if
verbs
one who —s
slap
slayer
if
nouns
person
ypappar-
a writing
ypappar-sv^
scribe
ilTTTO-
horse
ITTTT -€U-
horseman |
if"
town
inhabitant
Meydpo-
Megara
Meyap'-sih-
a Megarian !
ro
verbs
one who —s
KvßepifO"
steer
KvßspvYi^a"
steersman |
T p
verbs
one who —s
pe-
speak
pr^^op"
speaker
TTJp
verbs
one who —s
KttX-e-
summon
KXTJ'TTJP'
summoTter
ra
nouns
person
TO^O-
how
To|o-ra-
bowman
î-ra
notins
person
0§0-
way
oô^-tra-
traveller
nouns
person
KTTpaTia-
army
KTTpart -(ùTOr
soldier j
Ttt" ^
town
inhabitant
A lyivor
JBgina,
AiyLvr¡-ra-
an A!ginetan
i-ra [
or
inhabitant
Aßdrjpo-
Abdera
Aßb7)p-Tra-
an Abderite
a>-ra3
, country
inhabitant
St/ceXta-
Sicily
SixeXi -û)Ta-
a Sicilian Greek
verbs
means
¿0)0--
gird
¿<û(r-rT)p'
girdle
0»
verbs
person
aetô-
sing
aotô-o-
singer
0
verbs
act?
Xey-
speak
0
0
1
speech
a*
—
person
rptß-
wear,practise
Traioo-Tpiß^a-
trainer of boys
parent
son of
Necrrop-
Nestor
Necrrop-tÔa-
son of Nestor
ÍOV
parent
son of
Kpouo-
CronvA
Kpov^-ïop- or
son of Crojuw
mv
parent
son of
Kpov~ïa>V'
t-trxo-
nouns
little
TratS-
child, boy
TTaiB-KTKO-
young boy
flO*
verbs
act
oBvp-
lament
oBvp-po-'
lamentaXion
(6)iio
verbs
act
K\af'
weep
KXav-ôpo-
^weeping
{<T)HO
verbs
act
Ôç-
place
ôe-crpo-
statute
\
av
nouns
place for
yvvaiK"
woman
yvvaiK-(ùV'
women's apartment]
aiJ
nouns
little
K\(ÙV'
twig
KXûiV-âK'
little twig
äK
nouns
TTOpna-
bvekle
TTOpTT-â*-
shield-handle
1JK
nouns
poppO"
ant
pvpp -rjK-
ant
^ 7
nouns
ßorpv-?
bunch of
/3oTrp-v;^-
lock of hair
grapes
1
Remarks on the Suffixes.
• This suffix is, of course, only a special case of that immediately above.
2 No*^s masc. in rtjp^ and nouns fern, and neut. in rpa and roo, signifying tin-
means, are probably to be regarded as adjectives used substantively.
' Some of these nouns in o arc masc. and fern, ; as, aoiSo- m. and f.
• The few nouns of this class are, mostly, compounds.
• This suffix also appears as äda and lada. When it is added to words whoso
C.F. ends in cf, f disappears, and î of the suffix forms a diphthong with the pre-
14ß DERIVATION OP SUBSTAîmVES.
r
cedifif^ tt thus, from IlijXef- or TliiXtjp , Pefeus, are made ITijXn^a- (or Jlí^Xcíía-) and
IliyXijta^a-, son oj Pe'eus: similarly irom Arjocf- are formed Arpttoa' and Arptuav*»
^ But of many words in Qpo and ofio the initial consonant of the suffix seems due
rather to a lost final consonant in the root.
' Also fem., as po^-aK-, f. dwarf-rose; wrvx'» ap-yr-vx'» ™ f. band, ctrcüel,
(from ap0(). These suffixes, ar, än, t;K, vx* ^ also ay(XaX-ay', babbler), vy (wr^p*
ity-, f. pinion), Xk (cX-îic-, f. a spiral), are varieties of one suffix, and all seem to have
been originally diminutive. Some of them aie also adjectival.
516. Feminine Supfixes.
Suffix .
Added
to
Gives a
Substantive
Thus, from
English
Is derived
Englisb
meaning
a*
verbs
act
<P^y- ^
ßee
<f>vya-'
ßight
pa
verbs
act
ppQ' (m.)
teTnemher
pVT^'par
remembrance
ia^
adj.
quality
evbaipov-
prosperous
evbaipoP'ta.'
prosperity
a-vva^
adj.
quality
atfypop-
sfMdess
a<Ppoovpar
senselessness
bÏKatO'
rigJUeous,.
BiKaiO'avpa'-
righteousness
o-va
verbs
(m.)
enjoy
îjô-ova-
joy, pleasure
TTJT'
adj.
quality
ra;(u-
swift
Ta;^v-rJ7T-
swiftness
Tl*
verbs
act
<f>a'
speak
(Pä-Ti'
speaking
at
verbs
act
TTpay-
do
7rpa¿4-
doing
Ota
verbs
act
àoKÏpaô-
prorot
doKipä'Oia
proving |
la^
male
female
Upef-
priest
tepeia-
priestess i
oa
male
female
apaKT'
king
auaooa"
queen |
aiva
male
female
Xe^PT'
lion
Xc-aipa-
lioness p
ïè
lô-«
parent
male
daughter of
female
Aauao-
'EXXJJV-
Danaus
a Greek
Aapa^'ib"
'EXXï;ï^t6-
daughter ofDemauw
aOrftk woman \
m
ypaip'
write
ypà<l>-ïd-
<^vXX'-a5-
writing iustrumeiU
àà
nouns
collective
óuXXo-
leaf
heap of leaves
Títpa*
verbs
female agent
oo-
give
bo-reipor-
female who gives
rpta
verbs
female agent
irot€'
create
TToirj-rpia'
poetess
Tpïà
verbs
female agent
avXe'
play theßtUe
avXij-Tpib-
female ßvie-playtr «
nouns
female person
TroXi-
city
TToXt-Tlè'
female citizen ^
rpa
verbs
means
icdXv^-
hide
KaXvTT^pa-
veU t
rpa
verbs
place
iraXat'
wrestle
7rdXat-a-rpa-
wrestling-scbaol |
i-OKa
nouns
little
Traib-
child
1
natb-tOKa-
little girl Î
Remarhs. t
* Feminines in a are also used as collective nouns: thus, from ^v\3k-, watch,
éíXoK^a-', f. is both watching and a guard, like the Latin custodia'. Similarly, some
words in la are collectives: as, yipou<T-ia- (ytpovr-ta-), a senate; ecichjo-ui-' (from
tKKXrjTO', summoned), an assembly,
' Substantives in la, from adjectives chiefly, are very numerous; it is important to
to attend to the necessary letter-changes: thus, from <to^o-, vnse; aXiièea-, true ;
äQavaro-, fmmorta/, are derived ao<fia-^ wisdom; oXij^cia-, truth; àOàvàoui-, im»
mortality,
* Most words of this class arc derived from adjectives in ov, as a^poovt'a-,/^^^.
$
J
dkrivation op substantives.
147 '
ßrom ai^ov'} fiVfifÂOVvva-t remembrancCy from fivripiov*-^ mindfuli so that vva should,
probably, be regarded as the original suffix, <r being due to v final of the adj.
* n and <rt are the same suffix.
' The suffixes <xa and la are probably identic il, (T<xa being due to the concurrence
of (With a preceding guttural or dental; so ntXiaffa-, becy from /tcXîr-, n. Aoney.
See § 45, a.
* This use of the suffix Xb is obviously related to the preceding: XS also appears
as a unni nation of feminine adjectives: thus, Oovpo-, m. f. impetuous ;
litp^a y a Persian, f. (sc. ya-), the land of the Persians, Persia»
' These fem. nouns in reipa (rep-ta), rpto, rpXb, and rXb, should rather be con¬
sidered as formed through mase, nouns in rt/p, rop, and ra. Compare the Latin
victr'ic^ through vict-or- ; doctrina- through doctor-¡ textrina- through textor-»
ÖI7. Neuter Suffixes.
BufBz
Added
to
Gives a
substantive
Thus, from
English
Is derived
EngUsh
meaning
pàr
verbs
thing done
Trpay-
do
npay-paT'
deed
verba
t act
1 thing done
TTevê-
grievt
gr^f
i<r*
ßdX-
throw
ßfX-ea--
dart
fO*
adj.
property
evp^
broad
evp-ecT"
breadth
•
0
verbs
ivy-
join
fuy-o-
yoke
ro'
verbs
thing done
jr«>-
drink
TTO-TO-
dkrauglii
rpo'
verbs
(means
apo-
plough
apo-rpo-
a plough
Í wages for
XlH
set fres
Xv-rpo-
ransom
rripHO*
verbs
place
ßovXfv-
ddiberate
j3ovXev-n;pto-
senate-houH
(í)íO
noons
place
coppersmith
^oX/ff-to-
copper^ilh*s shop
. to
»
nouns
little
Traià-
ckUd
TTOtó-tO-
little child
tbto
nouns
little
Kvr-
dog
KVP~1010-
littU dog
opto
nouns
little
Trató-
child
Traib-aptO"
mu child
(a)vo
I
verbs
T€K-
bring forth
re#c-ï»o-
child
Bemarks,
' Varieties of this suffix are da, ar, dp, as: <jtKda-,blaze; rcpár-, portent', Qtvàp-y
the flat of the hand.
' These nouns in ro are probably neuters of adjectives in ro.
• The price for which anything is bought is a sort of instrument.
* These words in Trjpio and eio (ato, etc.) are rather to be regarded as the neuters
of adjectives'in rT)p'io and e-io: the true suffix is to, the syllables rijp and e(ef)
denoting the agent. The compound suffix would grow to be regarded as a simple,
and thus be added to nouns agent of a ditferent form: thus, from ôïSaaKàXo-, teacher
was made bibaaKctXno^, n. a school. Compare the Latin audi-tor-io- with the Greek
<rcpoâ-ri|o-(o-, place of audience. Some nouns in TY¡pio and eto also signiiy the
means
148
derivation of adjectives.
518
Suffixes of' Adjectives.
\
Suffix
1
1
Added
to
Gives an
adjective
Thus, from
English
Is derived
meaning
o'
verbs
state
XfCTT-
leave
Xocfi*-o-
nouns
belonging to
aX-
sea
*aX-io-
CO
adj.
ly
KaêapO'
clean
Kaßap-LO-
fO
nouns
made of
Xpyao"
gold
Xpv<T-€0^
€10
nouns
belonging to
yvpaiK'
woman
yvpaiK-fiO'
Xo 1
5ei-
fear
Ô€C-Xir-
n-Xo 1
state?
infr-eeT'
height
w^r-iyXo-
w 1
6>**Xo 1
<f>€ià-
spare
<f)€iB-o>Xo-
a-Xfo ^
ûap(T-€a''
courage
ßapa-äXeO'
po
nouns
fuUof
ai(TX'€0^
shame
aitrx'po-
€-pO
nouns
fuUof
(f>oßO'
fear
<l)oß'-€pO'
rj'po
nouns
fuUof
poX^o-
hardship
fioxff-npo-
vo
verba
state
treÔ-
worship
aep-PO'
PO
nouns
like, etc.
^peßetr-
gloom
cpeßev-vo-
Ï-PO
nouns
like, etc.
apßpiüTTO'
man
apßpeon -Xpo^
^v)C-Xpo-
i-VO
nouns
made of
|uX<>-
wood
ep-io
nouns
belonging to
Xeip'CùP^
winter
X€ip-€piO-
€p-lVO
nouns
belonging to
PVKT'
niglit
PVKT'SpXPO"
Ï-PO
town
belonging to
Tapapr-
Tarentum
Ta/jair-tvo-
TJ-PO
town
belonging to
KU^KO-
Cyzicus
KV^XK-IJPO'
ä-po
town
belonging to
SapÔc-
Sardis
2apBt-äpo'
ïpo
verbs
fit to (act. or
<o<p€\~€-
serve
û><f)eX-XpO'
(T'tpo
verbs
pas.)
ta- (m.)
heal
tä-a-XpO"
ïpo
nouns
like, etc.
popo-
custom
vop^-XpO'
ÏKO
verbs
fit to
apx'
rule
apX'XKO'
T-Xko
1
verbs
fit to
TTpay-
do
irpaK-rXKO"
!
nouns
belonging to
At/3v-
a Lybian
Aißv-KO-
'EXX»ji/-uca-
* ) w
ITTTT -t<0-
V
CKO
nouns
belonging to
'EXXÍ;!'-
Itttto-
a Greek
horse
CtKO
nouns
belonging to
Kopipßio-
a Corinthian
Kopcc^i'-a/co-
>-rs
male agent, etc.
<rT€(f>äpo-
wreath
(rT€(pàp-ï-ra-
aT€(j>àp-X-TÏB-
yv(ù-
know
TO
verbs
ypoo-TO^
ßdv-
die
ßpfp-TO-
T€0
verbs
to be d
TTOte-
make
Trotjy-TfO*
T€pO
A
iadj. or
of two
[tto- ;]
which ?
m ^
iro-Tcpo-;
Î prep.
TTpO
b^ore
TTpO-TSpO'
TTlplOr
verbs
fit to
aco-
save
aoo-njp-io*
yB-
delight-
^B-v-
pop
verbs
full of
pPO"
rememher
pPTf-pOP^
(f)€vr
nouus
full of
Bo\o-
craft
doXo-evr-
rjpea^
nouns
fitted with, etc.
XOXko-
copper
X<lXK'T}p€(r'
nouns
fuUof
kipBvpo-
1
danger
1
KlpBvP^'(ûBf(T'
Englisli
marme
cleanly
golden.
feminim
timid
high
thrifty
counxgtoMÂ
sham^uL
frightful, afmid
fun of hardship
revered
gloomy
human
wooden
wintry
belonging to night
of Tarentum
ofCyzicus
of Sardis
servieeohU
curable
customary
JU to rule
fUfor business
Libyan
Grecian
(^horses
of the (kyrwthUsns
ibdongingto
wreaths
hncnon
liahle to die
to be made
which of two f
former
saving
ddigJitfuh tweet
mindfxd
crafty
fitted with copper
dangerout
i
DERIVATION <>V VERBS
149
Bemarks.
* This suffix is much used iu compound adjectives.
* In appending the suffix attention must be paid to the final letter
of the C. F. Thus, from ^Ka-, right; jSaciXs/-, king; Otpta-, summer
MîXi^ro-, MiletuSf are derived SÎKaio-, ßäüiXtiO'^ Oepcio-, MîX)}(no-; and
from aXycíT-, pam, with suffix vo, aXyiivo-, painfuU for aXye<r-i/o-,
through aXyiv-vo-; compare the co-existing forms t^atwo- and ipativo'^
shiningy from ^ae<r-, iighty and tlie feminines xapua-ua' (adj.) and
rwir€i-<ya- (part.) from the C. F. xapuvr- and ruTTivr-.
^ These are strictly to be viewed as adjectives in lo from nouns in
rjjp; but many adjectives in rijpto occur without any corresponding
substantive in rrip,
* Perhaps this suffix carries with it a diminutive force. Compare
the English adjectives in ish; and for the form the numerous Latin adj.
in iy as suavi'y sweet*
® Adjectives in ;7p££r arc perhaps to be regarded as compounded with
the root dp-, fit*
® This suffix possibly contains the element ud-t<T-,form, shape : com¬
pare such words as prjvo'Cidea-, moon-shaped.
Of the Derivation of Verls.
519. Frequently a pure root, without the addition of any suf¬
fix, is used as the C. F. of a verb : as, dy-, lead ; ray- (<ro-), ar¬
range ; pdÔ-y (jiavôâv-)y learn ; pç-yjlow ; (¡)vy- {(j>€vy-)yfee*
520. Many crude forms of substantives and adjectives are,
without any additional suffix, employed as verbal crude forms :
as, TTTvx'j a fold, and tttvx- (<Ta)yfold up ; TratS-, m. f. child, and
TraiS- (0) pitiy like a child ; <^iíXdK-, m. watchman, and <l>vXdK-
{<rar), watch ; íXXk-, twisted, and ÍXXK-{<r<T), twist ; KgpvK-, m. herald,
and KgpvK- (crir), proclaim. The suffixes, thus transferred, often
came to be viewed as original verb-suffixes, and were then
appended to roots of different form.
521. Thus from substantives in a arise verbs in a : as,
Suhst.
Verl,
Orjpa-, f. hunting,
Tipa-, f. honour,
Tokpa-, f. daring,
ór¡pa-, hunt.
TÏpa-, honour.
roXpa-y le daring.
And then from words of a different form : as,
yoo-, m. wailing,
vepeai-, f. indignation.
yoor, lewail.
vepeaa-, le indignant.
150 DERIVATION OF VERBS.
522. From substantives in o arise verbs in o : as,
ôovXo-, m. slavCj ÔovXo-, enslave.
And then from words of a different form : as,
pi^ory Í rootf p^Co-y causc to tokc root,
623. From substantives and adjectives in to- arise verbs in ea
or more frequently in e, o- being dropped (§ 48) : as,
T^Xeo*-, n. end, riK^a^ or reXe-, fulfil.
aKf<r-, n. remedy, aK^tr- or a*€- (m.), heal.
Oapa-^cT-, n. courage, Oaptrt^, be bold.
€VTV)^€(r-, fortunate, be fortunate.
And then from words of a different form : as,
í^rXo-, m. î. friend, xfnXf-, be a friend, love,
otKo-, m. house, oiK€', dwell.
(fxùva', Í. voice, Kfxúve-, speak.
evàatpov-, happy, tvhaipove-, be happy.
Verbs in e from subst. and adj. in o are very numerous.
524. From nouns in i and v arise a few verbs in i and v : as,
prjvi-, f. wrath, urjvi-, be wroth.
Wv-, straight, lÚv-, go straight,
625. From substantives in ev arise verbs in 6v : rs,
ßa&iKtv, m. king, ßao-iXev-, be hing.
ÍTTTTfv-, m. horseman, Inntv-, ride, serve in cavalry.
And, more frequently, from words of a different form : as,
ßovXa-, f. counsel, ßovXev-, give counsel.
5ovXo-, m. slave, dovXev-, be a slave,
riyçpov, m. guide, leader, r¡yepov€v-, guide, rule.
526. From substantives in /¿-ar arise verbs in p-av (aiv) :* as,
ovopaT', n, name, ovopav', give a name to.
crrjpàr-', n. sigji, token, (rrjpap-, give a sign.
And then from words of a different form ; more readily, how¬
ever, from words which show some resemblance to the original
form : as,
TToipev-, m. shepherd, rroipav-, tend sheep.
€v(l)pov, glad, ev^pai*-, gladden,
*
* For this substitution of v for r, compare the adjectives a-irpay-pov-,
easy; a-irrip-ov-^ unharmed, from Trpay-par-, also the Latin
neuter substantives in men and mento, which evidently correspond in
form and meaning to the Greek neuters in par.
DERIVAÏION Oï* VERBS. lôl
úfpfío-f hoty êcpiiav-y Ttiahe warnt,
AevKo-, whitCy , \fvKap-y whiten,
527. From adjectives in v arise verbs in v-p (vi/) : as,
^àv-y sweety ^bvi^y sweeten,
ßapv-y heavyy ßapvv-y make heavy.
ând then from words of a different form : as,
Xa/Li7rpo-, hrighty , "Kapnpvv-y brighten.
In some instances, the adj. in v has disappeared in the positive,
traces of the formation surviving, however, in the compar. and
superl., and in a derived verb in vp : thus, with ai<rx-po-y tigly,
etc.y ai-e connected the compar. and superl, ai(rx*'Ov and ato-xioro-,
and a subst. aia'xeo'-y suggesting an adjectival C.F. ato-xv-, whence
is derived a verbal C, F. oktxvp-, shame. Similarly, we have
oKy-eipo-y paiitf'uly akylop^y aXyttrro-, aXyeo--, [aXyu-], aXyvv-%
KpaT~€po-y strongy icpettrcrov-, xpartoro-, Kpärea-y [Kpàrv-^ Kpàrvp-.
528. From substantives in ïà arise verbs in ïè (O : as,
Trató-, m. f. child, íTOíÓ-, play like a child.
eXTTtô-, f. hope, iXnib-y feel hope.
€pib-y t strife, €pïà-, strive.
And, more frequently, from words of a different form : as,
*EXXt;ï^-, m. a Greek, 'EXX^viÓ-, speak Greek, etc.
oTrXo- (pL), n. arms, . ¿nXíb-, furnish with arms.
529. From substantives in ar {p-ar) are made verbs in a$ (() :
as,
êavpar-, n. wonder, ôavpàb-,* feel wonder,
ôeXear-, n. bait, enticement, beXeaà-, entice.
And, more frequently, from words of another form : as,
ótAca-, f. justice, bÏKâà-, give judgement
epyo-, n. work, epyab- (m.), work.
i
630. A few verbs called desideratives are formed in a (or m)
from nouns, and in o-« from verba (through the future) : as,
(popo-y m. bloodshed, tpoua-, thirst for blood.
Ôavaro-, m. death, ^ I
îToXc/tf-, make war, îroXf^T^-o-et-, wish for war.
yi\a-<T-, laugh, yéXa-íTít-, wish to laugh.
531." On inceptive verbs in o-ac (í-o-k), see § 266.
• As well as Oavpàp-, an older form.
152 COMPÜSITICW.
Connected with this formation in o-k is a peculiar form of the
past-imperfect and aorist tenses, active and middle, made by
means of a suffix o-k or c-o-k with the person-endings of the past-
imperf, and signifying the repetition of an act in past time ; the
augment is usually dropped : thus, from rpctr-, tum^ are formed
(past-imp. 1 sing.) TpiTtçarKov and ; (1 aor.) rptyl^a^Kov.
and TpeylracKoprjy ; (2 aor.) rpaTrca-KOV and rpairea-Koprjy, The USe
of these tenses is confined to the Ionic dialect ; in Attic the
same meaning was conveyed by means of the ordinary tenses
with a^: as, ftôoi/ âc, J would (repeatedly) see^=id€(rKov,
é
532. Verbs in a, aÔ, c, €v, generally denote a state^ or the pos-'
session or exercise of some faculty, etc., implied by the simple
word ; thus, they are both transitive and intransitive : as, from
viKa-, f- victory, arises the verb pÏKa-, he victorious, conquer. But
verbs in € and €v are generally intransitive.
533. Verbs in o, ày, vv, have usually a factitive signification ;
as, ôovXo-, malte a slave of; Beppav-, warm ; ^Bvv-, sweeten.
534. Verbs in ïô belong to both classes : as, îAttîÔ-, he hopeful,
hope, but àyvXB', render pure. Many verbs in XB derived from
proper names are imitative: as, ^XXímrXB-, belong to Philip's
party ; 'EXXi;i/t3-, act the Greek.
Of Composition.
535. The first member of a compound word may be either a
noun (substantive or adjective), a verb, or some particle. The
second member may be either a noim or a verb.
536. If the first member of a compound be a substantive or
adjective, it is prefixed (in the crude form) with no other change
or addition than such as may be required for euphony : thus are
derived
from 'nvp-,Jire, and hear, 7rvp'<pop-o-,Jïre'
hearing.
QaKea-, shield, iraX-, hrandisk, aaKfa-iraX-o-, hran^
dishing a shield.
XopO", chorus, BXBaaKaXo-, teacher, p^opo-SiôacrKdXo-,
teacher of a chorus.
TToXv-, many, yXwTTa-, tongue,- TroKv-yKt^rr-o-jmany-
tongued.
Final a is usually changed to o : as,
from 7¡p(par, day, and ^iíXa/c-, watcher, Tjpepo-tpvXar-, watching hy
day.
COMPOSITION
153
Final o is dropped if the second word begin with a vowel : as,
from iTTTTo^, horsCy and apx-, command, iirTr-apx-o-, commander of
cavalry,
Kiùpa-, village, opx'f command, K(ùp'apx-'0-f head of a vil¬
lage.
But, if the second word begin with f ov a- subsequently lost, the
final vowel of the first word is generally retained, and crasis
often takes place : as,
from KaKo-j had, and -qô^ir- {FqOfo-), disposition, KaKo-^Sea-, ill-
disposed,
KaKO-, had, €pyo- (fepyo-), deed, KcÍKovpyo-, i, e.
KaKo-epyo-, eviidoei\
paßdo-, staff, ^X" hold, paßbovx-O'y i. e.
paßbo-ox-0-, holding a staff.
If the first word end with a consonant and the second begin
with a consonant, o is used as connecting vowel : as,
from davpar-, wonder, and 7rot-€-, do, ÔavpàT-o-Troi-o-, wonder¬
worker,
irärep-, father, ktcv-, hill, irarp-o-KTov-o-^ father-killcr.
Also after the weak vowels t and v, o is inserted : as,
from (¡>x>(rí-, nature, and Xey-, speak, (f>v<rt-o-\oy-o-, natural philo¬
sopher,
ixBv-, fish, ix^V'0-f^ay-o-,fishreater.*^
But of neuters in eo- and ar (par) those syllables are often drop¬
ped ; or, rather, an earlier stage of the root is recurred to : as,
from avQ-^a-, flower, and v€p-,feed, 'avÚ-o-vop-o-, feeding on
flowers,
anepp-aT-, seed, Xey-, gather, crTrepp-o-Xoy-o-, picking tip
seeds.
537. If the first member of a compound be a verb, it is an¬
nexed without change, or, if euphony requires, with the insertion
* At least, such is the usual but not altogether satisfactory explana¬
tion of this 0. On the other hand, it has been suggested that in such
compounds originally a genitival or other secondary form constituted
the first element, of which the so-called connecting vowel o is a relic.
Thus, for instance, ix^voa-<¡>ayo- would have been the original form of
this word. Compare HiXoTrovvqao-, island of Peiops, which is admitted
to be for Il£\o7ro(r-vj7«To-, just as speßtvro- is from epißta-vo- (§48).
In such words as Trvpï-ysvtir-, wrought by fire ; opsat-rpo^o- (or opH-
rpo^o-), reared on the mountains, a dative case is usually recognised in
the former element.
154 COMPOSITION.
of a short vowel, e, t or o, as connecting vowel: thus are de^
rived—
from ireid-(in.), obey, and flpX"> command^ îrfi^-apx-o-, obedient to
orders,
ôaK-, bitCt dv/io-, hearty Öaic-f-öv/io- hmrt^on-
suming,
apx'i eoTfmand^ tíktov-, artificer^ apx'-t-reKTov^' eliief ar¬
tificer.
Xwr-, leavCy orparo-y army y XiTr-^-orpar-ta-, deser¬
tion from the army
But not unfrequently the syllable o-t (before vowels n-l is in¬
serted: as,
fi'om Xu-, loosen, and îtovo-, toil, Xû-o-i-ttoi/o-, ending toil.
wXijy-, strike, ÍTnro-, horse, 7rXi;|-i7r7ro-, steed-spurring.
This syllable o-t, (earlier ri, as ßa-rX-ävtipa-, man-feeding) is doubt-
•less the same as the suffix <r4 of feminine nouns signifying an
act.
538. Many compound adjectives are formed by aid of certain
inseparable particles prefixed : the most important of these pre¬
fixes are—
a. The negative particle av-, before consonants a- {Alpha pri-
vativum): thus,
from av- and atrio-, cause, is made av-airio-, guiltless, etc.
ù<€vÔ€po-,free, av-eXeudfpo-, uffree, slavish.
warfp-, father, a-irarop-, fatherless,
paú-, learn, a-pa6-^a-, stupid.
If the second member of the compound began with f, a was used
according to the rule ; in Attic contraction sometimes ensued :
thus,
from a- and (f)epyo-, work, was made a-€pyo-,Ait.apyo-, idle.
{f)ekovt-, roilling, a-^kovr-, úkovt-,unwilling,
(f)€iK-, seem, a-eiK-e<r-, aiK€cr-,U7iseemly.
Similarly firom vnvo-, sleep, originally owvo-, was formed c-uttvo-,
sleepless, not äwTrvo-.
The particle vt)-, apparently another form of av-, has the same
signification: it is used in poetical compoimds; as, vrjktca-,
pitiless, from eXtco*-, pity *
* With the inseparable negative particle àv-, à-, or vri'j compare the
preposition aveu, without, the Latin conjunction ne and particle fn-, the
German ohne and «n-, and the English un- : also consult Prof. Key,
* Phil. Soc., iii. p. 52,
coMPosmoîr.
155
h. The particle conveying the notion of d\ßcult^ hady and
corresponding to the English mis- in misfortune : thus,.
from ÔuiT- and ôv^o-y hearty was made despondent
*âXo-, he captitredy Ôvc-aXw^o-, difficult to
capture^
Compare with these the numerous compounds of eu, well ; as,
€v-6vyio-y cheerful; eu-aX<a-To-, easy to capturCy etc.
c. The copulative particle *â-, or, without the aspirate, ä-, of
'a/io, at onCy together {Alpha copulativum) : thus,
from *a- and iravr-y ally was made 'â-7raur-, all together.
xeXeudo-, ready d-KoXovöo-, attendant on,
ra\avTo-y halancCy a-raXai/ro-, equivalent^
539. Compound adjectives expressing intcnsityy are made with
the inseparable particles aya-, ¿2-, apt-, and ept- : as, aya-KXiÎTo-,
very famous; fa-TrXouro-, very rieh-, äpX-brjKo-y very plain \ epi-
dovTTo-y loud-sounding. These words are not found in Attic prose,
540. Compound adjectives are also made with prepositions
and adverbs prefixed : as, 7rpo-6vpo-yfonvar<Pmindedy eager'y imo-
èrjpo-y away from onés country; o-uï^Ïko-, advocate; (v-ôvpo-y
cheerful ; oyl^ï-pâûto-, late in learning.
541. The second member of a compound may be either a noun
or a verb : the termination must be adapted, if necessary, to the
class of words to which the compound belongs. Hence,
a. If the second member of a compound adjective be a noun,
it often remains quite unchanged : thus,
from aa<l>€<r-j deary is made a-aaí^eo--, obscure.
TToXt-, statCy a-TToXi-, outlaw,
tróepea-y Strength, a-aôevetr-y weak.
ffTta--, year, ôc/ca-erctr-, ten years old.
Trató-, childy eu-rraiÓ-, fvith good childrett.
€pyo-, work, (^tX-epyo-, industrious.
b. Feminine substantives in a give rise to compound adjectives
in o : thus,
from rlpa-y honour, is made ^iXo-rtpo-, ambitious.
* On the so-called Alpha intensivumy see Lobeck, Pathologiae Graect
Serm. Elementa, pp. 32—36 In many of the words usually given as
compounded with this particle, the a is evidently the a copulative; in
4
Others the initial a seems to be the moveable euphonic a, or at most a
formative letter without signification.
. 156
COMPOSITION.
G, Nouns of the syncopated declension in ip, and hmrt^
9iind, change c into o : thus,
%
ft-om firjT€p-y mother, is made â-firfTop-, motherless,
ävep-, man,. troKv-ävop-y jiopulons.
<j>pev-, mind, a-<ù-(ppov~, sound-winded.
d. Neuters in par form adjectives in pov, less frequently in po :
thus,
from irpaypàr-, deed, is made iroXv^paypov-, "busy*
oT^paT", siyn, àoTipov-, without sign (or à<n)pO',
see § 526.)
e. Words of the separable declension not unfrequently take
the suffix o : thus,
from 'kXpev-, harhour, is made a-\ïp€v-o-, harhourless.
av€p', man, AXe^avBp-o-, Alexander.
Sometimes two forms coexist, one in a consonant and one in o ;
as, iroXv-avhpo- and Trdkv-ávop-, populous ', ev-retp^etr- and o-,
wellnvalled*
542. If the second member of a compoxind adjective be a verb,
the verbal root may remain unchanged: but more frequently
some suffix is added, as o, eo-, to, or less frequently r : thus,
from TrX^y-, strike, is made Kara-^Xr^y-, timid.
¿vy-, yoke, oi;¿uy- (also onj¿vy-o-), yoked together,
icr€v~, kill, irarpo-KTov-o-, hilling one^s father,
pàô-, learm, a-pad-eo--, stupid.
ÔV-, enter, ä-Bv-ro-, not to be entered,
yviù-, know, a-yv(ù-j-, unknown.
In such compounds the verb is generally, but not exclusively,
passive or intransitive. Sometimes the adjective is ambiguous* ;
thus, TrarpoKTovo- means also killed by ond s father', a-ßXäß-ea-, is
unharmed and harmless', a-^eiÖ-ea-, disobedient and not-persua¬
sive ; a-TToro-, not drinkable and never drinking.
543. Compound substantives, partaking of the nature of sub¬
stantives and adjectives, are made from verbal roots by addition
of the suffixes denoting agents: as, v€<pe\-^ycp€-ra-, cloud-col-
♦ In accentuated Greek such ambiguous words are sometimes dis¬
tinguished : as, waTpoKTÔvoç (N. S.), killing onds father, but irarpoKto-
VOÇ, killed by one's father : in the genitive, however, both become wa-
rpoKTovov. The number of the words in which the distinction is made
is, moreover, very liirUed,
t
COMPÜSiTiON.
157
lecting, from ve^eXa-, cloudy and ayep-, collect ; firjXo-ßo-rrjp-, sheep-
feeding. But these are chiefly poetical.
544. Feminine substantives of an abstract signification may be
compounded with prepositions without undergoing any change
of form : thus, from the fem. nouns ßovXa-, counsel ; Ôt/ca-, right,
suit at law ; oÔo-, road, are formed the compounds fTrt-jSovXa-,
plot ; icara-óbca-, Sentence ; o-ov-oóo-, asseinbly. In composition
with other words than prepositions such feminines usually take
the suffix la, as aei-ípvy-ia-, perpetual banishment, from
fight Thus such words as o-vp-êe-a-i-, putting together-, vav-
fxâx-ta-, seafght, may be regarded either as derived from the
compound words, <tvv-Ô€-, put together; vav-paxo-, ßghting at sea,
or compounded of <tvv and Ô€<ri-, vav- and /aax«-. They are usually
treated as derivatives.
545. Compound verbs are only made by prefixing some pre¬
position to a simple verb : the verb undergoes no change. Thus,
from ß^-, throw, Ô€-,put, are made the compounds ano-ßoK-,
throw away ; aw-Ôç-, put together.'^
546. The very numerous verbs apparently compounded of
verbs and other words not prepositions are really derived from
compound adjectives or substantives : thus,
from a priv. and hvvaro-, able, is made a-hvváro-, unable ;
and thence is derived the verb aÓíífar€-, be unable. '
from vav-, ship, and pàx-,Jight, is made vav-pax-o-^fghting by sea ;
and thence vavpax^-^Jight by sea.
€v, well, ^py~i work, cv-epy-tra-, benefactor ;
and thence €V€py€T€-, be a benefactor.
o-o)-, sound, (jypev, jnind, cr<o-(f>pov-, sound-minded ;
and thence o-o}(j)pov€-, be sound-miinded.
The only exceptions to this statement are found in a few Epic
participles, such as haKpv-x'^ovr-, shedding tears, from haKpv-, tear,
and xe-oï'r-, pouring.
547. If the first syllable of the second element of a compound
was short, it was sometimes lengthened, originally to avoid the
concurrence of too many short syllables, and the practice was
then extended to cases in which no such reason appears : thus,
iTTTT-ïjXara-, driver of horses ; €TT-<avvpo-, sumamed -, ap-<apoTo-, un-
* This process is less composition, strictly so called, than juxta¬
position: see § 502.
15b COMPOSITION.
mom ; <¡>Xk"r¡p€Tfio-t Jond of towing ; €u-u)5eíT-, meet-smelltngj
are compounded of tXa-, drive ; ovop-ar-, name ; ojuo-, swear ;
fpfT/xo-, oar; 08-, smelL To the same principle are due the long
vowel» in such words as €\a<j>n'ßo\o-y shooting .deer (fcr íXa^o-
3oXo-\
LO^DON: R. CLAY, SOKS, AND TAALOB, PKlMCfelUA
CLASSICAL WORKS.
A GRAMMAR OF THE LATIN LANGUAGE,
from Plautus to Suetonius. By H. J, ROBY, M.A., late
Fellow of St. John's College, Cambridge. Part I. Crown 8vo.
Ss, 6d,
AN INTRODUCTION TO GREEK AND
LATIN ETYMOLOGY. By JOHN PEILE, M.A., Fellow and
Tutor of Christ College. Second Edition. Crown 8vo. 10$. 6d,
THE SEVEN KINGS OF ROME : An Easy
Narrative, abridged from the First Book of Livy. A First Latin
Reading-book, with Grammatical Notes. By the Rev. J.
WRIGHT, M.A. Fifth Edition. Fcap. 8vo. 3s. With Voca¬
bulary, 3s. 6d.
/
CICERO'S ORATIONS AGAINST CATILINA.
With Introduction and Notes translated from Halm, with Addi¬
tions. By A. S. WILKINS, M.A., Professor of Latin in Owens
College, Manchester. Fcap, 8vo. 3«. 6d.
CICERO. The Second Philippic Oration. With
an Introduction, and Notes translated from Karl Halm. Edited
by J. E. B. MAYOR, M.A. Third Edition. Fcap. 8vo. 5s,
JUVENAL. Thirteen Satires. With Commen¬
tary by the Rev. J. E. B. MAYOR, M.A. Second Edition,
Enlarged. Vol, I. Crown 8vo. 7«. 6í¿., or in two parts, 3s, 6i.
each.
SALLUST. With English Notes. By C.
MERIVALE, D.D. New Edition. Fcap. 8vo. 4.?. Gd,
The CATILINA and JÜGURTHA maybe had separately, price
2s, Gd. each.
TACITUS. Agricola and Germania. A Revised
Text and English Notes. By A. J. CHURCH and W. J.
BRODRIBB. New Edition. Fcap. 8vo. 3s, Gd. Separately,
2s, each. A Translation by the same Authors, 2«. 6^,
CLASSICAL WO'R'K^—continued
THE HISTORY OF TACITUS. Translated
into Englisk by A. J. CHURCH, M. A., and W. J. BRODRIBB,
M.A. New and cheaper Edition. Crown 8vo. 6«. [This day.
MYTHOLOGY for LATIN VERSIFICATION.
A brief Sketch of the Fables of the Ancients, prepared to be
rendered into Latin Verse, for Schools. ByF. HODGSON, B.D.,
late Provost of Eton. New Edition, Revised by F, C. HODG¬
SON, M.A. 18mo. Ss.
HOMER'S ODYSSEY. IX. to XII. The
Narrative of ODYSSEUS. With a Commentary by Professor
JOHN E. B. MAYOR. Part I. Fcap. 3s. [This day,
HELLENICA; or, History of Greece in Greek:
being a First Greek Iteading-book, With Explanatory Notes.
Third Edition. With a Vocabulary. By the Rev. J. WRIGHT,
M.A. Fcap. 8vo. 3s. 6d.
FIRST GREEK READER. Edited after Karl
HALM. With Corrections and Additions, by J. E. B. MAYOR,
M.A. Second and Cheaper Edition. Fcap. 8vo. 45. 6d.
GREEK FOR BEGINNERS. By Joseph B.
MAYOR, M.A., Professor of Classical Tàterature in King^s
College, London. New Edition. Pari I. Is. 6d. Parts II. and
III. §5. 6d. Complete in One Vol. fcap. 8vo. 45. 6d.
DEMOSTHENES ON THE CROWN. With
English Notes. By B. DRAKE, M.A. Fourth Edition. To
which is prefixed .álSCHINES against CTESIPHON. Fcap.
THUCYDIDES. The Sicilian Expedition; being
Books VI. and VII. of Thucydides. With Notes. By the Rev.
P. FROST, M.A. New Edition, Revised and Enlarged. Extra
fcap. 8vo. 05.
8vo. 05.
MACMILLAN AND CO., LONDON.